menu icon
go to homepage
  • Home
  • Recipe Index
  • About Me
  • Contact
search icon
Homepage link
  • Home
  • Recipe Index
  • About Me
  • Contact
×
Katie's Cucina

Search Results for: recipes

Air Fryer Recipes for Beginners

Published on: January 19, 2023 Updated on: January 19, 2023 by Katie Leave a Comment

brats, baked potato, green beans, and bacon with text on image for Pinterest.

If you are new to Air Frying I have 20+ Air Fryer Recipes for Beginners! From breakfast, lunch, and dinner and even dessert. If you are looking at buying an Air Fryer, just received one, or maybe have had one I guarantee you will be an air fryer pro in no time!

Chicken in an air fryer, french fries, hot dogs, and pork and green beans with text on image for Pinterest.

If you are new to cooking with an Air Fryer I am here to share with you over 25 Air Fryer Recipes for Beginners. I’m also here to break down the different types of Air Fryers and some common frequently asked questions I get. I’ve been air frying for over two years now. I use my Air Fryer to cook something at almost every meal.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Types of Air Fryers

There are two types of Air Fryers. You have the air fryer oven and the air fryer basket. Both get the job done, and both can be limited in space and what you can cook. When you are cooking for a family or even simply cooking for others you will want the largest air fryer possible.

I have the following air fryer models:

  • PowerXL Air Fryer – I have the VORTEX which is more of an oven type that has multiple trays.
  • Instant™ Vortex™ 5.7-quart Air Fryer which is the basket style and my favorite air fryer by far!
  • Instant Omni™ Pro 18L Toaster Oven and Air Fryer which is another oven style but also has a toaster oven built in too!

Air Fryer vs Air Fryer Oven

As you read above. I have both a traditional basket Air Fryer and an Air Fryer oven. I get the question a lot about what is an air fryer vs air fryer oven? A traditional Air Fryer is a countertop appliance that has a basket that you place food in. The Air Fryer Oven is more of a toaster oven style that is multi-use.

Air fryers Accessories

Are you looking for Air fryers Accessories? Check out this list of all the accessories that you can either buy or that come with Air Fryers.

  • Air Fryer Liners – If you want to minimize mess you will want to purchase a pack of the disposable air fryer liners.
  • Air Fryer Magnetic Cheat Sheet Set – This magnetic cheat sheet can come in very handy and be placed on your refrigerator to be used as a quick reference!
  • Oil Sprayer for Cooking – This is a must have in the kitchen when using an Air Fryer. You will save money having your own oil spray bottle verse buying the prepackaged. Plus less waste in the landfills!
  • Silicone Cord Holder – I like to place a silicone cord holder on the back to wrap the cord up nice and neat for storage.
  • Air Fryer Accessories from COSORI – COSORI is one of the leading Air Fryer companies and they have a set of 6 Accessories that fit for most 5.8Qt and larger fryers. This set includes: Oven Cake & Pizza Pan, Metal Holder, Skewer Rack & Skewers, etc. This set is BPA Free, Nonstick Coating, and Dishwasher Safe.

Air Fryer Questions

Got questions about the Air Fryer? I’m here to answer them!

What is the largest air fryer?

The 2 largest Air Fryers on the market are: Wolfgang Puck 9.7QT Air Fryer Stainless Steel, Large Single Basket Design and Paula Deen HF-9001D Family Size Air Fryer which has a 9.5 quart capacity. According to Consumer Reports though both of these Air Fryers actual quart capacity is around the 8 quart mark.

What is the easiest way to clean an air fryer?

Regardless of what style air fryer you own you will want to clean your air fryer right away. If you have the basket style you need to read the manual to see if you can fully submerge your basket. My Instant Brand basket can not be submerged.

If you have an oven, you will want to unplug it and let it cool down. Once cooled, you can wipe clean with a damp cloth. Then dry before you plug it in to cook again. You can also remove the bottom drip tray and clean that out.

If the basket is full of oil and food, I will put a little dish soap in the bottom of the basket and fill with about 2-3 inches of water to let it soak.

Always, clean your air fryer with a soft sponge that is non-abrasive so that you don’t scratch the non-stick surface. Always rinse well and dry immediately.

What should you not put in an air fryer?

There are a few items you should cook in an air fryer.
– Leafy Greens: These do not cook evenly and shrivel up and burn more then anything.
– Grains: You cannot cook rice or any other grain in the air fryer.
– Cheese: Any food that has an excessive amount of cheese will most likely melt off the food and fall in the drip tray causing not only a big mess for you to clean up, but also could burn.
– Battered Foods: If you have a battered ingredient the batter will most likely drip to the bottom causing the batter to burn and the possibility that your food won’t cook properly.
– Large Meat: Large meat such as a large whole chicken that is over 3 pounds. The chicken will burn before it’s cook through to the middle.

Can you put raw meat in Airfryer?

Yes, it is safe to put raw meat in the airfryer as long as it has been thawed and cooked to safe consumption temperature. Always use a meat thermometer to ensure the protein is cooked through.

Top 10 Things to Cook in an Air Fryer

Air fryers are versatile kitchen appliances that can make cooking easier and healthier by using less oil. Here are the top 10 things you can cook in an air fryer:

  1. French Fries: Achieve crispy, golden fries with just a fraction of the oil compared to traditional frying methods.
  2. Chicken Wings: Get perfectly crispy and juicy wings without the mess of deep frying.
  3. Vegetable Chips: Make crunchy chips from kale, sweet potatoes, zucchini, and other vegetables.
  4. Mozzarella Sticks: Enjoy gooey, cheesy sticks with a crisp coating, great for appetizers or snacks.
  5. Salmon: Cook tender and flaky salmon fillets with a slight crisp on the outside.
  6. Chicken Tenders: Breaded chicken tenders come out crispy on the outside and tender on the inside.
  7. Shrimp: Perfectly cook shrimp for salads, tacos, or as a standalone dish.
  8. Brussels Sprouts: Achieve caramelized, crispy Brussels sprouts with a nutty flavor.
  9. Steak: Cook a juicy steak with a seared exterior, similar to grilling.
  10. Hard-Boiled Eggs: Easily cook hard-boiled eggs with a creamy yolk and perfectly cooked white.

These dishes demonstrate the versatility of an air fryer, making it a useful tool for preparing a wide variety of meals and snacks.

Air Fryer Breakfast

Craving a quick and easy breakfast? Here are a few of my favorite recipes including my absolute favorite way to cook bacon.

Air Fryer Bacon

Square photo of a paper towel lined plate with crispy bacon
Make crispy crunchy bacon in minutes with my easy Air Fryer Bacon recipe. All you need is non-stick cooking spray, bacon, and an Air Fryer to make this recipe.
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Breakfast Potatoes

White dish with fried breakfast potatoes inside sitting on red and white towel
Air Fryer Breakfast Potatoes are made in 20 minutes time with only 15 minutes of cooking time in the Air Fryer. Crispy potatoes paired with onions and bell peppers make for a delicious breakfast side dish.
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Breakfast Bowl – Copycat Chick Fil A

Air Fryer Breakfast Bowl - Copycat Chick Fil A
This Air Fryer Breakfast Bowl was inspired by and made to by a copycat Chick FIl A Breakfast Bowl. It’s a quick and easy breakfast that’s made with chicken nuggets, eggs, tater tots, cheese, and more. You’ll love how quick this Easy Air Fryer recipe is to make.
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer French Toast Sticks

Air Fryer French Toast Sticks
Air Fryer French Toast Sticks are cooked to crispy perfection in this breakfast favorite. You can even cook them from frozen!
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Egg Toast

Air Fryer Egg Toast
Air Fryer Egg Toast, also called Egg in a Hole or Egg in a Basket, is ready in under 10 minutes and 2 ingredients.
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Dinner

Looking to make a quick dinner? Check out some of my favorite dinner recipes including Air Fryer Salmon and Air Fryer Pork Tenderloin.

Air Fryer Sirloin Steak

Sliced steak, baked potatoe, and spianch on a white plate sitting on a white and blue striped cloth.
Craving steak, but don't want to fire up the grill? Make my perfectly cooked Air Fryer Sirloin Steak recipe in under 15 minutes time.
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Chicken Parmesan

Top view of an air fryer drawer with four chicken breast.
Air Fryer Chicken Parmesan is an easy way to enjoy an Italian classic in only a half hours time. Plump juicy breaded chicken breast are cooked in the Air Fryer and then topped with marinara and mozzarella cheese.
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Turkey Breast

Cooked seasoned turkey breast in a black air fryer basket.
Want to enjoy turkey year round? My easy Air Fryer Turkey Breast recipe is done in under an hour from start to finish. This is ideal if you are feeding 2-4 people and don't want to cook a larger turkey.
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Brats

White platter filled with 4 sausages in buns.
Air Fryer Brats are made in under 20 minutes time and make for a delicious easy dinner, tailgating meat dish, or even an easy way to complete your Oktoberfest feast.
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Salmon Recipe

Four salmon filets on a white platter with lemon.
If you love salmon you'll love my easy Air Fryer Salmon Recipe that is made in under 15 minutes from start to finish. This gluten free / dairy free seafood recipe makes for an easy weeknight dinner or an elegant dinner party main dish.
Check out this recipe

Chicken Tenders in Air Fryer

6 chicken strips on a white platter.
If your family craves that fried chicken taste without all the grease, this is your recipe. My Chicken Tenders in Air Fryer are fast, no-fuss, and a little healthier than your standard fried fare. Grab your air fryer and cook up everyone’s favorite American chicken dish!
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Sausage

Top view of 5 crispy sausage links on a white platter with red and white striped napkin underneath it
My Air Fryer Sausage is made in 12 minutes time with crispy skin and juicy meat. These Italian Sausage links are perfect to serve with pasta, on subs with peppers and onions, or just eat on their own.
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Pork Tenderloin

White plate with sliced pork tenderloins and green beans with pork tenderloin in the background.
Air Fryer Pork Tenderloin has a homemade rub, is juicy and flavorful, and takes 30 minutes to make! This Air Fryer recipes has become a new easy dinner staple in my home.
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Hot Dogs

three hotdogs on white plate. far left hotdog with green relish and ketchup middle hotdog with chili topped with yellow shredded cheese, far right hotdog topped with green relish and ketchup. fries in he background
If you want an easy way to make hot dogs my Air Fryer Hot Dogs recipe is done in under 10 minutes from start to finish.
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Side Dishes

Looking to make a side dish in the Air Fryer? Try a few of my favorite easy Air Fryer sides from green beans, acorn squash, and homemade french fries!

Air Fryer Corn on the Cob

Black Air Fryer basket with 6 corn on the cobs inside the basket.
My Air Fryer Corn on the Cob recipe is made in under 20 minutes and takes just 2 ingredients. If you are looking for an easy seasonal side dish give this cooking method a try.
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Baked Potatoes

Two white plates stacked with a loaded baked potato and scallops.
Make crispy on the outside soft in the middle Baked Potatoes in the half the time thanks to the Air Fryer. Coat in oil and sprinkle on salt for a restaurant style baked potato.
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Green Beans

White bowl of green beans with garlic divided up close.
If you are looking for an easy side dish to make my Air Fryer Green Beans recipe is done in under 10 minutes and yields a flavorful side dish everyone is going to love.
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Butternut Squash

Air fryer butternut squash in a dish on a blue and white striped cloth.
Discover the ultimate way to elevate your side dish game with Air Fryer Butternut Squash. Crispy, caramelized, and packed with flavor, this easy recipe is a game-changer for your dinner table!
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer French Fries

French fries on a white platter with with a small bowl of ketchup next to it.
Nothing is better then fresh cut homemade french fries. My Air Fryer French Fries require very little oil and yield a crispy french fry on the outside and a soft middle.
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Acorn Squash

White platter with cooked acorn squash.
If you love the flavor of acorn squash you'll love this easy Air Fryer recipes that will have your squash cooked fork tender in no time!
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Tortilla Chips

White bowl filled with corn tortilla chips with cilantro and dip in background.
Transform corn tortillas using the Air Fryer to make fresh tortilla chips in minutes. Crispy crunchy and tastes just like you get at the restaurant.
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Dessert Recipes

Craving something sweet? You can actually make quite a few delicious Air Fryer Dessert recipes including Air Fryer Cookies and Air Fryer S’mores!

Air Fryer Cookies

Air Fryer Cookies
Air Fryer Cookies! Have you ever wondered if you can bake cookies in the air fryer? The answer is: YES! These tips will ensure baking success!
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Oreos Recipe

Air Fryer Oreos Recipe
Get all the deliciousness of deep-fried Oreos without the mess or calories in this quick and easy air fryer Oreos recipe! It only takes 3 ingredients to make them and they’ll have the whole family hooked!
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Donuts With 3 Ingredients

Air Fryer Donuts With 3 Ingredients
These air fryer donuts are made from scratch and need just 3 ingredients! So fluffy and made without yeast.
Check out this recipe

Super Easy Air Fryer S’mores

Super Easy Air Fryer S’mores
You won’t need a campfire to make these s’mores, all you need is an Air Fryer. Delicious roasted marshmallows roasted right in the Air Fryer in less than 10 minutes. It’s the perfect easy dessert.
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Spiced Pecans

Air Fryer Spiced Pecans
These spiced pecans are the perfect snack when you are craving something spicy, salty, and even a little sweet. They are made in the air fryer in just a few minutes, so you will want to make these your favorite go-to snack!
Check out this recipe

I hope you found these tips and tricks very helpful if you are a beginner at using the Air Fryer. What recipe will you try first?

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

27 Leftover Mashed Potato Recipes

Published on: December 26, 2022 Updated on: January 4, 2023 by Katie 2 Comments

Potato rollenas, mashed potato cakes, potato soup, and shepherds pie with recipe title text on image for Pinterest.

Looking to use up your leftover mashed potatoes? Here are 27 delicious and unique recipes to use up the leftover mashed potatoes.

Potato rollenas, mashed potato cakes, potato soup, and shepherds pie with recipe title text on image for Pinterest.

We love mashed potatoes in our home. In fact, I almost always purposefully make extras so that I can make a few of these delicious leftover mashed potato recipes. Whether you have extra mashed potatoes from a big holiday dinner or an every day meal you can easily transform them into something new and equally delicious. Sometimes my family can’t even tell that they are day old potatoes from another meal!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Leftover Mashed Potato FAQs

How long are mashed potatoes good leftover in the fridge?

Leftover mashed potatoes are good in the fridge for 3-5 days if they are stored properly in a sealed container.

Is it safe to reheat mashed potatoes?

Yes, it is completely safe to reheat mashed potatoes as long as they were stored properly. Place in a microwave safe dish and reheat. The time will depend on how much potatoes you have to reheat.

Can you freeze mashed potatoes?

Yes, if you don’t feel like using up the leftovers right away you can freeze the mashed potatoes. Make sure you cool them to room temperature then place in a freezer safe container or freezer bag. Make sure to label them and then freeze for another meal.

27 Leftover Mashed Potato Recipes

Mashed Potato Soup

white bowl filled with mashed potato soup.
Mashed Potato Soup is a great way to use up leftover mashed potatoes. This quick cooking soup comes together in 30 minutes with just 6 ingredients. Even better, your family will never know they are eating the leftover mashed potatoes!
Check out this recipe

Mashed Potato Cakes

Top view of a plate of mashed potato cakes on a plate with toppings.
Use up leftover mashed potatoes to make the most divine Mashed Potato Cakes perfect to enjoy for breakfast or as a side dish with dinner. This recipe takes less then a half hour and uses both fresh and pantry staple ingredients you can find in your home. Don't forget to serve these potato pancakes with apple sauce and sour cream!
Check out this recipe

Skillet Turkey-Bacon Shepherds Pie

Skillet Turkey-Bacon Shepherds Pie
Are you looking for a quick healthy dinner to make on a busy weeknight? My family loves this Skillet Turkey-Bacon Shepherds Pie.
Check out this recipe

Potato Corn Chowder with Turkey

Change up the way you use up leftover turkey and make my easy recipe for Potato Corn Chowder with Turkey! No one will realize they are eating leftover turkey.
Check out this recipe

Duchess Potatoes

Duchess Potatoes
Duchess Potatoes! This elegant potato side dish is both beautiful and flavorful! A perfect companion for a steak dinner or special entrée and great way to use up the leftover mashed potatoes.
Check out this recipe

Cheesy Potato Croquettes

Cheesy Potato Croquettes
Holy croquette, are you ready for this? I’m feeling all sorts of nostalgic for travel, and itchy with anticipation as the weather becomes just the slightest bit nicer. Except for that blizzard that’s due for
Check out this recipe

Healthy Samosas

Healthy Samosas
The perfect, healthy Indian samosa recipe made with just six ingredients. These are potato and pea filled, air-fried or baked to perfection. Perfect snack!
Check out this recipe

Cheesy Leftover Mashed Potato Waffles

Cheesy Leftover Mashed Potato Waffles
Make the most of spare spuds with a quick and easy recipe that transforms them into cheesy leftover mashed potato waffles!
Check out this recipe

Cheesy Potato-Crusted Chicken Pot Pies

Cheesy Potato-Crusted Chicken Pot Pies
Cheesy potato-crusted chicken pot pies are pure comfort food. Tender chicken and vegetables, simmered in creamy, rich gravy and topped with a cheddar potato crust.
Check out this recipe

Thanksgiving Leftovers Stromboli Recipe

Thanksgiving Leftovers Stromboli Recipe
This Thanksgiving Leftovers Stromboli is an easy dinner recipe the day after Thanksgiving. Wrap them up in a simple dough for a quick meal.
Check out this recipe

Cheesy Leftover Mashed Potato Muffins

Cheesy Leftover Mashed Potato Muffins
Make the most of leftover spare spuds with a quick and easy recipe for cheesy baked mashed potato muffins!
Check out this recipe

Potato and Porcini Mushroom Cannelloni (Manicotti)

Potato and Porcini Mushroom Cannelloni (Manicotti)
This potato and porcini mushroom cannelloni (manicotti) is made with a leftover potato puree and porcini mushrooms and the sauce is a delicious cheesy béchamel.
Check out this recipe

Mashed Potato Casserole with Crispy Chicken

Mashed Potato Casserole with Crispy Chicken
This mouth-watering mashed potato casserole is topped with Corn, Cheddar Cheese, Crispy Chicken Strips, and a drizzle of brown gravy! It’s easy to make ahead of time and bake later for a quick family dinner!
Check out this recipe

Leftover Mashed Potato Quiche | Kookooyeh Sib Zamini

Leftover Mashed Potato Quiche | Kookooyeh Sib Zamini
Use up those leftover mashed potatoes in this Persian dish: Leftover Mashed Potato Quiche with saffron and tarragon, or in farsi: Kookooyeh Sib Zamini.
Check out this recipe

Loaded Mashed Potato and Meatball Casserole

Loaded Mashed Potato and Meatball Casserole
Loaded Mashed Potato and Meatball Casserole combines tender meatballs in marinara, melted mozzarella, and creamy, loaded mashed potatoes. It’s an easy, family-friendly favorite!
Check out this recipe

Vegan Shepherd’s Pie

Vegan Shepherd’s Pie
Vegan Shepherd’s Pie ~ pure comfort in every bite! The filling combines mushrooms, grated carrots, onions for a mince that is oh-so-savory!
Check out this recipe

Ham and Cheese Potato Pancakes

Ham and Cheese Potato Pancakes
My whole family loves mashed potato pancakes and this potato pancake recipe is packed with ham and cheese, making it a filling side dish or appetizer! Big thanks to Roth Cheese for sponsoring this post.
Check out this recipe

Papas Rellenas

Papas Rellenas
Papas Rellenas! These delicious mashed potato balls are stuffed with seasoned ground beef, breaded fried for a satisfying savory mouthful!
Check out this recipe

Super Simple Authentic Irish Potato Bread

Super Simple Authentic Irish Potato Bread
Easy Irish potato bread recipe, also known as Irish farls. Only 4 ingredients, potato, flour, butter, and salt. Delicious pan fried in butter
Check out this recipe

Best Instant Pot Gnocchi Recipe

Best Instant Pot Gnocchi Recipe
Get ready to savor the flavor of this Instant Pot Gnocchi. You can make it totally from scratch in under an hour and every minute will be worth the wait! It’s a family dinner favorite.
Check out this recipe

Turkey Sweet Potato Balls (THM-E)

Turkey Sweet Potato Balls (THM-E)
Perfect appetizer for a family gathering or school party, these tender turkey sweet potato balls will be a hit with your friends and family.
Check out this recipe

Mashed Potato and Wild Rice Stuffed Mushrooms

Mashed Potato and Wild Rice Stuffed Mushrooms
These hearty Mashed Potato and Wild Rice Stuffed Mushrooms are comfort-stuffed baby bella mushroom caps. They’re perfect for holiday dinners and cozy wintertime meals!
Check out this recipe

Crispy Potato Tacos Dorados

Crispy Potato Tacos Dorados
These crispy Potato Tacos Dorados will rival your favorite Mexican restaurant. Crunchy bites of taco heaven and unbelievably easy to make too. Add your favorite salsa and enjoy!
Check out this recipe

Mashed Potato Flatbread Recipe

Mashed Potato Flatbread Recipe
Having leftover mashed potatoes? Turn them into this easy mashed potato flatbread! It’s a yeast-free and oil-free side dish that everyone loves.
Check out this recipe

The Best Chicken Shepherd’s Pie

The Best Chicken Shepherd’s Pie
This Chicken Shepherd’s Pie recipe is a healthy comfort food meal that the whole family will love. This easy recipe is perfect for creating authentic Shepherd’s Pie using leftover chicken, leftover turkey, or even rotisserie chicken from your local grocer.
Check out this recipe

Leftover Mashed Potato Casserole

Leftover Mashed Potato Casserole
Mashed Potato Casserole is an easy and delicious way to use up leftover mashed potatoes from your holiday dinner. The leftover potatoes are layered in a casserole dish with cheese, cooked ham, and a crispy breadcrumb topping. It’s a great way to take those leftovers and turn them into a brand new dish.
Check out this recipe

Leftover Mashed Potato Rolls

Leftover Mashed Potato Rolls
Leftover Mashed Potato Rolls are a sweet and delicious way to use up any flavor of leftover mashed potatoes. Our #1 favorite way to use up leftovers!
Check out this recipe

If you have leftover mashed potatoes, I hope this helps give you some creative ideas on how to use up the leftovers and transform them into something just as delicious!

If you make any of these leftover mashed potato recipes, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I (as well as others) spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

40+ Thanksgiving Leftover Recipes

Published on: November 25, 2022 Updated on: November 25, 2022 by Katie Leave a Comment

four different leftover thanksgiving side dishes with recipe title text on image for Pinterest.

If you find yourself with holiday leftovers my round-up of over 40+ Thanksgiving Leftover Recipes will have the turkey, stuffing, cranberry sauce, mashed potatoes and even leftover pie used up creatively in no time!

Four photos; two of soups, potato pancakes and a flatbread with text on image for Pinterest.

I hope everyone had an amazing Thanksgiving. Now that are bellies are full and our refrigerators are full of leftover turkey, mashed potatoes, and other sides I felt it was time to share a round-up of 40+ Thanksgiving leftover recipes.

I rarely ever serve my leftovers the same the next day. I love to create new recipes and ways to use up the leftovers to make my guest feel like they are eating new meals. And of course not get tired of eating turkey, turkey, and more turkey.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Leftover Turkey Recipes

If you find yourself with an abundance of turkey, these leftover turkey recipes should be able to use it up in no time! From creative pot pies, to soups, stews, and sandwiches!

Instant Pot Turkey & Wild Rice Soup

Instant Pot Turkey & Wild Rice Soup
Let your Instant Pot do all the work and transform leftover turkey into this delicious Instant Pot Turkey & Wild Rice Soup in just minutes.
Check out this recipe

Easy Turkey Pot Pie

Close up of a turkey pot pie with a slice taken out of it.
Turkey Pot Pie is the perfect way to use up leftover turkey, gravy, and vegetables cooked down and sandwiched between store bought pie crust. It's then baked to golden brown which makes for an easy and comforting leftover dinner.
Check out this recipe

Turkey Pesto Pasta

My Turkey Pesto Pasta recipe takes only 30 minutes to make, and uses leftover turkey, pesto, spaghetti, and other vegetables to transform into an Italian-American easy dinner!
Check out this recipe

Turkey Butternut Squash and Lentil Soup

Turkey Butternut Squash and Lentil Soup
Use up that leftover turkey and make a hearty gluten-free dairy free soup that everyone can join the days after Thanksgiving.
Check out this recipe

French Onion Turkey Casserole

French Onion Turkey Casserole
This is a great recipe if you have any turkey left over from your big holiday meals! I found this recipe for French Onion Turkey Casserole at CampbellsKitchen.com. As I typically do, though, I…
Check out this recipe

Turkey and Wild Rice Soup

White bowl filled with vegetables and turkey soup.
Turkey and Wild Rice Soup is the perfect way to use up leftover turkey. Pair it with fresh vegetables and herbs and wild rice and you will have a comforting soup in about an hours time.
Check out this recipe

Creamed Turkey Over Biscuits

Creamed Turkey Over Biscuits
This comforting u0026 hearty Creamed Turkey Over Biscuits recipe is perfect for that leftover holiday turkey.
Check out this recipe

Potato Corn Chowder with Turkey

Change up the way you use up leftover turkey and make my easy recipe for Potato Corn Chowder with Turkey! No one will realize they are eating leftover turkey.
Check out this recipe

Turkey Enchiladas | Creme De La Crumb

Turkey Enchiladas | Creme De La Crumb
Easy cheesy turkey and black bean enchiladas! Perfect for using up leftover shredded turkey!
Check out this recipe

How to Make Turkey Stock

How to Make Turkey Stock
Don't waste the turkey carcass instead boil it down and learn how to make the most delicious and flavorful turkey stock!
Check out this recipe

Turkey Tetrazzini Recipe

White baking dish filled with pasta, cheese, turkey, carrots, and peas.
Turkey Tetrazzini is a creamy baked pasta casserole that has mushrooms, peas, carrots, and turkey. This rich and creamy casserole recipe is the perfect way to reinvent leftover turkey into something new and takes just under an hour to make.
Check out this recipe

Skillet Turkey-Bacon Shepherds Pie

Skillet Turkey-Bacon Shepherds Pie
Are you looking for a quick healthy dinner to make on a busy weeknight? My family loves this Skillet Turkey-Bacon Shepherds Pie.
Check out this recipe

Leftover Turkey Recipe: Turkey Pho in 15 Minutes

Leftover Turkey Recipe: Turkey Pho in 15 Minutes
So quick and easy! This leftover turkey pho recipe uses a quick trick so that it’s ready in under 15 minutes. Leftover turkey never tasted so good!
Check out this recipe

Leftover Stuffing Recipes

What do you do when you have way too much stuffing? Transform the dressing into delicious new meals! From soups to frittatas I have 10 of my favorite leftover stuffing recipes.

Turkey & Stuffing Dumpling Soup

Top view of two bowls of Turkey and Stuffing Dumpling Soup with dinner rolls on the side.
Use up leftover turkey and stuffing to make this delicious Turkey & Stuffing Dumpling Soup for lunch or dinner. First you make a homemade turkey stock that simmers on the stove top for about an hour. Then you make fluffy stuffing dumplings that are dropped into the piping hot stock. This soup recipe is made with fresh ingredients and some pantry staples. I guarantee you'll be going back for seconds and thirds.
Check out this recipe

Roasted Celery Boats with Cajun Stuffing

Roasted Celery Boats with Cajun Stuffing
Roasted Celery Boats with Cajun Stuffing are a fantastic way to enjoy a slimmed-down version of a holiday favorite!
Check out this recipe

SAVORY CREPES with THANKSGIVING TURKEY STUFFING

SAVORY CREPES with THANKSGIVING TURKEY STUFFING
Looking for a breakfast that not only tastes great but also helps to clear out some of the Thanksgiving leftovers in the fridge? These Savory Crepes with Turkey and Stuffing are fantastic additions to the menu! Here is a new take on Thanksgiving leftovers- savory crepes made with mashed potatoes, th…
Check out this recipe

Leftover Stuffing Cakes {Thanksgiving Breakfast Recipe} – WellPlated.com

Leftover Stuffing Cakes {Thanksgiving Breakfast Recipe} - WellPlated.com
Transform extra Thanksgiving stuffing into easy leftover stuffing cakes. Crisp on the outside, cheesy on the inside, and perfect with eggs.
Check out this recipe

Leftover Thanksgiving Stuffing: Crunchy Mozzarella Balls

Leftover Thanksgiving Stuffing: Crunchy Mozzarella Balls
Use leftover stuffing or dressing from Thanksgiving to make these irresistible Crunchy Mozzarella Balls! Wrap fresh mozzarella with a scoop of stuffing and shape into a ball. Roll in panko bread crumbs, fry and serve
Check out this recipe

Leftover Thanksgiving Stuffing Frittata – Dad With A Pan

Leftover Thanksgiving Stuffing Frittata - Dad With A Pan
Turkey season is the best season I always say. Ok, I’ve never said that before until just now, but still! The only thing better than Thanksgiving […]
Check out this recipe

Leftover Stuffin’ Muffins

Leftover Stuffin’ Muffins
Use up those Thanksgiving leftovers in these versatile and customizable Stuffin’ Muffins. Freezable and reheatable for quick meals later. Step by Step photos
Check out this recipe

Leftover Stuffing Breakfast Casserole

Leftover Stuffing Breakfast Casserole
Need any ideas of what to do with your Thanksgiving leftovers? One of the best things you can do is turn them into a hearty breakfast. This easy recipe for Leftover Stuffing Breakfast casserole turns thanksgiving stuffing into a delicious breakfast bake that everyone will love. Serve for the day aft…
Check out this recipe

Leftover Cheesy Stuffing Balls – Simply Delicious

Leftover Cheesy Stuffing Balls - Simply Delicious
These cheesy stuffing balls recipe is the perfect way to use up left-over stuffing after Thanksgiving or Christmas and makes a great snack.
Check out this recipe

Leftovers Stuffing Crackers

Leftovers Stuffing Crackers
These Leftover Stuffing Crackers are a great way to use up leftover stuffing! Serve these stuffing crackers anything you’d top crackers with!
Check out this recipe

Leftover Cranberry Sauce Recipes

Did you make too much cranberry sauce? No problem at all! From turkey salad, flatbreads, and even a baked brie I have a wide-variety of leftover cranberry sauce recipes for you to use!

Cranberry Turkey Salad

Use up the leftover turkey and cranberry sauce and wow your guest with delicious cranberry turkey salad that can be placed on croissants, leftover rolls, or even scoop with crackers.
Check out this recipe

Gingerbread Crusted Baked Brie

Gingerbread Crusted Baked Brie
Gingerbread Crusted Baked Brie! This gorgeous appetizer may be simple, but it isn’t lacking one bit of warm, festive flavors for your holidays gatherings!
Check out this recipe

Turkey Cranberry Flatbread

Top view of four triangle slices of flatbread with cranberry sauce on the side.
Use up the last of the holiday turkey and cranberry sauce leftovers with my easy 10 minute recipe for Turkey Cranberry Flatbreads. This makes for the perfect easy lunch or dinner after a day full of cooking!
Check out this recipe

Cranberry Pecan Crusted Salmon – Peas and Crayons

Cranberry Pecan Crusted Salmon - Peas and Crayons
Cranberry Pecan Crusted Salmon makes a perfect post Thanksgiving lunch or dinner and will help you use leftover cranberry sauce in the most delicious way!
Check out this recipe

Cranberry Mustard Sauce

Use up leftover cranberry sauce and make this super simple recipe for Cranberry Mustard Dipping Sauce. Perfect for dipping with pretzels, on a cheese board, or even on meat.
Check out this recipe

Turkey Salad with Cranberry Vinaigrette

Turkey Salad with Cranberry Vinaigrette
I’m gonna let y’all in on a well known secret, I look forward to Thanksgiving ALL year. It’s by far my favorite meal. Honestly, I look forward to the leftovers almost just as much as
Check out this recipe

Leftover Cranberry Sauce Bars

Leftover Cranberry Sauce Bars
These Leftover Cranberry Sauce Bars are the perfect post holiday treat everyone will love. Don’t toss your leftover cranberry sauce, re-purpose it as the filling for these oat bars! Simple, delicious and kid friendly!
Check out this recipe

Cranberry Champagne Spritzer

Today, I’m sharing with you a delicious and easy-to-make champagne brunch spritzer that will ‘Wow’ your guest.
Check out this recipe

Cranberry Shortbread Bars | Make Use of Your Leftover Cranberry Sauce

Cranberry Shortbread Bars | Make Use of Your Leftover Cranberry Sauce
Cranberry Shortbread Bars make a delicious treat for the holidays and are the perfect way to use up any leftover cranberry sauce from Thanksgiving!
Check out this recipe

Leftover Mashed Potato Recipes

I always make more than enough mashed potatoes so I can make mashed potato cakes or even mashed potato soup! I’ve gathered quite a few of my favorite leftover mashed potato recipes!

Mashed Potato Cakes

Top view of a plate of mashed potato cakes on a plate with toppings.
Use up leftover mashed potatoes to make the most divine Mashed Potato Cakes perfect to enjoy for breakfast or as a side dish with dinner. This recipe takes less then a half hour and uses both fresh and pantry staple ingredients you can find in your home. Don't forget to serve these potato pancakes with apple sauce and sour cream!
Check out this recipe

Mashed Potato Soup

white bowl filled with mashed potato soup.
Mashed Potato Soup is a great way to use up leftover mashed potatoes. This quick cooking soup comes together in 30 minutes with just 6 ingredients. Even better, your family will never know they are eating the leftover mashed potatoes!
Check out this recipe

Fried Mashed Potato Balls

Fried Mashed Potato Balls
Fried Mashed Potato Balls – Leftover mashed potatoes make these perfect crisp bites for a tasty side dish or appetizer. Crunchy outside, stuffed with a creamy inside..
Check out this recipe

Easy Duchess Potatoes

Easy Duchess Potatoes
These pretty Duchess Potatoes look like roses and will be the star of any dinner plate. What makes them even better is that they can be made using leftover mashed potatoes.
Check out this recipe

Mashed Potato Puffs

Mashed Potato Puffs
Work some magic on your mashed potatoes with mashed potato puffs! These loaded potato puffs will breathe some new life into your
Check out this recipe

Leftover Mashed Potato Rolls

Leftover Mashed Potato Rolls
Leftover Mashed Potato Rolls are a sweet and delicious way to use up any flavor of leftover mashed potatoes. Our #1 favorite way to use up leftovers!
Check out this recipe

Leftover Mashed Potato Bake

Leftover Mashed Potato Bake
Leftover mashed potatoes can be given new life with a few basic ingredients. You can even top them like a stuffed potato if you like.
Check out this recipe

Mashed Potato, Cheddar and Chive Waffles – Joy the Baker

Mashed Potato, Cheddar and Chive Waffles - Joy the Baker
What am I going to do with all of these leftover mashed potatoes (said no one ever!)? Make waffles! How is there a solution to a problem that isn’t really a problem at all? I’d eat mashed potatoes straight out of the fridge with a serving spoon. Maybe I’d put mustard and pickles on the…Read More
Check out this recipe

Leftover Pie Recipes

Tired of eating pie? Check out these creative ways to reinvent pie leftovers into a totally new and creative dessert!

Apple Pie Milkshake

Two milkshakes in glasses with red and white striped straws.
All you need is three ingredients plus a slice of leftover apple pie to make these delicious Apple Pie Milkshakes! This milkshake comes together in just a few minutes and makes for a perfect dessert.
Check out this recipe

Leftover Pie Parfaits – Sweet Cs Designs

Leftover Pie Parfaits - Sweet Cs Designs
Turn leftover pie into a delicious, addictive pie parfait the next morning! Crumbly topping and creamy yogurt make this a decadent use for leftovers!
Check out this recipe

Leftover Thanksgiving Pumpkin Pie Milkshake – A Beautiful Plate

Leftover Thanksgiving Pumpkin Pie Milkshake - A Beautiful Plate
Pumpkin pie milkshake – an incredibly delicious and easy milkshake recipe to help use up leftover pumpkin pie from Thanksgiving!
Check out this recipe

Blueberry Pie Milkshake

Blueberry Pie Milkshake
Use up leftover blueberry pie and transform it into the most decadent Blueberry Pie Milkshake! Easy recipe that is done in minutes!
Check out this recipe

I hope all of these Thanksgiving Leftover Recipes ideas has you cooking up all your leftovers and reinventing them into something totally brand new!

  • Pumpkin pie with piped whipped cream boarder resting on a yellow cloth with pumpkins and leaves around it.
    Pumpkin Pie with Condensed Milk
  • White bowl filled with apple cobbler, ice cream and a metal spoon.
    Applesauce Cobbler
  • Red bowl filled with chunky applesauce on a white and blue striped towel.
    Applesauce Recipe
  • Two turkey legs on a black grill grate
    Smoked Turkey Legs

Disclosure: There are affiliate links present in this post. That means if you click on a link and purchase something. I will receive a small percentage of the sale at no additional cost to you. Thank you for your continuous support of Katie’s Cucina!

25 Easy Sweet Recipes at Home

Published on: May 25, 2022 Updated on: May 25, 2022 by Katie 1 Comment

four desserts with recipe round up post title on image for pinterest.

Craving dessert? Try one of these 25 Easy sweet recipes to make at home that will make your mouth water and your sweet cravings satisfied.

four photos; banana bread, cheesecake bars, dessert tacos, and cookies with recipe round up title on text for Pinterest.
[Read more…]

100 Crock Pot Recipes

Published on: March 31, 2022 Updated on: October 4, 2022 by Katie 4 Comments

four photos of different dishes with recipe title text on image.

Looking to help simplify life? Check out the wide variety of over 100+ Crock Pot Recipes to help make breakfast, lunch, and dinner time a breeze! Don’t forget the dessert, because their is a whole slow cooker section dedicated to decadent desserts.

Four slow cooker recipe images with title text in the middle

I’ve found 100 amazing, delicious Crock Pot/Slow Cooker recipes that can take away the stress of trying to plan and fix a big dinner after a long, exhausting day. Or maybe you are looking for an easy appetizer, a dessert, or even breakfast! The sky is the limit when it comes to what you can cook in the Crock Pot!

I’m here to not only answer some of the most frequently asked questions but also share with you some of the best slow cookers on the market for all price points. Feel free to click on a link in the table of contents and it will jump you down to the section you are interest in looking at.

[Read more…]

75+ Easy Pumpkin Recipes

Published on: September 23, 2021 Updated on: June 5, 2025 by Katie Leave a Comment

Four photos of four different pumpkin recipes with roundup title text on image for Pinterest.

This collection of 75+ easy pumpkin recipes varies from savory to sweet pumpkin recipes of all courses; breakfast, drinks, snacks, dinner, and pumpkin desserts. This list is a pumpkin lovers dream come true.

Four photos of four different pumpkin recipes with roundup title text on image for Pinterest.

If you love the flavor of fall then I know you’ll love this round-up of over 75 easy pumpkin recipes. I have compiled a list that covers both sweet and savory pumpkin recipes. I have gathered some of the best pumpkin recipes from around the web which include drinks, breakfast, snacks, dinner, and of course dessert! You will find them broken down by categories starting with my personal favorite, drinks. I’m sure if you love pumpkin you’ll love these recipes I’ve found for you.

Table of contents

  • Pumpkin Drink Recipes
  • Pumpkin Breakfast Recipes
  • Pumpkin Snacks
  • Pumpkin Dinner Recipes
  • Pumpkin Desserts
[Read more…]

100+ Ice Cream Recipes

Published on: August 30, 2021 Updated on: April 17, 2022 by Katie 6 Comments

Four photos of ice creams in bowls and as cakes with recipe title text on image for Pinterest.

If you love ice cream you’ll love this list of 100+ Ice Cream Recipes from classic flavors, ice cream cakes, ice cream sandwich recipes, ice cream cookies, ice cream floats to to dairy-free / vegan ice cream, and even Keto ice cream recipes. You are sure to find an ice cream recipe that fits your taste buds and needs.

Four photos of ice creams in bowls and as cakes with recipe title text on image for Pinterest.

If you are anything like me and my family, you LOVE ice cream! We can’t get enough of it, and when I’m not making pints of fresh homemade ice cream, you’ll find pints and quarts of some of our favorite store bought flavors. I’ve put together a list of 100 Ice Cream Recipes. From sweet to savory and everything in between. If you can think it, I have it covered in this massive round-up. We love to make homemade ice cream in my home and I hope you do too.

Table of contents

  • Classic Ice Cream Flavors
  • Fruit Ice Cream Flavors
  • Unique Ice Cream Flavors
  • Ice Cream Cake Recipes
  • Cookie Ice Cream Sandwiches
  • Ice Cream Float Recipes
  • Vegan / Dairy Free Ice Cream Recipes
  • KETO Ice Cream Recipes
[Read more…]

St Patricks Day Recipes – 50 Irish Recipes

Published on: March 1, 2021 Updated on: February 16, 2024 by Katie 17 Comments

Four Irish recipes with recipe title text on image for Pinterest.

Looking for Irish recipes to celebrate St. Patrick’s Day? I have 50 Irish Recipes for St. Patrick’s Day to transport your taste-buds to Ireland!

Four photos of Irish recipes with text on image for Pinterest.

St. Patrick’s Day is right around the corner. That’s why I have 50 Irish Recipes for St. Patrick’s Day both sweet and savory! Over the years this recipe round-up has become a Pinterest favorite. I have broken up the recipes by breakfast, appetizers, drinks, side dishes, main dishes and desserts. You are sure to find something you can indulge on come St. Patrick’s day (or any other day of the year that you are craving Irish food)!

I’m not Irish, but I love the food. Whenever its cold out I crave a piping hot shepherds pie. Ironically, I feel like we eat the most Irish food when we go up north. Somehow we always manage to find ourselves at an Irish pub. That is what has inspired a lot of my Irish recipes here on Katie’s Cucina.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

FAQs

What are some traditional Irish ingredients used in recipes?

Explore the common ingredients like potatoes, cabbage, beef, lamb, oats, and various dairy products like butter and cheese that form the foundation of Irish cuisine.

Are there vegetarian or vegan options in Irish cooking?

Discover how traditional Irish recipes can be adapted to cater to vegetarian or vegan diets, with substitutions and creative twists on classic dishes.

How can I make Irish soda bread without buttermilk?

Learn alternative methods for making Irish soda bread without buttermilk, including using a combination of milk and vinegar or lemon juice, or substituting with yogurt or sour cream.

What’s the difference between Irish stew and Guinness stew?

Understand the distinctions between these two iconic Irish dishes, including their ingredients, preparation methods, and regional variations.

Can I make Irish recipes ahead of time?

Explore tips for meal prepping and make-ahead options for Irish recipes, ensuring you can enjoy the flavors of Ireland without last-minute stress.

What day is St Patricks Day?

St. Patrick’s day is always on March 17th.

Tips and Tricks

If you are new to cooking Irish food I have a few tips and tricks to guide you along the way!

  • Embrace the versatility of potatoes – Potatoes are a staple in Irish cuisine, so experiment with different varieties and cooking methods to add depth and flavor to your dishes, whether mashed, roasted, or in a hearty stew.
  • Use Guinness beer for depth of flavor – Incorporate Guinness stout into recipes like stews, pies, and even desserts to add a rich, malty flavor that enhances the dish’s complexity.
  • Master the art of Irish soda bread – Achieve the perfect texture and flavor in your Irish soda bread by handling the dough gently and not overmixing, and remember to slash the dough before baking for that iconic cross shape.
  • Explore regional variations – Ireland’s different regions offer unique culinary traditions, so don’t hesitate to explore recipes from various parts of the country to experience the full breadth of Irish cuisine.
  • Pair with Irish beverages – Complement your Irish dishes with authentic beverages like Irish whiskey, stout, or cider, enhancing the overall dining experience with complementary flavors and aromas.

Irish Breakfast Recipes

If you want to kick off your St. Patrick’s Day with breakfast, you will love my Irish Breakfast Recipes. My kids love my St. Patrick’s Day Lucky Charms Pancakes and my husband loves my Sweet Potato Corned Beef Hash recipe.

St. Patrick’s Day Lucky Charms Pancakes

Green stacked pancakes with whipped cream and lucky charms.
Treat your family to these St. Patrick's Day Lucky Charms Pancakes. Fluffy green dyed buttermilk pancakes topped with a sweet cream, whipped cream, and Lucky Charms Cereal. This breakfast will help them find the pot o' gold at the end of the rainbow!
Check out this recipe

Spinach Pancakes – Naturally Green Pancakes with NO Food Coloring

Spinach Pancakes - Naturally Green Pancakes with NO Food Coloring
These spinach pancakes are a vivid green without the use of any food coloring. A perfect St. Patrick’s Day recipe that’s gluten-free & vegan.
Check out this recipe

Corned Beef Hash and Eggs

Orange cast iron skillet with potatoes, corned beef, and eggs.
Start your morning with this quick and hearty Corned Beef Hash and Eggs—a delicious one-pan breakfast ready in just 30 minutes!
Check out this recipe

Full Irish Breakfast Recipe – Happy Foods Tube

Full Irish Breakfast Recipe - Happy Foods Tube
Full Irish breakfast is the best meal to enjoy on a weekend or when a long day is ahead of you. This cooked Irish fry-up is hearty and tastes amazing!
Check out this recipe

Irish Breakfast Wrap

Plated burrito with eggs and meat sliced in half with toothpicks holding halves together.
The only thing Irish about this breakfast wrap is the homemade corned beef hash, but it's also stuffed with eggs and homemade Russian sauce. If a Reuben sandwich had a breakfast baby it would be this wrap.

Leftover Corned Beef Breakfast Sandwiches

Leftover Corned Beef Breakfast Sandwiches
These Corned Beef Breakfast Sandwiches are a delicious way to make use of any leftover corned beef you may have on your hands after St. Patrick’s Day.
Check out this recipe

Sweet Potato Corned Beef Hash

Top view of a white square plate full of Sweet Potato Corned Beef Hash on a colbalt blue cloth.
Sweet Potato Corned Beef Hash is a delicious way to use up leftover corned beef brisket with a unique twist. By adding a mix of boiled white potatoes and sweet potatoes it gives this classic breakfast dish a whole new level of flavor.
Check out this recipe

Bubble & Squeak (Low Carb, THM S)

Bubble & Squeak (Low Carb, THM S)
Bubble & Squeak is a traditional Irish/English breakfast, this is a wonderful low carb version that fits well within your Trim Healthy Mama or Diabetic Lifestyle.
Check out this recipe

Irish Appetizers

If you want to start out your dinner with a little nibble. I suggest you try my Sweet Potato Irish Fries or my Baked Reuben Dip. Two of my absolute favorite Irish appetizer recipes.

Sweet Potato Irish Fries

Make a tasty Irish snack of Sweet Potato Irish Fries using fresh crinkle cut sweet potatoes, corned beef, and cheese in less than 30 minutes!
Check out this recipe

“Paddy Pockets” – Filled Shamrock Hand Pies! – The Kitchen Prep Blog

“Paddy Pockets” - Filled Shamrock Hand Pies! - The Kitchen Prep Blog
“Paddy Pockets” – Filled shamrock hand pies! These easy, festive St. Patrick’s Day appetizers will outshine the pot of gold at the end of the rainbow! Shamrock-shaped “hot pockets” stuffed with your favorite fillings are a perfect addition to your March menus.
Check out this recipe

Irish Cheese and Bacon Popcorn

Irish Cheese and Bacon Popcorn
An addicting savory snack of popcorn tossed with Irish cheese and bacon for a very special occasion.
Check out this recipe

Irish Nachos recipe: with potatoes, bacon and guacamole

Irish Nachos recipe: with potatoes, bacon and guacamole
We love this fun twist in nachos: Irish Nachos recipe: with potatoes, bacon and guacamole are a sure hit for St. Patricks day or any brunch, lunch or dinner!
Check out this recipe

Irish Pub Cheese Recipe

Irish Pub Cheese Recipe
Irish Pub Cheese Recipe – silky smooth and loaded with Irish cheddar and beer flavor. This Pub Cheese Recipe makes a fabulous snack for Saint Patrick’s Day.
Check out this recipe

Hot Reuben Dip Recipe

Top view of a baking dish filled with Hot Reuben Dip with a knife in the dip.
Hot Reuben Dip Recipe has all the flavors of a Reuben sandwich, but with out the bread. A mix of corned beef, sauerkraut, Russian sauce, and swiss cheese baked until bubbly. Use baguette slices or bagel chips to dip and enjoy.
Check out this recipe

Irish Potato Bites

Irish Potato Bites
These Irish Potato Bites are little potatoes stuffed with cheese and corned beef, a simple but tasty appetizer recipe for St. Patrick’s Day. These mini potato skins are also a great game day recipe for March Madness or the Super Bowl.
Check out this recipe

Irish Boxty Potato Pancakes – A Spicy Perspective

Irish Boxty Potato Pancakes - A Spicy Perspective
Irish Boxty Potato Pancake Recipe – Served with savory mushrooms and and an incredible whiskey gravy, this Irish potato pancake dish is a Saint Patrick’s Day favorite for breakfast, lunch, or dinner!
Check out this recipe

Irish Drink Recipes

If you want to wet your whistle try one of these Irish Drink Recipes that are sure to put you in the mood to try and find that pot o’gold!

Guinness Float

Two glasses filled with ice cream and beer.
A Guinness Float is the ultimate St. Patrick’s Day treat, combining rich, creamy vanilla ice cream with bold, malty Guinness stout for a perfectly indulgent adult dessert.
Check out this recipe

Copycat Shamrock Shake Recipe

Copycat Shamrock Shake Recipe
I love the idea of a delicious minty green milkshake just in time for St. Patrick’s Day. So I thought it would be fun to share my homemade version of a classic. This copycat shamrock
Check out this recipe

Irish Coffee Shooters (Hot or Iced) – Marla Meridith

Irish Coffee Shooters (Hot or Iced) - Marla Meridith
What could be better than coffee, whipped cream & whiskey??!! Oh gee, to have all that in one line of text is pretty awesome ~ let alone to have all of ’em in one drink! These Irish Coffee Shooters are a fun twist on a classic cocktail.
Check out this recipe

Nutella Irish Cream Milkshake

Nutella Irish Cream Milkshake
This Nutella Irish Cream Milkshake is rich and decadent.
Check out this recipe

Irish Cream White Russian Cocktail Recipe

Irish Cream White Russian Cocktail Recipe
Irish Cream White Russian Cocktail – a delicious twist on the classic cocktail with Irish cream, Kahlua, and vodka for a boozy creamy treat!
Check out this recipe

Homemade Irish Cream Recipe (Made a Bit Lighter)

Homemade Irish Cream Recipe (Made a Bit Lighter)
This delicious homemade Irish cream has less fat than the original because of a smart substitution that you won’t even notice. But trust me, it tastes just as good. It’s way cheaper than buying a bottle too!
Check out this recipe

Irish Martini Recipe | Diethood

Irish Martini Recipe | Diethood
Irish Martini – A splash of vodka, some strong espresso and a good dose of Irish Cream create this rich and so delicious Irish Martini.
Check out this recipe

Irish Side Dish Recipes

Warm up to a big bowl of baked potato soup. Make my yeast-free beer bread and serve my Brussels Sprouts with Corned Beef the next time you have leftover corned beef!

Corned Beef and Brussel Sprouts

Brussels Sprouts with Corned Beef
Corned Beef and Brussel Sprouts is an Irish-twist on two classic dishes; corned beef and cabbage — a unique Irish-style side dish that can be made any time time of the year.
Check out this recipe

Irish Leek and Potato Soup

Irish Leek and Potato Soup
This Irish Leek and Potato Soup is so hearty and satisfying.
Check out this recipe

Creamy Cabbage & Potato Soup – The Kitchen Prep Blog

Creamy Cabbage & Potato Soup - The Kitchen Prep Blog
Creamy Cabbage & Potato Soup! Cabbage, hash brown potatoes and fresh dill are the stars of this creamy, satisfying cabbage soup recipe that comes together in 30 minutes! A perfect weeknight meal or a fun way to celebrate St. Patrick’s Day.
Check out this recipe

Colcannon (Irish Mashed Potatoes with Kale and Butter)

Colcannon (Irish Mashed Potatoes with Kale and Butter)
How to make the delicious Irish dish called Colcannon. It’s a buttery blend of potatoes and kale with a lot of butter. And then some more butter. Did I mention there’s some butter going on here?
Check out this recipe

Homemade Russian Sauce

Top view of a female hand holding a small orange spoon dipped in a jar of sauce.
Russian Sauce is a classic sauce that is made up of condiments and spices you'll find in your refrigerator and pantry. You can make this homemade sauce in minutes using a food processor or blender.
Check out this recipe

Beer Bread

sliced Beer Bread resting on a plaid dish cloth.
Scared to bake with yeast? Make a loaf of this four ingredient beer bread recipe. Fresh thick homemade bread made in under an hours time with no resting time needed!
Check out this recipe

Irish Stout Onion Soup – French Onion Soup with Irish Stout

Irish Stout Onion Soup - French Onion Soup with Irish Stout
This gluten free Irish stout onion soup is made with buttery toasted thyme croutons and topped with plenty of Irish cheddar.
Check out this recipe

Irish Soda Bread

Irish Soda Bread
Big, fluffy Irish Soda Bread is no-knead and no rise! Easy to make and perfect for Saint Patrick’s Day or any day of the week!
Check out this recipe

Baked Potato Soup

Baked Potato Soup
Belly up to a big bowl of baked potato soup–a creamy and thick soup adorned with bacon, chives, and lots of shredded cheddar cheese.
Check out this recipe

Cheddar Cheese Bread Recipe

Three slices of bread cut from a loaf with dinner in the background.
This Cheddar Cheese Bread recipe is considered a savory quick bread as it does not require any yeast. Best of all you were have a fresh baked loaf of bread in about an hours time.
Check out this recipe

Irish Main Dish Recipes

There is more to Irish food then just corned beef and cabbage. I mean I do have a stovetop, slow cooker, and Instant Pot version. However, I also love my Shepherd’s Pie recipe and my Reuben Panini is a great way to use up leftovers!

Instant Pot Corned Beef and Cabbage

White platter with corned beef, cabbage, carrots, and potatoes with an Instant Pot in the background.
Instant Pot Corned Beef and Cabbage is an easy go-to recipe for many American's who like to celebrate the flavors of St. Patrick's Day. This recipe yields fork-tender corned beef in just 2.5 hours time.
Check out this recipe

Reuben Panini

Plated sliced reuben sandwhich with sauce, sauerkraut, meat, and cheese displayed.
Love a good Reuben sandwich? Try my pressed Reuben panini recipe made in minutes using just a few simple ingredients.
Check out this recipe

Shepherd’s Pie

Easy to make Shepherd's Pie recipe! Perfect for dinner tonight!
If you like lamb, feel free to sub it out or maybe even do a half and half mixture. Either way–this Shepherd’s Pie recipe will be a new family favorite!
Check out this recipe

Our family favorite Grandpa’s Irish Stew (Macaroni Goulash)

Our family favorite Grandpa’s Irish Stew (Macaroni Goulash)
Our family favorite Grandpa’s Irish Stew (an easy Macaroni Goulash) is full of meaty tomato and pasta flavor with peas and onions for a quick hearty dish!
Check out this recipe

Stovetop Corned Beef

Top view of a white platter filled with beef, carrots, potatoes, and cabbage.
I'm sharing how to make Stovetop Corned Beef that includes boiling potatoes, cabbage and carrots. This classic Irish dinner recipes comes together in a few hours.
Check out this recipe

Vegan Irish Stew

Vegan Irish Stew
Hearty vegetables in a rich, earthy, thick stout beer broth. It’s a stick to your ribs kinda stew!
Check out this recipe

Skillet Turkey-Bacon Shepherds Pie

Skillet Turkey-Bacon Shepherds Pie
Are you looking for a quick healthy dinner to make on a busy weeknight? My family loves this Skillet Turkey-Bacon Shepherds Pie.
Check out this recipe

One Pot Irish Whiskey Glazed Salmon Recipe

One Pot Irish Whiskey Glazed Salmon Recipe
One Pot Irish Whiskey Glazed Salmon Recipe Easy and delicious One Pot Irish Whiskey Glazed Salmon Recipe is a quick and delicious one pot dinner that is bursting with Irish Whiskey flavor in just
Check out this recipe

Dublin Coddle Recipe | Traditional Irish Winter Stew Recipe

Dublin Coddle Recipe | Traditional Irish Winter Stew Recipe
Dublin Coddle is a traditional Irish winter stew made with potatoes, sausage and bacon. It’s an easy dinner idea that’s comforting and delicious!
Check out this recipe

Irish Beef Stew Recipe

Irish Beef Stew Recipe
An Irish Beef Stew adapted for the slow cooker/crock pot using both red wine and Guinness beer!
Check out this recipe

Dessert for St Patricks Day

After a hearty comforting meal you can’t forget dessert. If you have wee lad’s give my Lucky Charms Cereal Treats a try or whip up a batch of my Lucky Charms Snack Mix recipe.

Lucky Charms Cereal Bars

Two lucky charms cereal bars stacked on top of each other
Lucky Charms Cereal Bars are a fun and colorful twist on the classic marshmallow and cereal treat. Made with Lucky Charms cereal instead of plain rice krispies, they are sure to delight both kids and adults alike.
Check out this recipe

Dark Chocolate Guinness Cake with Bailey’s Buttercream

Dark Chocolate Guinness Cake with Bailey’s Buttercream
Since moving I have baked 3 cakes and we have only been here two weeks! And somehow, two of the three cakes start with Dark Chocolate. I obviously am not going to be ready for
Check out this recipe

How to Make a Rainbow Bundt Cake – The Little Kitchen

How to Make a Rainbow Bundt Cake - The Little Kitchen
Rainbow foods make me so happy–and so does this Rainbow Bundt Cake from my friend’s cookbook, My Little Pony Baking Book! The cake is easy to make and it’s delicious.
Check out this recipe

Lucky Charms Snack Mix

Close up of a glass bowl of popcorn, green M&M's, marshmallows, lucky charms, and pretzels.
Get the kids in the kitchen and make this easy and tempting Lucky Charms Snack Mix filled with popcorn, cereal, pretzels, M&M's and more! A perfect snack mix for St. Patrick's Day at home.
Check out this recipe

No Bake Shamrock Freezer Pie

No Bake Shamrock Freezer Pie
How adorable is this No Bake Shamrock Freezer Pie?! I know I made it, but I am pretty proud of it. I love the chocolate coins on top! You only need a handful of ingredients
Check out this recipe

Guinness Brownies with Guinness Frosting – WellPlated.com

Guinness Brownies with Guinness Frosting - WellPlated.com
Easy Guinness Brownies. Super moist and chewy brownies with a hint of stout beer. The perfect St. Patrick’s Day dessert!
Check out this recipe

Lucky Charms Snack Mix

Close up of a glass bowl of popcorn, green M&M's, marshmallows, lucky charms, and pretzels.
Get the kids in the kitchen and make this easy and tempting Lucky Charms Snack Mix filled with popcorn, cereal, pretzels, M&M's and more! A perfect snack mix for St. Patrick's Day at home.
Check out this recipe

Chocolate Baileys Mug Cake

Chocolate Baileys Mug Cake
St. Patrick’s Day is almost here so it’s time for some boozy recipes. I made a Baileys Irish Cream Mug Cake previously. This time, I thought I’d add some chocolate to it. You can still
Check out this recipe

Bailey’s Chocolate Cheesecake | Gimme Some Oven

Bailey’s Chocolate Cheesecake | Gimme Some Oven
Love Bailey’s Irish Cream liquor? Love cheesecake? You will love this Bailey’s Chocolate Cheesecake Recipe! Easy to prepare, and delicious to enjoy!
Check out this recipe

Bailey’s Irish Cream Cake

Bailey’s Irish Cream Cake
This easy to make Bailey’s Irish Cream Cake is tender and uniquely flavorful. The Irish cream liqueur in the batter and the glaze is a double whammy of deliciousness.
Check out this recipe

Now, that you have read through 50 Irish Recipes for St. Patrick’s Day. It’s time to figure out what recipe you want to make first to fulfill your Irish food cravings!

If you make any of these recipes, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a comment! I spend hours putting together these recipes round-ups and, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

50+ Creative Smoothie Recipes

Published on: January 9, 2021 Updated on: January 5, 2023 by Katie 2 Comments

four smoothies with text on image for pinterest.

Tired of the same old smoothie recipe? Want to spice things up? Check out over 50+ creative smoothie recipes to switch up your daily dose of fruits and veggies!

Four photos of bright colored smoothies with text on image for Pinterest.

Their is no denying we love smoothies in our home. We drink at least one smoothie a day in my home whether its our favorite strawberry banana smoothie or a pineapple peach smoothie (think ultra tropical).

One way to pack in quite a bit of fruit and veggies is to make a smoothie. They can be nutrient dense without tasting like it was served from the earth. Best of all you can prep most ahead of time, making it easy to blend on a busy morning. I love the fact that we can use both frozen and fresh fruit in smoothies.

Table of contents

  • What to put in a smoothie
  • Best Blender for Smoothies
  • Breakfast Smoothie Recipes
  • Basic Smoothie Recipes
  • Smoothie Bowls
  • Afternoon Smoothies
  • Easy Healthy Smoothies
  • Dessert Smoothies

What to put in a smoothie

Top view of berries in a blender.

If you ever wondered how to make smoothies at home, I have all the tips and tricks for you! Below you’ll find how to build the best smoothies!

  • Buy local – I prefer to buy from the farmer’s market or farm stands for my fruits and vegetables. This is typically the best way to get the freshest produce possible and not cost nearly as much as the grocery store.
  • Freeze – Freeze fruit to avoid having to add lots of ice. Rinse and thoroughly dry fruits and vegetables prior to freezing. Always freeze when produce is at it’s freshest to capture all the nutrients it packs.
  • Make Ahead – frozen fruit and vegetables packs using freezer bags. Label the bags and store flat in the freezer. This will make for quick smoothie blends in the morning or for an afternoon snack.
  • Fruits – The sky is the limits to what fruit to add in your smoothie. I stick to some of the basics I have on hand like banana’s, apples, strawberries. If in season I’ll add in fresh peaches, mangos, blueberries, raspberries, and blackberries. I almost always have frozen pineapple, mango, and mixed berries in my freezer at all time. This allows me to ensure the flavors year round without the higher price tag.
  • Vegetables – I like to place a handful of spinach or kale in my smoothies. If you have a high-power blender these greens will break up and you’ll never know they are in your smoothie. Other vegetables I blend are fresh beets, carrots, cauliflower, zucchini, and avocado.
  • Liquid – I like to use yogurt if I have it on hand. It adds a creamy layer to my smoothies. I sometimes will also use whole or 2% milk if I’m looking for the added protein and fat. To keep the smoothies dairy free add in a plant-based milk or nut-milk like almond milk. Other liquids you can use are 100% fruit juices or even coconut water/milk.
  • Sweeteners – If the fruit is not enough to sweeten the smoothie I’ll add a tablespoon of honey or even agave nectar to my smoothies.
  • Other Add-ins – I sometimes use a scoop of protein powder or blend in plain tofu. The tofu sounds crazy, but it works and you’ll never know—it adds a silky texture to the smoothie! I will add a scoop of collagen (to my adult smoothies—not for kids) or even to get extra health benefits I’ll add in Fish Oil for the healthy benefit of Omega 3’s. I love adding peanut butter powder or plain peanut butter to smoothies. A scoop of cocoa powder has been found to help with inflammation. This will give you a nice chocolatey flavor.

If you are like me and find that you tend to make the same smoothie over and over again. I gathered over 50 smoothie recipes to help fuel your body and day. This should help us all branch out and try some new recipes.

Best Blender for Smoothies

The key to a good smoothie is an excellent blender. One that can truly crush and pulverize all the ingredients and blend them so that you can’t tell if you’ve hidden in a little spinach or kale. A few years ago when I had a toddler I felt like he would want me to make a smoothie simply to hear the power of the blender. Other days I knew he actually wanted a smoothie.

View of a blender with apples, strawberries, and bananas next to it.

Now that you know how to make a smoothie, you might be wondering what the best blender is to make smoothies. I have a few recommendations for all price points.

  • Ninja Professional Countertop Blender – I had this blender before my Wolf Gourmet and loved it. For the most part it could puree greens in smoothies. Ninja professional blender with Nutri Ninja Cups has 1100 watts of professional performance power with 3 speeds, pulse, and single serve functions. Includes one 1100 watt base, 72 ounce total crushing pitcher, and two 16 ounce Nutri Ninja Cups with to go lids note: Refer user manual before use. The Ninja Professional Countertop Blender is $120.
  • KitchenAid Countertop Blender – Unique asymmetric blade that blends at four distinct angles to pull contents into the blade. Working with the 1. 5 peak HP motor, the blade creates a powerful blending vortex to power through the toughest ingredients. Laboratory Measurement of peak horsepower output of motor. 3 preset recipe programs: ice crush, icy drinks & smoothie and 5-speed variable speed dial. This KitchenAid blender retails for $250.
  • Blendtec – This blender does it all. Easy blending cycles: 1-touch buttons, 6 pre-programmed cycles, pulse, and 10 speed manual control with the ability to achieve a variety of textures. Complete control to adjust your blending at any time while blending. The Blendtec runs roughly $350. You can buy refurbished for cheaper, too.
  • Wolf Gourmet High-Performance Blender – This is what I have. I will preface the price tag is steap and I feel confident that all the other brands below can do all the same features. This was given to me by Wolf Gourmet years ago, and has been my only blender since! This blender has a 2.4 peak HP motor propels the blades to speeds over 210 mph. Four pre-programmed settings; Smoothie, Puree, Soup, and Ice Crush provide consistent professional blender results and walk-away convenience. The Wolf Gourmet High-Performance Blender is $599.

Breakfast Smoothie Recipes

If you love to start the day with a smoothie you’ll love some of the best breakfast smoothie recipes. You can try my Blueberry Banana Protein Smoothie or even my Strawberry Banana Spinach Smoothie.

Banana Blueberry Protein Smoothie

Blueberry Banana Protein Smoothie
This easy 5 minute Banana blueberry smoothie is protein packed and full of so much flavor. This smoothie is perfect for an easy breakfast or an after school snack and is naturally gluten free.
Check out this recipe

Grapefruit Green Smoothie | Minimalist Baker Recipes

Grapefruit Green Smoothie | Minimalist Baker Recipes
A simple, refreshing green smoothie with the tartness of grapefruit and the sweetness of banana and apple. The perfect healthy start to your day.
Check out this recipe

Maple-Almond Banana Smoothie

Maple-Almond Banana Smoothie
A blog about my big-flavor cooking adventures…with some baking and restaurant reviews added for good measure!
Check out this recipe

Avocado Smoothie – The Little Kitchen

Avocado Smoothie - The Little Kitchen
The Little Kitchen is a food blog with tons of quick and easy recipes that you can make for your family and friends.
Check out this recipe

Honey and Wild Blueberry Smoothie

Honey and Wild Blueberry Smoothie
This Honey and Wild Blueberry Smoothie is so simple and delicious. Creamy, refreshing, and healthy – a great, easy breakfast or snack!
Check out this recipe

Oatmeal Smoothie

Oatmeal Smoothie
Creamy oatmeal smoothie with peanut butter and banana. With fiber, protein, and healthy fats, this vegan breakfast smoothie is filling and delicious!
Check out this recipe

Blueberry Pancake Green Smoothie

Blueberry Pancake Green Smoothie
Breakfast made healthy and quick! Learn how to make a Blueberry Pancake Green Smoothie in minutes.
Check out this recipe

Strawberry Mango Green Smoothie

Strawberry Mango Green Smoothie
If you love smoothies–and green smoothies then you should definitely try my Strawberry Mango Green Smoothie.
Check out this recipe

FAVORITE Strawberry Smoothie recipe

FAVORITE Strawberry Smoothie recipe
A simple, quick and delicious Strawberry Smoothie recipe that is filled with oats, banana, strawberries and milk. Everyone in the family loves this recipe!
Check out this recipe

Banana Date Smoothie

Banana Date Smoothie
This simple Banana Date Smoothie uses milk, yogurt, bananas and dates to create a creamy breakfast smoothie or afternoon pick-me-up.
Check out this recipe

Berry Banana Oatmeal Smoothie

Berry Banana Oatmeal Smoothie
Very Berry Banana Oatmeal Smoothie: just five ingredients to make this fruity breakfast smoothie loaded with strawberries, bananas and oats to keep you full!
Check out this recipe

Basic Smoothie Recipes

If you are new to making smoothies these Basic Smoothie Recipes are perfect for a beginner with just a few simple ingredients. My Strawberry Banana Smoothie Recipe or my simple 5 ingredient mixed berry smoothie to start with.

Strawberry Banana Smoothie

Two glasses filled with a pink smoothie with strawberries and paper straws in the glasses.
Make this delicious Strawberry banana smoothie recipe for breakfast or an afternoon snack. With just three ingredients and in under 5 minutes time you will have a delicious smoothie in hand. The perfect way to use up fruit that might be on its way out.
Check out this recipe

Strawberry Watermelon Smoothies

Strawberry Watermelon Smoothies
Strawberries, watermelon and yogurt blend together to create a light and refreshing Summer smoothie. As the school year draws near and families start the back-to-school prep, they start to savor those special end of Summer
Check out this recipe

Pineapple Cucumber Smoothie | Minimalist Baker Recipes

Pineapple Cucumber Smoothie | Minimalist Baker Recipes
A creamy, refreshing cucumber smoothie with coconut, lime, pineapple, and greens! A nutrient-rich smoothie that will beautify you from the inside out!
Check out this recipe

Strawberry-Banana Protein Smoothie » Big Flavors from a Tiny Kitchen

Strawberry-Banana Protein Smoothie » Big Flavors from a Tiny Kitchen
Fresh fruit, yogurt & vanilla protein powder come together in a deliciously refreshing drink!
Check out this recipe

Green Monster Smoothie

Green Monster Smoothie
This green monster smoothie is a great way to sneak some greens into your day
Check out this recipe

Mixed Berry Smoothie

Close up of a purple smoothie is a mason jar style glass.
A mixture of blueberries, blackberries, strawberries, and raspberries paired with yogurt and a dash of honey make for this 5-minute Mixed Berry Smoothie recipe.
Check out this recipe

Creamy Tropical Yogurt Smoothie

Creamy Tropical Yogurt Smoothie
Sipping on this delicious Creamy Tropical Yogurt Smoothie will have you daydreaming of being on the beach and dipping your toes in the water!
Check out this recipe

Strawberry Almond Milk Smoothie

Strawberry Almond Milk Smoothie
This simple snack is a breeze to make and oh so refreshing! If you’ve never tried making a smoothie with almond milk, you need to check out this recipe. This post contains affiliate links. If
Check out this recipe

Strawberry Banana Spinach Smoothie

Strawberry Banana Spinach Smoothie
I’m starting the week off with a Strawberry Banana Spinach Smoothie.
Check out this recipe

Smoothie Bowls

Smoothie bowls have become all the rage over the past few years. If you are not familiar with them they are a thicker version of a smoothie topped with dried nuts, fruits, granola, etc and eaten with a spoon. Here are a few of my favorite recipes including this recipe for peanut butter mocha smoothie bowl.

Dragonfruit Smoothie Pitaya Bowl | What Molly Made

Dragonfruit Smoothie Pitaya Bowl | What Molly Made
This pitaya bowl is filled with superfoods and nutritious ingredients. The base of the smoothie bowl is made with frozen pitaya, bananas and strawberries.
Check out this recipe

Smoothie Bowl With Berries & Bananas {Healthy} – Two Peas & Their Pod

Smoothie Bowl With Berries & Bananas {Healthy} - Two Peas & Their Pod
This healthy fruity smoothie bowl is great for breakfast, snack time, or even dessert. See how to make a smoothie bowl here.
Check out this recipe

Carrot Cake Smoothie Bowl – Pinch of Yum

Carrot Cake Smoothie Bowl - Pinch of Yum
Carrot Cake Smoothie Bowl – an easy, nutrition-packed dessert or snack recipe with a secret super-healthy ingredient! Guilt-free snack!
Check out this recipe

Berry Smoothie Bowl | Minimalist Baker Recipes

Berry Smoothie Bowl | Minimalist Baker Recipes
My go-to 5-minute smoothie bowl with just 3 ingredients! Satisfying, nutrient-rich, and naturally sweet! A healthy, plant-based breakfast or snack.
Check out this recipe

Orange Turmeric Smoothie — Chickpea & Herb

Orange Turmeric Smoothie — Chickpea & Herb
When cold season hits, I try to preemptively fill my body with as much Vitamin C as possible. This breakfast smoothie does the trick while also tasting amazing.
Check out this recipe

Beet, Pray, Love Smoothie Bowl

Beet, Pray, Love Smoothie Bowl
This vegan, gluten-free, beet, pray, love smoothie bowl is the perfect combo of bright red beets and berries. Loaded with antioxidants and superfoods!
Check out this recipe

Purple Sweet Potato Smoothie Bowl

Purple Sweet Potato Smoothie Bowl
This Purple Sweet Potato Smoothie Bowl is so quick and easy to make, requiring just 2 ingredients. It’s also a beautiful lavender-purple shade.
Check out this recipe

Mango – Turmeric Smoothie Bowl

Mango – Turmeric Smoothie Bowl
October Recipe ReDux Theme: Plant Protein Power Bowls Packed with protein, fiber and color, plant power bowls are trendy and delicious. Show us the healthy recipe that’s in your bowl. So you might be wondering,
Check out this recipe

Healthy Glowing Green Smoothie Bowl | A Simple Palate

Healthy Glowing Green Smoothie Bowl | A Simple Palate
Glowing Green Smoothie Bowl with mangos, banana, and spinach. A DELICIOUS and healthy smoothie to have for breakfast or a snack!
Check out this recipe

Strawberry Smoothie Bowl

Strawberry Smoothie Bowl
This cauliflower smoothie bowl is loaded with salty peanut butter, sweet strawberries, and riced cauliflower which makes this smoothie extra thick and creamy. You’d never guess there is a vegetable in the base of this tasty smoothie bowl!
Check out this recipe

peanut butter mocha smoothie bowl | The Baking Fairy

peanut butter mocha smoothie bowl | The Baking Fairy
Start your day off with a deliciously healthy smoothie bowl that tastes like a coffeehouse shake! It combines coffee, peanut butter, and chocolate.
Check out this recipe

Afternoon Smoothies

Looking for a delicious and nutrient-packed afternoon snack? Try an afternoon smoothie or afterschool smoothie. My kids love the pbj and banana smoothie and I love a good CBD Blueberry Lemon Smoothie to cut the edge off a stressful day.

Banana Birthday Cake Smoothie

Banana Birthday Cake Smoothie
Whether or not it’s your birthday or you just are int he mood for a piece of birthday cake… give my Banana Birthday Cake Smoothie a try!
Check out this recipe

Cold Brew Protein Smoothie

Cold Brew Protein Smoothie
This smoothie is a coffee lover’s dream. It’s thick and chocolaty and almost Frappuccino-y. Packed with protein and healthy!
Check out this recipe

PBJ Smoothie

Two glasses of light pink smoothie with pink straws next to it.
PBJ Smoothie has just five ingredients and is made in under five minutes. This smoothie recipe is perfect for an easy breakfast on the go or an afternoon snack.
Check out this recipe

Chocolate Covered Strawberries Protein Shake – Made It. Ate It. Loved It.

Chocolate Covered Strawberries Protein Shake - Made It. Ate It. Loved It.
School has been out for 2 weeks for my kids. Luckily the temperatures have been pretty good and by pretty good I mean in the 90’s! Arizona weather can get in the 100’s in May. So for it being the end of May it has been gorgeous! The summer activities are in full swing. My sons are both in swim team …
Check out this recipe

Apple Smoothie – WellPlated.com

Apple Smoothie – WellPlated.com
The flavor of apple pie, blended into a healthy Apple Smoothie! Rich, creamy and vegan, it’s made with apple, oatmeal, peanut butter and spices (no yogurt!)
Check out this recipe

CBD Blueberry Lemon Smoothie

Blueberry Lemon Smoothie in a glass surrounded paper straws, fresh lemon, and blueberries.
Looking to relax and enjoy your morning smoothie? Try this delicious and easy recipe for my CBD Blueberry Lemon Smoothie.
Check out this recipe

Chunky Monkey Smoothie

Chunky Monkey Smoothie
Today, I thought I would share this quick and delicious protein packed smoothie that you and your kiddos are going to love! Smoothies are so popular in our house! We make smoothies for after
Check out this recipe

Orange Colada Smoothie | YellowBlissRoad.com

Orange Colada Smoothie | YellowBlissRoad.com
This Orange Colada Smoothie is light and healthy. A perfect breakfast or afternoon snack! Hey Yellow Bliss Road fans! I’m so happy to be here! My name is Lisa and I blog over at Wine & Glue. I blog all about easy crafts, fast dinners, and delicious desserts…you know, a lot like the same awesome… R…
Check out this recipe

Peanut Butter Chocolate Coffee Smoothie

Peanut Butter Chocolate Coffee Smoothie
Peanut butter and coffee?! Promise it’s a thing! This rich and creamy Peanut Chocolate Coffee Smoothie is a simple morning treat!
Check out this recipe

Strawberry Grape Pineapple Smoothie – Add a Pinch

Strawberry Grape Pineapple Smoothie - Add a Pinch
Strawberry Grape Pineapple Smoothie – This all fruit smoothie recipe is quick and refreshing. Blended with strawberries, grapes, and pineapple pieces.
Check out this recipe

Easy Healthy Smoothies

Not all smoothies at times are healthy smoothies. Look at smoothies that have lots of vitamins, nutrients, and antioxidants to boost the health factor. Stear clear of sweetners like sugar in smoothies. To start, try my Strawberry Orange Flax Smoothies recipe or Grassfed Blueberry & Almond Smoothie.

Strawberry Orange Flax Smoothies

Strawberry Orange Flax Smoothies
Start your day off with a vitamin C packed strawberry orange flax smoothies. Both kid and adult approved and made within 5 minutes from start to finish!
Check out this recipe

Magical Orange Creamsicle Smoothie – Fit Foodie Finds

Magical Orange Creamsicle Smoothie - Fit Foodie Finds
Looking for the orange smoothie of your dreams? Try our magical vitamin C-packed Orange Creamsicle Smoothie with only 3 ingredients.
Check out this recipe

Golden Beet, Carrot and Turmeric Smoothie

Golden Beet, Carrot and Turmeric Smoothie
This is one power packed, vision-boosting, gut-healing golden beet, carrot and turmeric smoothie. It’s loaded with beta carotene and nutrients.
Check out this recipe

Blueberry Ginger Peach Smoothie – The Lemon Bowl®

Blueberry Ginger Peach Smoothie - The Lemon Bowl®
Fresh ginger brings out the natural sweetness of ripe fruit to create this protein-packed breakfast smoothie – perfect for any time of the year.
Check out this recipe

Turmeric Smoothie | Immune Boosting and Anti-Inflammatory

Turmeric Smoothie | Immune Boosting and Anti-Inflammatory
Immune Boosting Turmeric Smoothie with blueberry, spinach, ginger, and honey. A perfect healthy breakfast smoothie to kick start your mornings! This easy smoothie is great for kids because you can’t taste or see the green. Other health benefits include acting as a natural cold remedy and anti-inflam…
Check out this recipe

Raspberry Beet Smoothie

Raspberry Beet Smoothie
This bright, colorful Raspberry Beet Smoothie is healthy and so delicious – using cottage cheese for a milkshake-like flavor you wont believe!
Check out this recipe

Grassfed Blueberry & Almond Smoothie

Grassfed Blueberry & Almond Smoothie Recipe using the new @Stonyfield Grassfed Yogurt #StonyfieldBlogger
If you want to change things up for your family I highly suggest you try the new Stonfyield Organic 100% Grassfed Whole Milk Yogurt and make my Grassfed Blueberry & Almond Smoothie recipe.
Check out this recipe

Peach Chia Green Smoothie Recipe

Peach Chia Green Smoothie Recipe
This super-healthy Peach Chia Green Smoothie is not only delicious, it’s packed full of nutrients. Throw this together in two minutes for a great breakfast!
Check out this recipe

High Protein Blueberry Kale Smoothie – The Lemon Bowl®

High Protein Blueberry Kale Smoothie - The Lemon Bowl®
This high protein powerhouse blueberry kale smoothie is full of antioxidants and plenty of protein to keep you full and satisfied until your next meal.
Check out this recipe

Chocolate Raspberry Protein Smoothies

Chocolate Raspberry Protein Smoothies
Start your day the right way with a delicious and nutritious Chocolate Raspberry Protein Smoothie! Made with Greek yogurt, fresh raspberries, and chocolate protein powder, it will give you the energy you need to rock your morning!
Check out this recipe

Dessert Smoothies

If you are craving dessert, trick yourself and blend a smoothie instead. My Pineapple Peach Smoothie reminds me of my favorite tropical cocktail and my Banana Birthday Cake Smoothies makes me think that I’m eating a slice of cake, but I’m not!

Pineapple Peach Smoothie

Two yellow smoothies with pineapple on the rim and paper blue straws.
Want to enjoy the delicious flavors of the summer year round? This dairy free/ gluten free Pineapple Peach Smoothie is made with just five ingredients made in five minutes time!
Check out this recipe

Hummingbird Cake Smoothie – The Kitchen Prep Blog

Hummingbird Cake Smoothie - The Kitchen Prep Blog
Hummingbird Cake Smoothie! Whether your looking for vegan smoothies or just hungry for a healthy sweet treat, this Southern cake-inspired smoothie will please all palates!
Check out this recipe

Chocolate Banana Date Smoothie

Chocolate Banana Date Smoothie
This delicious Chocolate Banana Date Smoothie will not only satisfy any chocolate cravings, it will also give you a boost of nutrients to fuel your body.
Check out this recipe

Blueberry-Ginger Cobbler Smoothie – The Kitchen Prep Blog

Blueberry-Ginger Cobbler Smoothie - The Kitchen Prep Blog
Do you know the one thing I have not been able to shake cravings for during this whole Clean Eating adventure? Ice cream. The most heavenly combination of my two favorite {naughty} things: sugar and dairy. I have been so very good and, before my vacation a few weeks ago, I didn’t cheat at all….Rea…
Check out this recipe

Sweet Potato Pie Smoothie

Sweet Potato Pie Smoothie
It’s time to change up your breakfast game with this Sweet Potato Pie Smoothie! It’s made with just 4 ingredients and only takes 5 minutes to whip up. Bonus points: this recipe is healthy,
Check out this recipe

Banana Split Smoothie – West of the Loop

Banana Split Smoothie - West of the Loop
Today’s post is sponsored by Stonyfield Organics and Healthy Skoop. As always, all opinions are my own. Banana splits for breakfast? Have I completely abdicated my responsibilities as a mother? Is this what happens when there are two weeks of school left and I am done? I mean, done. Nah! My kids are…
Check out this recipe

Banana Cream Pie Smoothie

Banana Cream Pie Smoothie
Banana Cream Pie Smoothie – all the flavors of a sweet banana cream pie in a good for you smoothie!
Check out this recipe

Chocolate, Peanut Butter and Banana Smoothie

Chocolate, Peanut Butter and Banana Smoothie
My husband is a creature of habit. When he finds something that he likes, he sticks with it, that is until he is sick of it. The smoothie sensation has been going on for quite some time in our ho…
Check out this recipe

I hope that this list of 50+ smoothie recipes has given you some more ideas and will help you broaden some of your smoothie ingredients.

If you make any of these smoothie recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a star rating and comment! I spend hours creating these round-ups, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

Disclosure: There are affiliate links present in this post. That means if you click on a link and purchase something. I will receive a small percentage of the sale at no additional cost to you. Thank you for your continuous support of Katie’s Cucina!

Sav

Recipes

Smoked Turkey Legs

Published on: October 7, 2025 Updated on: October 7, 2025 by Katie Leave a Comment

Two turkey legs on a black grill grate

Juicy, smoky, fall-off-the-bone tender, these Traeger Smoked Turkey Legs are a backyard BBQ favorite that taste just like the ones you get at theme parks and fairs—only better!

2 browned turkey legs on a grill.

There’s nothing quite like biting into a big, juicy turkey leg that’s been slow-smoked until tender. Whether you’re reminiscing about theme park eats, the county fair, or looking for a fun and flavorful way to enjoy turkey outside of Thanksgiving, smoked turkey legs are the way to go.

When I made these on our Traeger pellet grill for the first time, my husband and son absolutely devoured them! They couldn’t get over how flavorful and juicy the meat was — and even said they were better than the giant turkey legs we’ve had at the theme parks. Needless to say, this recipe quickly became a family favorite and a go-to for weekend grilling.

The best part? They’re surprisingly easy to make at home. With just a simple seasoning blend and a few hours of low-and-slow smoking, you’ll end up with turkey legs that are smoky, savory, and absolutely irresistible.

Why this Recipe Works

Smoky & Flavorful – The Traeger infuses the turkey legs with just the right amount of wood-fired flavor without you having to do too much during the cooking process.

Tender & Juicy – Low and slow cooking ensures the meat stays juicy while the skin gets perfectly smoky. When you brine the turkey legs prior to cooking — you are guaranteed to have juicy not dry turkey!

Better Than Theme Parks – Skip the long lines and hefty price tag—you can make these right in your own backyard for under $10 per leg (depending on the price you can find them at the store).

Ingredients

Ingredients on a counter; turkey legs, rub, and butter.
  • Turkey legs – Look for drumsticks about 1–1.5 lbs each for the best balance of flavor and tenderness.
  • Butter – I place a few pats of butter underneath the skin to help keep the meat moist and flavorful.
  • Dry rub seasoning – You can make your own rub or use your favorite store bought. For this recipe, I like to use Kinder’s Woodfire Garlic.

Directions

Two turkey legs in a plastic container sitting in a brine with peppercorns.

Brine the turkey legs – At least 12 hours before smoking, combine the brine ingredients in a large pot. Stir until the salt dissolves, then submerge the turkey legs in the brine. Cover and refrigerate for at least 12 hours or up to 24 hours prior to smoking.

Two raw turkey legs with rub and butter under the skin on a white plate.

Prep the Traeger – When ready to cook, preheat your pellet grill to 225 degrees Fahrenheit.

Season the turkey legs – Remove the turkey legs from the brine, rinse with cool water, and pat dry with paper towels. Coat the turkey legs generously with your favorite seasoning blend. Then peel back a little bit of the turkey skin and place a pat of butter underneath the skin. Repeat until all butter is used.

Two raw turkey legs on a grill.

Smoke low and slow – Place the turkey legs directly on the grill grates. Smoke at 225 degrees Fahrenheit for about 2 hours to let the smoky flavor develop.

Female hand with pink nails using a red thermometer in a turkey leg on the grill.

Increase the heat – Raise the temperature to 350 degrees Fahrenheit and continue smoking for 30–45 minutes, or until the internal temperature reaches 165 degrees Fahrenheit in the thickest part of the leg.

Rest & serve – Let the turkey legs rest for 10 minutes before serving to lock in all those juices.

FAQs

Do I really need to brine the turkey legs?

Yes! Brining makes a huge difference in flavor and juiciness, especially when smoking. It’s worth the extra step if you want to achieve the theme park juicy turkey legs we all know and love.

What’s the best wood for smoked turkey legs?

I love using hickory as it tends to give a strong smoky flavor, while apple and cherry offer a sweeter, milder smoke.

Can I make turkey legs ahead of time?

Yes — reheat them wrapped in foil at 300 degrees Fahrenheit. until warmed through, or warm them right on the Traeger at low heat around 250 degrees Fahrenheit. (and wrapping them with foil).

Recipes Tips & Tricks

Here are a few of my favorite recipe tips and tricks when making smoked turkey legs.

  • Thermometer – Always use a meat thermometer to ensure perfect doneness. When cooking poultry you need to make sure the internal temperature reaches at least 165 degrees Fahrenheit. My Traeger has the thermometer probe that sends an alert right to my phone! Any instant read thermometer will work, too. I often double check with one.
  • Brine – To ensure you have moist turkey legs it’s so important to not skip this step. I like to brine overnight for the best flavor and texture.
  • Shiny Finish – Want that theme park-style glossy finish? Brush the legs with melted butter during the last 10 minutes of smoking.
  • Let Rest – Make sure to let the meat rest for at least 10 minutes before digging in. This will ensure that the juices distribute properly.

If you make this recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

Two turkey legs on a black grill grate

Smoked Turkey Legs

These Traeger Smoked Turkey Legs are juicy, smoky, and fall-off-the-bone tender. Brined overnight and slow-smoked to perfection, they’re even better than the ones at theme parks!
No ratings yet
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Dinner
Cuisine: American
Diet: Gluten Free
Prep Time: 10 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 2 hours hours
Brine Time: 12 hours hours
Total Time: 14 hours hours 10 minutes minutes
Servings: 2
Calories: 926kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • Measuring Spoons
  • Tongs
  • Traeger Pellet Grill
  • Meat Thermometer

Ingredients

  • 3-4 pounds Turkey Legs
  • 2 tablespoons Rub of Choice
  • 2 tablespoons Salted Butter

Instructions

  • Brine the turkey legs at least 12 hours before smoking, combine the brine ingredients in a large pot. Stir until the salt dissolves, then submerge the turkey legs in the brine. Cover and refrigerate for at least 12 hours or up to 24 hours prior to smoking.
  • Once you are ready to cook, preheat your pellet grill to 225 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Remove the turkey legs from the brine, rinse with fresh water, and pat dry with paper towels. Coat the turkey legs generously with your favorite seasoning blend. Then peel back a little bit of the turkey skin and place a pat of butter underneath the skin. Repeat until all butter is used.
  • Place the turkey legs directly on the grill grates. Smoke at 225 degrees Fahrenheit for about 2 hours to let the smoky flavor develop. Increase the temperature to 350 degrees Fahrenheit after 2 hours. Continue cooking for 30–45 minutes, or until the internal temperature reaches 165 degrees Fahrenheit in the thickest part of the leg.
  • Let the turkey legs rest for 10 minutes before serving to lock in all those juices.

Notes

  • Thermometer – Always use a meat thermometer to ensure perfect doneness. When cooking poultry you need to make sure the internal temperature reaches at least 165 degrees Fahrenheit. My Traeger has the thermometer probe that sends an alert right to my phone! I always check with an instant read as well just to make sure the poultry is completely cooked through,. 
  • Brine – To ensure you have moist turkey legs it’s very important to not skip this step. I like to brine overnight for the best flavor and texture.
  • Shiny Finish – Want that theme park-style glossy finish? Brush the legs with melted butter during the last 10 minutes of smoking.
  • Let Rest – As excited or hungry as you may be to dig in–it is very important to  let the meat rest for at least 10 minutes before digging in. This will ensure that the juices distribute properly.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 926kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 111g | Fat: 50g | Saturated Fat: 19g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 11g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 431mg | Sodium: 509mg | Potassium: 1572mg | Fiber: 0.5g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 472IU | Vitamin C: 0.5mg | Calcium: 139mg | Iron: 11mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

reader favorites

Three cheesecake bars with apples stacked on a piece of white partchment paper.

★★★★★

Apple Pie Cinnamon Bars

“I made these for a family gathering and everyone asked for the recipe!”

-Sheila

get recipe
Oreo Ice Cream scoops in coned.

★★★★★

Oreo Ice Cream

“I don’t have an ice cream maker and this was so easy to make – obsessed!”

-Kathy

get recipe
  • Quesadilla sliced in 4 on a white plate.
    Chicken Fajita Quesadilla
  • Browned tortilla in a glass pie plate filled with a baked egg and cheese on a blue and white striped cloth.
    Egg Tortilla Bake
  • white bowl filled with elbow mac and cheese with two spoons laying on top of striped cloth.
    Macaroni and Cheese with Heavy Cream

Chicken Fajita Quesadilla

Published on: August 26, 2025 Updated on: August 26, 2025 by Katie Leave a Comment

Quesadilla sliced in 4 on a white plate.

Turn yesterday’s chicken fajitas into today’s cheesy, crispy quesadilla—ready in just 10 minutes for lunch, dinner, or even an after-school snack.

3 slices of quesadilla with sour cream and lime wedges.

Chicken fajitas are always a hit in my house, but the leftovers might be my favorite part! Instead of reheating the same meal, I love transforming extra chicken, peppers, and onions into cheesy, golden quesadillas. This is a quick and delicious way to reinvent dinner without starting from scratch. The best part? You can cook them however you like—baked, grilled, or pan-fried—but I usually stick with pan frying. Even my kids who do not like bell peppers will gobble these quesadillas up as an after-school snack.

Why this Recipe Works

Zero waste – Give your fajita leftovers a second life with an easy lunch or dinner a few days later.

Time-Saver – Ready in about 10 minutes, this recipe turns last night’s chicken fajitas into a whole new meal without the extra prep or cleanup. Perfect for busy weeknights or hungry kids after school.

Customizable – Tailor fillings and cheese to your family’s taste. This recipe works for any leftover fajitas you may have whether they are steak, veggie, or even shrimp!

Ingredients:

Ingredients on white counter; tortillas, cheese, fajita veggies and chicken, and olive oil.
  • Leftover chicken fajita meat + peppers and onions – This is ideal for a quick meal, but if you are really craving these and don’t have leftover fajitas feel free to cook up a small batch and make these quesadillas with fresh hot ingredients.
  • Flour tortillas – The size all depends on what you have on hand. You can use large 10-inch flour tortillas that you layer or fold over. I prefer to use the small 6-inch fajita style flour tortillas since I typically have them leftover from dinner.
  • Cheese – I typically use a Mexican blend but you can use your fave combo—cheddar, Monterey Jack, Colby—or Oaxaca if you’re feeling fancy.
  • Oil – I like to use grapeseed oil which has a high-smoke point. Perfect for frying the quesadillas.

Directions

Frying pan filled with a tortilla with cheese, chicken, and peppers on a stove top.
Frying pan filled with flour tortilla with meat, veggies, and cheese.

Reheat the leftover chicken and vegetable fajita filling until warm but not hot (preferably in a microwave for ease of speed).

Once the fajita filling is warm, heat a frying pan on medium heat.

Add a teaspoon of oil to the pan. Then add 1 tortilla. Top with a handful of shredded cheese, diced chicken, fajita veggies, and more cheese. Add another flour tortilla on top. Cook for 2-3 minutes until the bottom is brown, then carefully flip the quesadilla over and cook for an additional 2-3 minutes.

Stacked cut pieces of quesadilla on a white plate.

Remove from frying pan, cut and serve. Repeat until all the quesadillas have been cooked. Serve with sour cream.

FAQs

3 slices of quesadillas with lime wedges and sour cream.
Can I make these without leftover fajitas?

Yes! Simply cook chicken with bell peppers and onions using fajita seasoning. Once cooked, use that mixture in place of leftovers.

What’s the best cheese for quesadillas?

A good melting cheese works best—think Monterey Jack, cheddar, Colby Jack, or a Mexican blend. If you want extra stretch, add a little mozzarella.

Do I have to bake them, or can I cook them on the stovetop?

You can do either. Baking is less messy and great for making a batch at once, but stovetop will give you a crispier, slightly charred tortilla.

Can these be frozen and reheated?

Yes! Assemble, bake, then cool completely. Wrap tightly and freeze. To reheat, pop them in the oven or air fryer until hot and crispy.

Recipe Tips and Tricks

Female hand with blue nails holding 2 slices of quesadilla together over a white plate.

Here are a few of my favorite tips and tricks whenever I make these leftover quesadillas.

  • Don’t overfill – A thin layer of fajitas and cheese is plenty—too much filling makes them fall apart.
  • Seal with cheese -Sprinkle a little cheese near the edges so it melts and “glues” the quesadilla together.
  • Flip carefully – Use two spatulas or a large spatula to flip for even browning without spillage.
  • Add fresh Flavors – After cooking, sprinkle with cilantro, a squeeze of lime, or diced tomatoes for a pop of flavor.
  • Batch-friendly – Use a large griddle or even consider baking several at once—perfect for family dinners or meal prep lunches.

Next time you make chicken fajitas, cook a little extra so you’ll have leftovers ready to go. A day or two later, those leftovers can be transformed into these cheesy, crispy chicken fajita quesadillas—perfect for a quick lunch or an easy weeknight dinner.

If you make my chicken fajita quesadillas recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

Quesadilla sliced in 4 on a white plate.

Chicken Fajita Quesadilla

Turn yesterday’s chicken fajitas into today’s cheesy, crispy quesadillas—ready in just 10 minutes for lunch, dinner, or even an after-school snack.
5 from 3 votes
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Dinner, Lunch, Main Course
Cuisine: Mexican
Diet: Kosher
Prep Time: 5 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 5 minutes minutes
Total Time: 10 minutes minutes
Servings: 4
Calories: 493kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • Measuring Cups
  • 1 Frying Pan
  • 1 Stove Top
  • Cutting Board
  • Knife

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon Grapeseed Oil
  • 8 6-inch Fajita Size Flour Tortillas
  • 2 cup shredded cheddar cheese divided
  • 1 cup leftover fajita chicken
  • ½ cup leftover fajita peppers and onions

Instructions

  • Reheat the leftover chicken and vegetable fajita filling until warm but not hot (preferably in a microwave for ease of speed).
  • Once the fajita filling is warm, heat a frying pan on medium heat.
  • Add a teaspoon of oil to the pan. Then add 1 tortilla. Top with a handful of shredded cheese, diced chicken, fajita veggies, and more cheese. Add another flour tortilla on top. Cook for 2-3 minutes until the bottom is brown, then carefully flip the quesadilla over and cook for an additional 2-3 minutes.
  • Remove from frying pan, cut and serve. Repeat until all the quesadillas have been cooked. Serve with sour cream.

Notes

  • Toppings – Sky is the limit for toppings; sour cream, salsa, guacamole, even queso!
  • Leftover fajitas – This recipe works with vegetarian style fajitas, steak, shrimp, even pork!
  • Dietary Restrictions – Have a dietary restriction? Try these substitutions:
    • Gluten Free – Use gluten free tortillas.
    • Dairy Free – Swap for a dairy free cheese.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 493kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 81mg | Sodium: 855mg | Potassium: 297mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1161IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 490mg | Iron: 2mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Egg Tortilla Bake

Published on: August 20, 2025 Updated on: August 20, 2025 by Katie Leave a Comment

Browned tortilla in a glass pie plate filled with a baked egg and cheese on a blue and white striped cloth.

This Tortilla Egg Bake is ready in just 35 minutes and features a crispy tortilla crust, fluffy eggs, sautéed veggies, and savory bacon—perfect for breakfast, brunch, or meal prep.

Glass baking dish filled with tortilla and egg topped with cheese resting on a blue and white cloth with brown eggs and plates in the background.

If you’re looking for a versatile and satisfying breakfast that’s both easy to make and packed with flavor, this Tortilla Egg Bake is your new go-to. As my son told me as he consumed his breakfast– it’s a cross between a quiche and a burrito, all baked in one convenient pie plate!

With just a handful of wholesome ingredients like eggs, veggies, cottage cheese, and a crispy tortilla crust, you’ll have a warm, savory dish that’s great for busy mornings or weekend brunches.

Bonus: it reheats beautifully, so it’s ideal for meal prep too! I recently brought this to my friend who had just had surgery and she loved being able to have a quick breakfast to reheat.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why this Recipe Works

Tortilla crust shortcut – Using a large tortilla as the base eliminates the need for making a crust, saving time without sacrificing flavor or texture.

Veggie-loaded goodness – Sautéed onions, peppers, and mushrooms add flavor, color, and nutrition in every bite.

Protein-packed and creamy – Eggs and cottage cheese create a fluffy, protein-rich filling that’s both light and satisfying. Even the cottage cheese haters won’t realize it’s in the eggs!

Ingredients

Ingredients on table: tortilla, cottage cheese, eggs, bacon, bell pepper, mushrooms, shredded cheese, onion, and spices.
  • Butter – Adds rich flavor and is perfect for sautéing vegetables.
  • Veggies – I like to use a mix of onions, bell pepper, and mushrooms. The onion and red bell pepper gives the bake a savory base and sweetness when cooked. While the mushrooms add earthiness and umami.
  • Eggs – The main protein source and binding ingredient. I use 6 eggs which seems to be perfect for this reicpe.
  • Cottage cheese – Adds creaminess and extra protein.
  • Seasonings – For mild spice and seasoning I use black pepper and seasoning salt.
  • Shredded cheddar cheese – Melts into the bake for a touch of gooey, cheesy goodness.
  • Bacon – I like to add a protein and for this I used bacon that I crumbled. However, ground cooked sausage would be great as well.
  • 1 (10-inch) tortilla – Acts as a simple and delicious crust.

Directions

Preheat your oven to 350°F.

In a skillet over medium heat, melt the butter. Add diced onion, red bell pepper, and mushrooms. Sauté until softened and lightly browned, about 5–7 minutes. Remove from heat and set aside.

Clear glass bowl filled with scrambled eggs, vegetables, and cottage cheese with a wooden spoon in the mix.

In a large mixing bowl, beat the eggs. Stir in cottage cheese, black pepper, seasoned salt, and the cooked vegetables.

Female hand with pink nails pushing down a tortilla in a pie plate on a white countertop.

Lightly spray an 8-inch pie plate with non-stick cooking spray. Press the tortilla into the pie plate, forming it into the shape of the dish.

Tortilla in glass pie plate filled with egg mixture and shredded cheese on a white countertop.

Pour the egg and veggie mixture into the tortilla shell. Sprinkle the shredded cheddar cheese evenly on top.

Glass baking dish filled with tortilla and egg in an oven.

Bake for 30–35 minutes or until the center is set and a toothpick inserted comes out clean.

Let it cool for 5 minutes before slicing and serving.

FAQs

Tortilla with egg filled in a glass pie plate on a blue and white stripped cloth.
Can I use other vegetables?

Absolutely! Spinach, zucchini, or even diced tomatoes would also work well. Just make sure to sauté or drain any high-moisture veggies to avoid a soggy bake.

Can I make this ahead of time?

Yes, this bake reheats well. You can store it in the fridge for up to 4 days and warm it in the microwave or oven before serving.

What if I don’t have a 10-inch tortilla?

You can use two smaller tortillas, slightly overlapping them, or trim a larger one to fit your pie dish.

Recipe Tips and Tricks

Glass pie plate filled with a cooked tortilla and egg baked in it resting on a blue and white striped cloth.

Here are a few of my tips and tricks when making this tortilla cottage cheese egg bake.

  • Use your hands to press the tortilla into the pie plate gently—using a fork can tear it. Warm the tortilla for 10 seconds in the microwave to make it more pliable if needed.
  • Sauté the vegetables until all moisture is cooked off to avoid a watery egg bake.
  • Let it rest before slicing—give it 5–10 minutes after baking so the eggs can finish setting and hold their shape better.
  • Customize with add-ins like chopped spinach, crumbled bacon, or jalapeños to change up the flavor.
  • Want a crispier crust? Brush the tortilla with a little olive oil before adding the filling.

If you make this Tortilla Egg Bake recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

Browned tortilla in a glass pie plate filled with a baked egg and cheese on a blue and white striped cloth.

Egg Tortilla Bake

This Tortilla Egg Bake is ready in just 35 minutes and features a crispy tortilla crust, fluffy eggs, sautéed veggies, and savory bacon—perfect for breakfast, brunch, or meal prep.
No ratings yet
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Breakfast
Cuisine: American
Diet: Low Salt
Prep Time: 10 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 35 minutes minutes
Total Time: 45 minutes minutes
Servings: 6
Calories: 115kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • Measuring Spoons
  • Measuring Cups
  • Cutting Board
  • Knife
  • Mixing Bowl
  • Whisk
  • Silicone Spatula
  • Saute Pan
  • Stove Top
  • Oven
  • Glass Baking Dish

Ingredients

  • 1 Tablespoon Unsalted Butter
  • ¼ cup White Onion diced
  • ¼ cup Mushrooms diced
  • ¼ cup Red Bell Pepper diced
  • 6 Eggs d
  • ½ cup Cottage Cheese
  • ⅛ Teaspoon Black Pepper
  • ⅛ Teaspoon Seasoned Salt
  • ¼ Cup Shredded Cheese
  • 1 10-inch Tortilla

Instructions

  • Preheat your oven to 350° Fahrenheit.
  • In a skillet over medium heat, melt the butter. Add diced onion, red bell pepper, and mushrooms. Sauté until softened and lightly browned, about 5–7 minutes. Remove from heat and set aside.
  • In a large mixing bowl, whisk the eggs. Stir in until incorporated the cottage cheese, black pepper, seasoned salt, and the cooked vegetables.
  • Lightly spray an 8-inch pie plate with non-stick cooking spray. Press the tortilla into the pie plate, forming it into the shape of the dish.
  • Pour the egg and veggie mixture into the tortilla shell. Sprinkle the shredded cheddar cheese evenly on top.
  • Bake for 30–35 minutes or until the center is set and a toothpick inserted comes out clean.
  • Let the tortilla bake cool for 5 minutes before slicing and serving.

Notes

  • Use your hands to press the tortilla into the pie plate gently—using a fork can tear it. Warm the tortilla for 10 seconds in the microwave to make it more pliable if needed.
  • Sauté the vegetables until all moisture is cooked off to avoid a watery egg bake.
  • Let it rest before slicing—give it 5–10 minutes after baking so the eggs can finish setting and hold their shape better.
  • Customize with add-ins like chopped spinach, crumbled bacon, or jalapeños to change up the flavor.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 115kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 175mg | Sodium: 203mg | Potassium: 120mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 543IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 96mg | Iron: 1mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Macaroni and Cheese with Heavy Cream

Published on: February 12, 2025 Updated on: February 12, 2025 by Katie 6 Comments

white bowl filled with elbow mac and cheese with two spoons laying on top of striped cloth.

Make the creamiest stovetop macaroni and cheese with heavy cream for a rich, velvety texture. This easy, 30-minute recipe uses simple ingredients for a homemade classic that’s a hundred times better than boxed mac!

White bowl filled with elbow macaroni and cream sauce on top of a striped towel with a green pot of more mac and cheese.

There’s nothing quite like a bowl of homemade macaroni and cheese—especially when it’s extra creamy, and made with heavy cream. I’ve always been a fan of the macaroni and cheese served on Carnival Cruise Ships and this one is very similiar to the rich creamy mac and cheese they serve in the main dining room. This stovetop mac and cheese comes together in just 30 minutes, making it a quick and satisfying meal or side dish. Say goodbye to bland boxed mac and hello to a rich, homemade version that’s better than any store-bought mix. Whether you’re serving it to kids or adults, this indulgent dish is guaranteed to be a hit!

If you are looking for an extra cheesy macaroni and cheese–this is not the recipe for you. If you want a rich ultra creamy mac and cheese, then you’ve found it. Anyone I’ve ever served it to agrees–its the creamiest they’ve ever had.

Why this Recipe Works

Creamy Texture – The combination of heavy cream, milk, and freshly shredded cheddar cheese creates a silky-smooth sauce that is out of this world.

Quick & Easy – Ready in just 30 minutes, making it perfect for busy weeknights, lunch, or even a holiday side dish.

No Oven Needed – A simple stovetop recipe that delivers all the comfort without baking and heating up the house.

Ingredients

Ingredients on counter; flour, garlic powder, salt, pepper, butter, heavy cream, milk, elbow macaroni, and shredde cheddar cheese.
  • Elbow Macaroni – I stick with the classic pasta choice for mac and cheese, perfect for holding onto the creamy sauce.
  • Butter – Adds richness and flavor while helping to create a smooth roux.
  • All-Purpose Flour – Combines with butter to form a roux, which thickens the cheese sauce.
  • Seasonings – I like to stick to the basics and use salt, pepper, and garlic powder. See below in my recipe tips and tricks for other spices you can add.
  • Heavy Cream – Using heavy cream creates an ultra-rich velvety sauce, and is key to achieving a creamy macaroni and cheese.
  • Milk – After testing extensively, I find that milk helps thin out the cheese sauce and gives it a smooth texture. Remember, the noodles will absorb the sauce so it may look watery at first, but it will thicken and absorb in no time.
  • Cheddar Cheese – The key to a melty, gooey cheese sauce is to avoid pre-shredded cheese, as it contains anti-caking agents that prevent smooth melting. You will want to spend the time to hand grate or use a food processor to let it do the work.

Directions

First, Cook elbow macaroni according to package (about 9-10 minutes). Drain and set to the side in a colander.

Butter with flour roux in a ceramic pot.

In the same pot the pasta was cooked in, melt the butter on high heat. Then reduce to medium heat and add stir in the flour.

Green pot on a black stove top with cream sauce and a wooden spoon.

Once the butter and flour have created a paste (also known as a roux) add in the heavy cream, salt, garlic powder, and pepper. Whisk together and let simmer (do not allow it to boil).

Cream sauce with shredded cheese with wooden spoon in pot.

Remove the pot from the heat and stir in the cheese. Add in the elbow macaroni just before all the cheese is melted.

Green pot filled with creamy mach and cheese next to a blue and white striped towel.

Mix until all of the elbow macaroni has been covered with the creamy cheese sauce. Then begin to stir in the room temperature milk. Let sit 1-2 minutes, then mix again and serve.

FAQs

White bowl filled with elbow macaroni in a cream sauce with two bowls and a striped blue and white towel.
Can I use milk instead of heavy cream?

Yes, but the sauce won’t be nearly as rich as if you were to use the heavy cream. A mix of whole milk and half-and-half can be used as a lighter alternative or in place of heavy cream if you don’t have it on hand.

Why is my mac and cheese grainy or clumpy?

Graininess usually happens when cheese is overheated or if pre-shredded cheese is used which contains anti-caking agents. For the smoothest texture, hand-shred your cheese and melt it over low heat.

Why does my mac and cheese become solid after refrigeration?

When refrigerated, mac and cheese firms up because the cheese sauce thickens as it cools. This happens because the butter, heavy cream, and cheese solidify at lower temperatures. The starches in the pasta also absorb more moisture, making the dish less creamy. You can reheat it in the microwave or on the stove top and add additional milk NOT cream to the dish. It will thin out the cheese sauce and make it silky in texture again.

Will the texture change in the mac and cheese if I freeze it?

Yes, the texture may change slightly. The sauce can become grainy after freezing. If freezing, store in an airtight container for up to 2 months. Reheat gently with added milk or cream to help restore creaminess.

Recipe Tips and Tricks

Creamy Stovetop Macaroni and Cheese 2

Here are a few of my favorite tips and tricks when making macaroni and cheese with heavy cream.

  • Avoid Pre-Shredded Cheese – It contains additives that prevent smooth melting. For the best texture, grate your own cheese. However, if you are really in a time crunch I have found that Cabot’s pre-shredded mac and cheese blend does melt just as good as the freshly shredded.
  • Low Heat – You need to use low heat when making the cheese sauce. High heat can cause the cheese sauce to become grainy.
  • Seasonings – Add a pinch of mustard powder, smoked paprika, or cayenne for a deeper, more complex taste. If you like spice–you can add red pepper flakes. My friends son loved adding red pepper flakes to his bowl of creamy mac and cheese the night we had it at my home.
  • Make it a Meal – Sometimes we will simply sprinkle cooked bacon, rotisserie chicken, pulled pork or even pulled BBQ chicken or even sautéed veggies for a one bowl meal.

If you make this recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

white bowl filled with elbow mac and cheese with two spoons laying on top of striped cloth.

Macaroni and Cheese with Heavy Cream

Make the creamiest stovetop macaroni and cheese with heavy cream for a rich, velvety texture. This easy, 30-minute recipe uses simple ingredients for a homemade classic that's a hundred times better than boxed mac!
5 from 1 vote
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Lunch, Main Course
Cuisine: American
Diet: Low Salt
Prep Time: 10 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 15 minutes minutes
Total Time: 25 minutes minutes
Servings: 10
Calories: 461kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • Measuring Spoons
  • Measuring Cups
  • Large Pot

Ingredients

  • 1 pound elbow macaroni
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 1 tablespoon all-purpose flour
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ⅛ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • 2 cups heavy cream
  • 8 ounces White Cheddar Cheese shredded
  • 1 cup milk room temperature

Instructions

  • Cook elbow macaroni according to package (about 9-10 minutes). Drain and set to the side in a colander.
  • In the same pot the pasta was cooked in, melt the butter on high heat. Then reduce to medium heat and add stir in the flour. Once the butter and flour have created a paste (also known as a roux) add in the heavy cream, salt, garlic powder, and pepper. Whisk together and let simmer (do not allow it to boil).
  • Remove the pot from the heat and stir in the cheese. Add in the elbow macaroni just before all the cheese is melted. Mix until all of the elbow macaroni has been covered with the creamy cheese sauce. Then begin to stir in the room temperature milk. Let sit 1-2 minutes, then mix again and serve.

Notes

I love to dirty just one pot! If you are in a rush and don’t mind dishes, you can always make the sauce separately while the noodles boil.

Nutrition

Serving: 1c | Calories: 461kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 17g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 85mg | Sodium: 290mg | Potassium: 204mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1037IU | Vitamin C: 0.3mg | Calcium: 232mg | Iron: 1mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Instant Pot Chicken Wings from Frozen

Published on: January 16, 2025 Updated on: January 16, 2025 by Katie 18 Comments

6 chicken wings on a white plate stacked next to celery slices.

Craving crispy, flavorful chicken wings but short on time? This Instant Pot Chicken Wings from Frozen recipe has you covered in less than 30 minutes with no thawing required.

White plate filled with buffalo chicken wings with ranch, wings, and instant pot in the background.

When the craving for chicken wings strikes, waiting hours for thawing and prepping is simply not an option. This Instant Pot Chicken Wings recipe is a game-changer, allowing you to cook frozen wings to tender perfection in under 30 minutes. Plus, with a quick broil in the oven, you’ll get that irresistible crispy finish we all love. The Instant Pot does the heavy lifting here. Once your wings are done, toss them in with your favorite sauce, dressing to dip in, and veggies to balance the heat. These wings are a versatile and crowd-pleasing dish. Whether it’s game day or a casual family dinner, these wings are a surefire hit.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why this Recipe Works

Quick and Convenient – No thawing required! The Instant Pot can safely cook frozen chicken wings in just 12 minutes, making it perfect for last-minute meals.

Tender and Crispy – Pressure cooking ensures juicy, fall-off-the-bone wings, while broiling adds that golden, crispy finish.

Customizable – Choose your favorite sauce to toss the wings in like buffalo, barbecue, teriyaki or whatever your heart desires. Serve with classic sides like ranch or bleu cheese dressing, celery, and carrot sticks for a complete meal.

Ingredients

Bag of frozen chicken wings on a marble countertop.
  • Frozen Chicken Wings – The star of the show, these cook beautifully straight from frozen. I always keep a bag in my freezer as an easy meal for my boys.
  • Water – Essential for creating the steam needed in the Instant Pot.
  • Cooking Spray – Keeps the wings from sticking during the broiling step.
  • Sauce of Choice – Barbecue, buffalo, honey garlic – the options are endless!
  • Optional Serving Suggestions – Ranch or bleu cheese dressing, plus celery and carrot sticks, complete the classic wing experience.

Directions

Instant pot filled with frozen chicken wings in a basket.

The key to making frozen chicken wings in the Instant Pot is to make sure they aren’t frozen in one big block. They need to be individually frozen. I buy a 2 pound bag from Earth Fare and they are individual pieces. Perfect for this recipe.

First, you’ll want to place the trivet that comes with your Instant Pot inside the Instant Pot. Then add water. Carefully stack the wings on top of the trivet trying to make sure that none touch the bottom. Spoiler alert: I had a few fall to the bottom and they still came out fine.

Cooked chicken wings in an Instant Pot with buffalo sauce and a pot holder next to it.

Next set your Instant Pot to cook for 12 minutes. Then, let it naturally rest for 5 minutes. While the wings rest, spray the wire rack with cooking spray then set on top of a baking sheet. Preheat your oven to a high broil. Carefully, force pressure after the 5 minutes is up.

Silver bowl with hot wings tossed in buffalo sauce.

Transfer to a bowl with sauce of choice. Mix well (carefully because they will practically fall off the bone), then, using tongs, place on to a sprayed wire rack.

side view chicken wings on metal rack placed on sheet pan with celery blurred in background.

Once all the wings are on the rack place in the oven for 3-5 minutes until golden. Remove from the oven, flip every wing over, and repeat until the other side is golden in color and crispy. Remove the chicken wings from the oven, plate, and serve with your favorite ranch or bleu cheese dressing, carrot and celery sticks!

Within a half hours time you’ll have the most amazing fall-off-the-bone chicken wings!

FAQ

stack of chicken wings on plat next to celery.
Can I use fresh chicken wings instead of frozen?

Yes! Adjust the Instant Pot cooking time to 5 minutes on “Manual” setting for fresh wings.

What if I don’t have a trivet?

You can use a steamer basket or roll up foil to create a makeshift rack.

Can I skip the broiling step?

While it’s optional, broiling adds a crispy texture that gives the chicken wings the crunch we all crave. You don’t have to broil but it’s highly recommended.

Are Instant Pot Frozen Chicken Wings Keto?

Yes, chicken wings can be keto-friendly as long as the sauce you choose is low in carbs and sugar. Opt for sauces like buffalo, garlic Parmesan, or a homemade keto-friendly barbecue sauce. Serve them with keto-approved sides like celery sticks and ranch dressing for a complete low-carb meal. Always check the ingredient labels to ensure they align with your keto goals!

Tips and Tricks

Instant Pot Chicken Wings from Frozen

If you decide to make my chicken wing recipe in the Instant Pot I have a few helpful tips and tricks to make the cooking process a breeze!

  • Crispy Wings – For extra crispy wings, pat them dry before tossing in the sauce.
  • Sauce Flavors – The sky is the limit when it comes to sauce. Although my recipe calls for buffalo sauce you can experiment with different sauces to match your mood or occasion.
  • Broiling – Always monitor the broiling process closely to avoid burning. A rule of thumb, whenever you broil don’t walk away. Turn the oven light on and watch the food until your desired likeness.
  • Save the Sauce – Save the remaining sauce and re-coat wings after you’ve pulled them out of the oven OR serve on the side with the wings.
  • Scaling up the Recipe – Double the batch by cooking in multiple rounds if needed, but avoid overcrowding the Instant Pot.

These Instant Pot Chicken Wings are a quick, delicious, and versatile recipe that’s perfect for any occasion. Get ready to impress your family or guests with minimal effort and maximum flavor!

Chicken Wing Recipes

Looking for more chicken wing inspiration? Try my other chicken wing recipes.

  • Baked Spicy Greek Yogurt Chicken Wings with Greek Yogurt Bleu Cheese Dressing #recipe #superbowl #chickenwings #football
    Baked Spicy Greek Yogurt Chicken Wings with Greek Yogurt Bleu Cheese Dressing
  • Key West Grilled Chicken Wings
    Key West Grilled Chicken Wings
  • Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Wings
    Slow Cooker Chicken Wings

If you make this recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list! This recipe is available on Google Web Stories.

6 chicken wings on a white plate stacked next to celery slices.

Instant Pot Chicken Wings from Frozen

Craving crispy, flavorful chicken wings but short on time? This Instant Pot Chicken Wings from Frozen recipe has you covered in less than 30 minutes with no thawing required.
4.91 from 11 votes
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Appetizer, Instant Pot, Main Course
Cuisine: American
Diet: Gluten Free, Low Lactose
Prep Time: 5 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 30 minutes minutes
Total Time: 35 minutes minutes
Servings: 4
Calories: 503kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • Measuring Cup
  • Trivet for Instant Pot
  • Instant Pot
  • Wire Rack
  • Sheet Pan
  • Tongs

Ingredients

  • 2 lbs. Frozen Chicken Wings
  • 1 cup Water
  • Cooking Spray
  • 1 cup Sauce of Choice

Instructions

  • Place the trivet into the Instant Pot. Carefully stack the wings on top of the trivet trying to make sure that none touch the bottom.
  • Select “Manual” and cook for 12 minutes. Then, let the IP naturally rest for 5 minutes. While the wings rest, spray the wire rack with cooking spray then set on top of a baking sheet.
  • Preheat your oven to a high broil.
  • Carefully, force pressure after the 5 minutes are up. Transfer to a bowl with sauce of choice. Mix well (carefully because they will practically fall off the bone), then, using tongs,  place on to the sprayed wire rack.
  • Once all the wings are on the rack place in the oven for 3-5 minutes until golden (watch them carefully to ensure they don’t burn). Remove from the oven, flip every wing/drum over, and repeat until the other side is golden in color and crispy (about 3-5 minutes depending on your oven).
  • Remove the chicken wings from the oven, plate, and serve with your favorite ranch or bleu cheese dressing, carrot and celery sticks!

Notes

  • Crispy Wings – For extra crispy wings, pat them dry before tossing in the sauce.
  • Sauce Flavors – The sky is the limit when it comes to sauce. Although my recipe calls for buffalo sauce you can experiment with different sauces to match your mood or occasion.
  • Broiling – Always monitor the broiling process closely to avoid burning. A rule of thumb, whenever you broil don’t walk away. Turn the oven light on and watch the food until your desired likeness.
  • Save the Sauce – Save the remaining sauce and re-coat wings after you’ve pulled them out of the oven OR serve on the side with the wings.
  • Scaling up the Recipe – Double the batch by cooking in multiple rounds if needed, but avoid overcrowding the Instant Pot.

Nutrition

Serving: 0.5lbs | Calories: 503kcal | Protein: 42g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 175mg | Sodium: 2008mg | Potassium: 354mg | Vitamin A: 333IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 2mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Instant Pot Beef Barley Soup

Published on: January 13, 2025 Updated on: January 7, 2021 by Katie 4 Comments

Two white bowls stacked with beef and barley soup on a yellow cloth.

Instant Pot Beef Barley Soup is hearty and packed with flavor. My beef and barley soup recipe will be your new go-to for cozy weeknight dinners. Ready in under an hour, it’s the perfect blend of tender beef, wholesome barley, and vibrant fork-tender veggies.

top view of bowl of brown soup with barley, beef, peas, carrots, celery and herbs visible with title text.

My Instant Pot Beef Barley Soup is a comforting classic made effortlessly thanks to the magic of pressure cooking. Tender chunks of stew meat are seasoned with Montreal Steak Seasoning and seared to perfection before being combined with fresh vegetables and store-bought beef broth. This recipe is what I call a 2-part cooking recipe. Similar to my slow cooker jambalaya. The beef and veggies cook first then you add in the barley, mushrooms, and peas and cook again. The result is a rich and satisfying soup that’s as nutritious as it is delicious.

Beef and barley soup reminds me of my childhood. My mom never made it for us–I would simply order it when we were out or sadly eat the canned variety. Perfect for a cold evening or a hearty lunch, this soup balances flavors and textures beautifully. The barley provides a nutty chew, the vegetables add sweetness and crunch, and the beef creates a rich, meaty base. Garnished with fresh chives and parsley to add some brightness to the soup giving each bowl is a burst of flavor that feels like a warm hug.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why this Recipe Works

top view of bowl of brown soup with barley, beef, peas, carrots, celery and herbs visible next to spoons.

Quick and Easy: The Instant Pot dramatically cuts down cooking time, so you can enjoy this hearty soup in under an hour without sacrificing flavor. You can also set it up before you leave the house so when you come home your meal is almost ready.

Nutrient-Packed: With protein-rich beef, fiber-filled barley, and a variety of vegetables, this soup has it all.

Versatile: Perfect as a standalone meal or paired with a side of crusty bread, it’s a dish that fits any occasion—from weeknight dinners to family gatherings.

Ingredients

Ingredients on grey counter; broth, carrots, celery, peas, barley, tomatoes, onion, garlic, stewed beef, herbs and seasonings.
  • Stew Meat – Provides the hearty, tender protein base for the soup. Searing it enhances the depth of flavor.
  • Montreal Steak Seasoning – Adds a robust, savory kick to the beef. You can buy it from the store or make your own steak seasoning.
  • Grapeseed Oil – Ideal for high-heat cooking, it helps achieve a beautiful sear on the beef.
  • Carrots – Adds natural sweetness and vibrant color.
  • Celery – Brings a fresh crunch and balances the flavors.
  • Onion – The aromatic foundation of the soup, enhancing overall richness.
  • Garlic – Infuses a subtle, savory aroma and depth.
  • Beef Broth – Creates the flavorful and nourishing soup base.
  • Tomatoes – Adds a touch of acidity and a hint of sweetness.
  • Barley -Provides a nutty, chewy texture and hearty substance.
  • Frozen Green Peas – Introduces a pop of sweetness and bright green color.
  • White Mushrooms – Adds an earthy depth of flavor.
  • Fresh Chives and Flat-Leaf Parsley – Brightens the dish with fresh, herbaceous notes.

Directions

Raw beef chunks in an Instant Pot.
Browned beef chunks in an Instant Pot.

Turn the Instant Pot on to “Saute” setting. Pour the oil into the pot, place the stew beef in the pot and season with the Montreal Steak Seasoning. Brown the meat for 5 minutes.

Cooked beef with veggies in an instant pot.
Broth with raw vegetables in a silver pot.

Then add in the carrots, celery, onions, garlic, and the broth. Turn the Instant Pot off then select “soup” setting. Set for 15 minutes. Once done cooking, carefully do a quick release pressure.

Cooked soup with barley and mushrooms with a pink stirring stick.

Add in the diced tomatoes, barley, frozen green peas, and the sliced mushrooms. Place the lid back on the Instant Pot and set for 1 minute on “Manual” Setting. Once done, carefully do a quick pressure release.

Black ladle filled with beef and barley soup over a pot.

Season with salt and pepper and ladle into bowls. Garnish with fresh chives and flat leaf parsley. Enjoy.

FAQs

closeup bowl of brown soup with barley, beef, peas, carrots, celery and herbs in front of fresh celery.
Can I use a different cut of meat?

Yes! Chuck roast, brisket, or even leftover pot roast or roast beef work wonderfully in this recipe

What if I don’t have barley?

Substitute with farro, quinoa, or rice for a different texture and taste. Although, I highly suggest you get the barley so you can make the soup as it was intended to be made.

Can this soup be frozen?

Absolutely! Store in an airtight container and freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator and reheat on the stovetop or microwave.

Do I need to soak the barley?

No soaking is needed for this recipe as the Instant Pot cooks barley to perfection quickly.

How do I adjust the recipe for stovetop cooking?

Sauté the beef and vegetables in a large pot, then simmer the soup on low heat for about 1.5 hours until the beef is tender and barley is cooked.

Recipe Tips and Tricks

top view of bowl of brown soup with barley, beef, peas, carrots, celery and herbs in front of instant pot.
  • For extra flavor – Deglaze the Instant Pot with a splash of red wine or balsamic vinegar after sautéing the beef.
  • Pre-chop veggies – Save time by prepping your carrots, celery, and onions ahead of time. If you plan to cook this during the week I like to sometimes prep all the veggies on that Sunday so it takes minimal time to put together.
  • Leftover Beef – If you happen to have leftover roast beef you can use 1-2 cups of it plus the juices/gravy from it to make this delectable soup.
  • Don’t rush the release – While quick pressure release is recommended, always do it carefully to avoid steam burns. I like to put a dish towel over the steam valve to prevent any types of accidents.

If you make this beef and barley soup recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

Two white bowls stacked with beef and barley soup on a yellow cloth.

Instant Pot Beef Barley Soup

Instant Pot Beef Barley Soup is hearty and packed with flavor. My beef and barley soup recipe will be your new go-to for cozy weeknight dinners. Ready in under an hour, it’s the perfect blend of tender beef, wholesome barley, and vibrant fork-tender veggies.
5 from 1 vote
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Instant Pot, Main Course, Soup
Cuisine: American
Diet: Low Lactose
Prep Time: 15 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 32 minutes minutes
Total Time: 47 minutes minutes
Servings: 8
Calories: 256kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • 1 Knife
  • 1 Cutting Board
  • Measuring Cups
  • Measuring Spoons
  • Instant Pot
  • Ladle

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds stew meat cut into 1-inch piece chunks
  • 1 tablespoon Montreal Steak Seasoning
  • 2 teaspoons grapeseed Oil
  • 4 carrots peeled and sliced
  • 6 stalks of celery diced
  • 1 onion diced
  • 3 cloves garlic
  • 64 ounces beef broth
  • 16 ounces diced tomatoes
  • ½ cup barley
  • ½ cup frozen green peas
  • ½ cup white mushrooms sliced or chopped
  • fresh chives and flat leaf parsley minced, for garnish

Instructions

  • Turn the Instant Pot on to "Saute" setting. Pour the oil into the pot, place the stew beef in the pot and season with the Montreal Steak Seasoning. Brown the meat for 5 minutes.
  • Then add in the carrots, celery, onions, garlic, and the broth. Turn the Instant Pot off then select "soup" setting. Set for 15 minutes. Once done cooking, carefully do a quick release pressure.
  • Add in the diced tomatoes, barley, frozen green peas, and the sliced mushrooms. Place the lid back on the Instant Pot and set for 1 minute on "Manual" Setting. Once done, carefully do a quick pressure release.
  • Season with salt and pepper and ladle into bowls. Garnish with fresh chives and flat leaf parsley. Enjoy.

Notes

  • For extra flavor – Deglaze the Instant Pot with a splash of red wine or balsamic vinegar after sautéing the beef.
  • Pre-chop veggies – Save time by prepping your carrots, celery, and onions ahead of time. If you plan to cook this during the week I like to sometimes prep all the veggies on that Sunday so it takes minimal time to put together.
  • Tomatoes – I have made this recipe with fresh diced plum tomatoes or canned diced tomatoes. Both work just fine. If you want to make it easier on yourself use the can of diced tomatoes.
  • Leftover Beef – If you happen to have leftover roast beef you can use 1-2 cups of it plus the juices/gravy from it to make this delectable soup.
  • Don’t rush the release – While quick pressure release is recommended, always do it carefully to avoid steam burns. I like to put a dish towel over the steam valve to prevent any types of accidents

Nutrition

Serving: 1c | Calories: 256kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 32g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 70mg | Sodium: 507mg | Potassium: 1104mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 5323IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 51mg | Iron: 3mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Old Fashioned Sweet Potato Casserole

Published on: November 27, 2024 Updated on: November 27, 2024 by Katie 2 Comments

White baking dish filled with toasted marshmallow casserole on a white and blue striped cloth with a silver spoon next to it.

This Old Fashioned Sweet Potato Casserole brings the perfect blend of sweetness and nostalgia to your holiday table, complete with a gooey marshmallow topping that everyone loves, and best of all only requires five ingredients.

White casserole dish filled with sweet potatoes and a golden brown marshmallow topping.

Sweet potato casserole. You either love it or hate it. My family is a bit divided, but for the most part most enjoy my Old Fashioned Sweet Potato Casserole. I love it and the more marshmallows on top the better. Because let’s face it–why else would you eat a homemade sweet potato casserole? As a kid that’s how I was lured to try sweet potato casserole. I’m pretty sure the first few times I had it all I did was eat the crispy marshmallow topping.

When it comes to classic holiday dishes, nothing warms the heart like a sweet potato casserole. Packed with rich, buttery sweetness and crowned with a blanket of toasted mini marshmallows, this dish has been a favorite at family gatherings for generations. It’s the perfect side to complement your Thanksgiving turkey or Christmas ham, and it’s sure to be the star of your holiday spread.

This Old Fashioned Sweet Potato Casserole recipe stays true to tradition while keeping things simple. Made with just a handful of pantry staples like fresh sweet potatoes, butter, brown sugar, cinnamon, and mini marshmallows. Whether you’re a longtime fan of this classic side dish or trying it for the first time, this recipe promises to deliver comfort, flavor, and plenty of holiday cheer.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why this Recipe Works

Minimal Ingredients, Maximum Flavor – With just five simple ingredients, this recipe achieves a perfect balance of sweetness, spice, and buttery richness without overwhelming the palate.

Easy to Make Ahead – This casserole is perfect for holiday prep. You can cook the sweet potatoes and assemble the dish a day before you want to bake it, saving you stress on the big day.

Kid-Friendly and Crowd-Pleasing – The toasted marshmallow topping is always a hit, making this dish a favorite among kids (even if they just eat the marshmallows I call it a win at getting them to try something new) and adults alike. It’s guaranteed to disappear fast!

Ingredients

Ingredients on counter, mini marshmallows, brown sugar, cinnamon, butter, sweet potatoes.
  • Sweet Potatoes: The star of the dish. Extra-large sweet potatoes ensure a creamy base with natural sweetness.
  • Butter: Adds richness and enhances the flavor of the sweet potatoes. A little goes a long way!
  • Brown Sugar: Provides a caramel-like sweetness that pairs perfectly with the natural sugars in the potatoes. You can use more for a sweeter casserole or less to reduce sugar.
  • Cinnamon: Adds warmth and depth to the dish.
  • Mini Marshmallows: The iconic topping that melts and toasts to golden perfection.

How to Make Sweet Potato Casserole

First, steam sweet potatoes for 20 minutes or until fork tender. Pro Tip: I like to steam my sweet potatoes using the instant pot! This requires not peeling or chopping and saves a lot of time!

Peeled sweet potatoes in a stainless steel bowl with peels and a knife next to the bowl.

Remove from the steamer basket, let rest for 10 minutes, then peel the skins off and place the peeled sweet potatoes into a large bowl.

Peeled sweet potatoes, butter, cinnamon, and brown sugar in a stainless steel bowl with a potato masher next to it.

Add the salted butter, brown sugar, and cinnamon to the bowl.

Female hand with pink nails using a potato masher to mash sweet potatoes.

Using a potato masher, mash the sweet potatoes until smooth.

Preheat the broiler on high.

White baking dish filled with mashed sweet potatoes.

Spray non-stick cooking spray into an oven-safe 9×11 rectangular baking dish. Pour the mashed sweet potatoes into a dish. I like to sprinkle a little extra brown sugar on top before adding the marshmallows.

Rectangular baking dish filled with uncooked sweet potato casserole on resting on top of a stove.

Top with mini marshmallows.

Broil on high for 1 minute or until marshmallows are golden brown. Serve immediately.

FAQs

White casserole dish filled with sweet potato casserole with toasted marshmallow topping and a spoon holding a scoop over the dish.
Can I use canned sweet potatoes instead of fresh ones?

Yes, you can substitute canned sweet potatoes for fresh. Be sure to drain them well before mashing, and adjust the sugar to taste since canned varieties are often sweetened.

How do I make this recipe dairy-free?

Swap out the butter for a dairy-free alternative, such as coconut oil or vegan butter, and double-check that your marshmallows are dairy-free.

Can I prepare this ahead of time?

Absolutely! Assemble the casserole without the marshmallows, cover, and refrigerate for up to two days. Bring the casserole out to get to room temperature a half hour before baking. Bake with foil on top for a half hour. Then, add the marshmallows on top during the last few minutes of baking. Watch them closely to ensure they don’t burn but stay a nice golden brown in color.

Is Sweet Potato Casserole gluten-free?

Yes! This recipe is naturally gluten-free as written. However, if you add toppings like crushed graham crackers or other non-marshmallow ingredients, double-check that they’re certified gluten-free.

Can I use a different topping instead of marshmallows?

You can top the casserole with a streusel made from brown sugar, butter, and oats or chopped nuts like pecans for a crunchy, flavorful alternative.

Recipe Tips and Tricks

Top view of a rectangular dish filled with sweet potato casserole with toasted marshmallows.

Here are a few of my favorite tips and tricks to help you execute making a sweet potato casserole.

  • Roast the Sweet Potatoes: Roasting sweet potatoes instead of boiling them brings out their natural sweetness and keeps the texture smooth. You can roast the sweet potatoes hole (make sure to prick the skin with the tines of a fork a few times so steam can release) then follow the same steps to peel the skin off.
  • Boiling Sweet Potatoes: If you don’t want to steam or roast the sweet potatoes you can peel and dice the sweet potatoes. I don’t like this method as sweet potatoes are harder to peel.
  • Toast the Marshmallows Evenly: Place the dish on the middle rack of your oven for even browning, and watch closely to avoid burning.
  • Add a Crunchy Topping: If you love texture, sprinkle chopped pecans or crushed graham crackers under the marshmallows for a delightful crunch.
  • Balance the Sweetness: Add a pinch of salt to the sweet potato mixture to enhance the flavors and keep it from being overly sweet.

If you make this Old Fashioned Sweet Potato Casserole recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

White baking dish filled with toasted marshmallow casserole on a white and blue striped cloth with a silver spoon next to it.

Homemade Sweet Potato Casserole

This Old Fashioned Sweet Potato Casserole brings the perfect blend of sweetness and nostalgia to your holiday table, complete with a gooey marshmallow topping that everyone loves, and best of all only requires 5 ingredients.
5 from 1 vote
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Appetizer, Side Dish
Cuisine: American
Diet: Gluten Free
Prep Time: 10 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 25 minutes minutes
Resting Time: 10 minutes minutes
Total Time: 45 minutes minutes
Servings: 8
Calories: 352kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • 1 Pot
  • 1 Stove
  • 1 Knife
  • 1 Large Bowl
  • Measuring Cups
  • Measuring Spoons
  • 1 9×11 Baking Dish
  • 1 Silicone Spatula
  • 1 Potato Masher

Ingredients

  • 8 Sweet potatoes
  • 2 tablespoons Salted butter
  • ½ cup Brown sugar
  • 1 teaspoon Cinnamon
  • 4 cups Mini marshmallows

Instructions

  • Steam sweet potatoes for 20 minutes or until fork tender.
  • Remove from the steamer basket, let rest for 10 minutes, then peel the skins off and place the peeled sweet potatoes into a large bowl.
  • Add the salted butter, brown sugar, and cinnamon to the bowl. Using a potato masher, mash the sweet potatoes until smooth.
  • Preheat the broiler on high.
  • Spray non-stick cooking spray into an oven-safe 9×11 rectangular baking dish. Pour the mashed sweet potatoes into a dish. Top with mini marshmallows.
  • Broil on high for 1 minute or until marshmallows are golden brown. Serve immediately.

Notes

  • Roast the Sweet Potatoes: Roasting sweet potatoes instead of boiling them brings out their natural sweetness and keeps the texture smooth. You can roast the sweet potatoes hole (make sure to prick the skin with the tines of a fork a few times so steam can release) then follow the same steps to peel the skin off.
  • Boiling Sweet Potatoes: If you don’t want to steam or roast the sweet potatoes you can peel and dice the sweet potatoes. I don’t like this method as sweet potatoes are harder to peel.
  • Toast the Marshmallows Evenly: Place the dish on the middle rack of your oven for even browning, and watch closely to avoid burning.
  • Add a Crunchy Topping: If you love texture, sprinkle chopped pecans or crushed graham crackers under the marshmallows for a delightful crunch.
  • Balance the Sweetness: Add a pinch of salt to the sweet potato mixture to enhance the flavors and keep it from being overly sweet.

Nutrition

Serving: 0.5cup | Calories: 352kcal | Carbohydrates: 79g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 8mg | Sodium: 171mg | Potassium: 783mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 37g | Vitamin A: 32151IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 83mg | Iron: 2mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Cream Cheese Stuffed Mushrooms

Published on: November 25, 2024 Updated on: February 5, 2020 by Katie 2 Comments

Glass dish filled with baked stuffed mushrooms.

Discover the secret to irresistibly creamy and crunchy Cream Cheese Stuffed Mushrooms, a crowd-pleasing appetizer perfect for any occasion, and done in 30 minutes time.

Glass baking dish filled with cooked crispy top mushrooms.

Stuffed mushrooms have long been a favorite on appetizer menus, and for a good reason—they’re versatile, bite-sized, and packed with flavor. These Cream Cheese Stuffed Mushrooms take things up a notch with a luscious, seasoned filling topped with a crispy, cheesy breadcrumb crust. Whether you’re hosting a holiday party or just need an easy snack, this recipe has you covered.

The combination of cream cheese, sharp cheddar, and Italian seasoning creates a flavorful and creamy stuffing that pairs perfectly with the natural earthiness of mushrooms. Add a crispy panko and parmesan topping, and you’ve got a dish that’s as texturally satisfying as it is delicious. Giving the perfect crunchy outside to creamy inside in each bite.

Table of contents

  • Why this Recipe Works
  • Ingredients
  • How to Make Stuffed Mushrooms
  • FAQs
  • Recipe Tips and Tricks
  • Easy Appetizers

Why this Recipe Works

Balanced Flavors: The creamy, cheesy filling is perfectly seasoned with Italian herbs, garlic, and pepper, complementing the mushrooms’ natural flavor.

Irresistible Texture: The panko-parmesan crust adds the perfect crunch to every bite, creating a delightful contrast to the creamy filling.

Easy and Adaptable: With simple ingredients that you already have on hand and straightforward steps, this recipe is approachable for beginners and customizable for seasoned cooks.

Ingredients

Ingredients on counter: shredded cheese, panko breadcrumbs, cream cheese, italian seasoning, butter, garlic, and mushrooms.
  • Mushrooms – I prefer to use white whole mushrooms as their size and shape make them ideal for stuffing while offering a mild, earthy flavor.
  • Cream Cheese – For this recipe I used the already whipped cream cheese. This allows me to make the appetizer on the fly without having to wait for room temperature cream cheese. The cream cheese adds a smooth, creamy base for the filling.
  • Cheese – You will use two types of cheese for this dish. Inside the cream cheese filling will have equal parts cream cheese to cheddar cheese. The shredded cheddar cheese has a tangy, melty component to enhance the filling’s flavor. The parmesan on top adds a nutty, salty finish to the crust.
  • Seasonings – Italian seasoning brings a touch of herbal complexity while the black pepper ties everything together.
  • Garlic – One raw clove of garlic pressed will infuse the filling with aromatic depth.
  • Breadcrumbs – I prefer panko breadcrumbs for this dish as it creates a light and crispy topping.
  • Butter – Salted butter helps the topping adhere and adds richness to the mushrooms that bake in the dish. This will also ensure the mushrooms aren’t dry.

How to Make Stuffed Mushrooms

Female hand with pink nails holding a white cleaned mushroom with napkin.

First, preheat the oven to 400 degrees. Then, spray a square baking dish with non-stick cooking spray. Then place two tablespoons of butter in the dish.

De-stem mushrooms and wipe clean with a damp paper towel.

In a medium bowl, mix together the cream cheese, Italian Seasoning, cheddar cheese, pressed garlic, and black pepper to taste. Set to the side.

In a separate bowl, mix together the melted butter, panko bread crumbs, and shredded parmesan cheese until well mixed. Sprinkle with additional pepper if desired.

Female hand with pink nails holding a raw stuffed mushrooms filled with a cream cheese and cheese mixture.

Using a spoon, stuff each mushroom with the cream cheese filling just until it’s even with the mushroom or just above the mushroom top.

Female hand with pink nails holding a raw stuffed mushroom with breaded topping over a bowl.

Next, press the cream cheese filled stuffed mushroom into the panko breadcrumb mixture. Make sure to coat all the cream cheese mixture.

Square glass baking dish filled with breading and parmesan strands stuffed in mushrooms.

Place each cream cheese stuffed mushroom in the dish until you have filled all mushrooms.

Bake for 20 minutes or until mushrooms are golden brown. Serve immediately.

FAQs

Can I use other types of mushrooms?

If you don’t have white mushrooms or maybe don’t prefer them. You can use baby bella or cremini whole mushrooms. They both work well as substitutes, offering a slightly meatier texture.

How do I clean mushrooms?

Use a damp paper towel to gently wipe away dirt. Avoid soaking them in water, as mushrooms absorb moisture easily. You may have to use a few paper towels depending on how many mushrooms you have to clean and how dirty they are.

What is the black stuff on my mushrooms?

Mushrooms grow in dirt. The small black stuff is typically dirt or small bits of peat compost. The dirt can look unappealing and taste gritty so it’s best to wipe it off before cooking.

Can these be made ahead of time?

Yes, I love to make these ahead of time whenever I’m entertaining specifically for a holiday. You can prepare the stuffed mushrooms and topping up to a day before you want to serve the mushrooms. Make sure to store the stuffed mushrooms in a sealed container in the refrigerator. Once your ready to bake them, take the stuffed mushrooms out of the refrigerator a half hour prior to baking so they can get to room temperature, then bake just before serving.

How do you keep stuffed mushrooms from getting watery?

Avoid overwashing the mushrooms. Like mentioned above, it’s important to clean mushrooms with a damp paper towel rather than rinsing them under water. Mushrooms act like sponges and will absorb excess moisture if soaked. For extra moisture control, bake the hollowed-out mushroom caps for 5-7 minutes before stuffing them. Then, drain any liquid that accumulates before adding the filling. You should also always cook the mushrooms at high heat. Cooking at 400°F or higher helps evaporate excess moisture more efficiently, preventing sogginess.

Recipe Tips and Tricks

Square glass baking dish on top of a white and blue striped cloth with cooked stuffed mushrooms.

Here are a few of my tips and tricks I’ve found useful when making cream cheese filled mushrooms.

  • Filling and Topping – Depending on the size of your mushrooms will depend if you have any extra filling leftover.
  • Customize the Filling – Add chopped cooked bacon, spinach, or sun-dried tomatoes for an extra flavor boost.
  • Recipe Testing – This recipe was tested using small white mushrooms. If you use larger mushrooms you may need more filling.
  • Don’t Overfill – Stuff the mushrooms level with or slightly above the edges to avoid spillage during baking.
  • Mushrooms – Feel free to use baby bella mushrooms instead of white mushrooms if you prefer or have these types of mushrooms on hand.
  • Perfectly Golden Topping – You can broil the mushrooms for the last 1-2 minutes of baking for a golden browned crust.
  • Garnish – You can add a pop of color to the dish my sprinkling on dried parsley or chives or use fresh parsley or chives minced small if you have it on hand.
  • Gluten Free – To make these stuffed mushrooms gluten free, you can use gluten free panko breadcrumbs in its place.

Easy Appetizers

Looking for more delicious easy appetizers to make? Check out a few more of my favorite recipes.

  • Glass dish filled with baked stuffed mushrooms.
    Cream Cheese Stuffed Mushrooms
  • Wood platter filled with skewers filled with grape tomatoes, mozzarella, and basil.
    Caprese Skewers
  • Two loaves of garlic cheese bread with one cut into 4 pieces resting on a wood cutting board.
    Garlic Cheese Bread
  • White oval dish filled with beets, feta, spinach, and balsamic drizzle.
    Beet Salad with Feta

If you make these stuffed mushrooms with cream cheese, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

Glass dish filled with baked stuffed mushrooms.

Cream Cheese Stuffed Mushrooms

Discover the secret to irresistibly creamy and crunchy Cream Cheese Stuffed Mushrooms, a crowd-pleasing appetizer perfect for any occasion, and done in 30 minutes time.
5 from 1 vote
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Appetizer, Side Dish
Cuisine: American
Diet: Low Salt
Prep Time: 10 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 20 minutes minutes
Total Time: 30 minutes minutes
Servings: 6
Calories: 172kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • 2 Bowls
  • Measuring Spoons
  • Measuring Cups
  • 2 Spoons
  • 1 9 x 9 Glass Baking Dish
  • 1 Oven

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons Salted Butter
  • 8 ounces White Whole Mushrooms
  • ½ cup cream cheese whipped
  • 1 teaspoon Italian Seasoning
  • ¼ cup Cheddar Cheese Shredded
  • 1 clove Garlic Pressed
  • Black Pepper to taste

For Panko Topping

  • ¼ cup Plain Panko Breadcrumbs
  • ¼ cup Shredded Parmesan Cheese
  • 1 tablespoon Salted Butter melted

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees.
  • Spray a square baking dish with non-stick cooking spray. Then place two tablespoons of butter in the dish.
  • De-stem mushrooms and wipe clean with a damp paper towel.
  • In a medium bowl, mix together the cream cheese, Italian Seasoning, cheddar cheese, pressed garlic, and black pepper to taste. Set to the side.
  • In a separate bowl, mix together the melted butter, panko bread crumbs, and shredded parmesan cheese until well mixed. Sprinkle with additional pepper if desired.
  • Using a spoon, stuff each mushroom with the cream cheese filling just until it's even with the mushroom or just above the mushroom top. Next, press the cream cheese filled stuffed mushroom into the panko breadcrumb mixture. Make sure to coat all the cream cheese mixture.
  • Place each cream cheese stuffed mushroom in the dish until you have filled all mushrooms.
  • Bake for 20 minutes or until mushrooms are golden brown. Serve immediately.

Notes

  • Filling and Topping – Depending on the size of your mushrooms will depend if you have any extra filling leftover. This recipe was tested using small white mushrooms. If you use larger mushrooms you may need more filling.
  • Customize the Filling – Add chopped cooked bacon, spinach, or sun-dried tomatoes for an extra flavor boost.
  • Mushrooms – Feel free to use baby bella mushrooms instead of white mushrooms if you prefer or have these types of mushrooms on hand.
  • Gluten Free – To make these stuffed mushrooms gluten free, you can use gluten free panko breadcrumbs in its place.
  • Garnish – You can add a pop of color to the dish my sprinkling on dried parsley or chives or use fresh parsley or chives minced small if you have it on hand.
  • Perfectly Golden Topping – You can broil the mushrooms for the last 1-2 minutes of baking for a golden browned crust.
  • Don’t Overfill – Stuff the mushrooms level with or slightly above the edges to avoid spillage during baking.
  • Recipe Testing – This recipe was tested using small white mushrooms. If you use larger mushrooms you may need more filling.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 172kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 42mg | Sodium: 222mg | Potassium: 165mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 514IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 115mg | Iron: 1mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Brussel Sprouts with Bacon and Balsamic

Published on: November 22, 2024 Updated on: January 11, 2020 by Katie 1 Comment

White bowl filled with roasted brussels sprouts on a cloth.

Oven roasted Brussel sprouts with bacon and balsamic are crispy, caramelized, and loaded with savory bacon and tangy balsamic glaze, these Brussels sprouts are the ultimate side dish that will leave everyone reaching for seconds.

White bowl filled with sliced roasted brussels sprouts with bacon on a white countertop.

This Brussels sprouts recipe brings together the earthy taste of roasted Brussels sprouts, the smoky richness of bacon, and a sweet-tangy balsamic glaze that balances the flavors perfectly. The sprouts are sliced in half to maximize the crispy edges, then tossed with chopped bacon for an extra layer of flavor. Finally, a drizzle of balsamic glaze is added, giving the dish a pop of acidity and a subtle sweetness that complements the salty bacon. This recipe is easy enough for a weeknight dinner yet impressive enough for holiday gatherings!

What’s great about this recipe is how versatile it is. It pairs well with many main dishes, from roasted chicken to a holiday ham, and it’s quick to prepare. Plus, it only requires a handful of ingredients and minimal prep time, so you can whip it up whenever you need a quick and tasty veggie side. Serve it straight from the oven while the Brussels sprouts are still crisp and the bacon is perfectly crunchy.

Why this Recipe Works

Balance of Flavors: The salty bacon and sweet-tangy balsamic glaze perfectly complement the slightly bitter taste of the Brussels sprouts, making each bite a symphony of flavors.

Texture Contrast: Roasting the Brussels sprouts brings out a crispy exterior while keeping a tender interior, and the bacon adds a satisfying crunch.

Ease of Preparation: This dish comes together quickly, with minimal ingredients and prep, making it ideal for any occasion.

Ingredients

Brussels sprouts, balsamic glaze, bacon, grapeseed oil, garlic powder, pepper, salt on a white countertop.
  • Brussels sprouts – I like to halve the brussels sprouts for maximum crispiness.
  • Bacon – Adds a smoky flavor and a nice crunchy texture.
  • Olive oil – Helps the sprouts roast evenly and keeps them from drying out.
  • Seasonings – Salt, pepper, and garlic powder are used to enhance the natural flavors.
  • Balsamic glaze – A finishing touch that adds a tangy-sweet element.

Roasted Brussels Sprouts

White countertop, blue cutting board with sliced brussels srpouts and a knife, with seasoning in a dish.

Preheat your oven to 400° F.

Cut the ends off of the Brussels sprouts and cut in half. Place the Brussels sprouts and bacon on a baking sheet. Drizzle with grapeseed oil, then season with salt, pepper, and garlic powder.

White counter with a parchment liner on a gold baking sheet with sliced brussels sprouts and bacon.

Toss together until well-coated, spreading out the Brussels sprouts and bacon in a single layer.

Roast for 20-25 minutes, or until the sprouts are crispy and the bacon is cooked through, stirring halfway.

Remove from the oven and drizzle with balsamic glaze before serving. Enjoy warm

FAQs

Parchment paper lined gold baking sheet with sliced roasted brussels sprouts, bacon, and balsamic glaze.
Can I use frozen Brussels sprouts?

Yes, but fresh sprouts yield a better texture. If using frozen, make sure to thaw and dry them thoroughly.

What if I don’t have balsamic glaze?

You can reduce balsamic vinegar with a bit of honey to make your own glaze.

Can I make this recipe without bacon?

Absolutely! For a vegetarian option, skip the bacon or replace it with toasted nuts for crunch.

How do I prevent soggy Brussels sprouts?

Spread the sprouts in a single layer on the baking sheet, leaving space around each piece for even roasting.

Can I make this dish ahead of time?

This dish is best served fresh. If needed, you can prep the sprouts and bacon ahead, then roast just before serving.

Recipe Tips & Tricks

White bowl on a blue and white cloth filled with brussels sprouts.

Here are a few of my favorite tips and tricks when making Brussel Sprouts with Bacon and Balsamic.

  • Crispiness – To ensure crispy Brussels sprouts, don’t overcrowd the pan—airflow is key for even browning.
  • Spicy – If you want a spicier kick, add a pinch of red pepper flakes before roasting or even a little hot honey.
  • Bacon – Feel free to use turkey or vegan bacon options to make this dish fit your diet.
  • Caramelization – For extra caramelization, toss a tablespoon of brown sugar on the sprouts before baking making sure to evenly coat them.
  • Use High-Quality Balsamic Glaze – A thicker, high-quality balsamic glaze will add a richer flavor and cling to the Brussels sprouts better.
  • Make Your Own Balsamic Glaze – You can also make your own glaze by simmering balsamic vinegar until it reduces by half for a more intense flavor.
  • Add a Fresh Garnish – For a burst of color and brightness, sprinkle chopped fresh herbs like parsley or thyme over the dish just before serving. This will enhance the overall flavor and add a touch of freshness to balance the richness of the bacon.

If you make these balsamic roasted brussels sprouts recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

White bowl filled with roasted brussels sprouts on a cloth.

Brussel Sprouts with Bacon and Balsamic

Oven roasted Brussel sprouts with bacon and balsamic are crispy, caramelized, and loaded with savory bacon and tangy balsamic glaze, these Brussels sprouts are the ultimate side dish that will leave everyone reaching for seconds.
5 from 1 vote
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: American
Diet: Gluten Free
Prep Time: 10 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 25 minutes minutes
Total Time: 35 minutes minutes
Servings: 4
Calories: 162kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • 1 Knife
  • 1 Cutting Board
  • Teaspoons
  • Tablespoons
  • 1 Baking Sheet
  • 1 Spatula
  • Oven

Ingredients

  • 1 pound Brussels Sprouts trimmed and halved
  • 4 slices Bacon cut into 1-inch strips
  • 1 teaspoon Grapeseed Oil
  • ¼ teaspoon Salt
  • ⅛ teaspoon Black Pepper
  • ⅛ teaspoon Garlic Powder
  • 2 tablespoons Balsamic Glaze

Instructions

  • Preheat your oven to 400° F.
  • Cut the ends off of the Brussels sprouts and cut in half. Place the Brussels sprouts and bacon on a baking sheet. Drizzle with grapeseed oil, then season with salt, pepper, and garlic powder.
  • Toss together until well-coated, spreading out the Brussels sprouts and bacon in a single layer.
  • Roast for 20-25 minutes, or until the sprouts are crispy and the bacon is cooked through, stirring halfway.
  • Remove from the oven and drizzle with balsamic glaze before serving. Enjoy warm

Notes

  • Crispiness – To ensure crispy Brussels sprouts, don’t overcrowd the pan—airflow is key for even browning.
  • Spicy – If you want a spicier kick, add a pinch of red pepper flakes before roasting or even a little hot honey.
  • Bacon – Feel free to use turkey or vegan bacon options to make this dish fit your diet.
  • Caramelization – For extra caramelization, toss a tablespoon of brown sugar on the sprouts before baking making sure to evenly coat them.
  • Use High-Quality Balsamic Glaze – A thicker, high-quality balsamic glaze will add a richer flavor and cling to the Brussels sprouts better.
  • Make Your Own Balsamic Glaze – You can also make your own glaze by simmering balsamic vinegar until it reduces by half for a more intense flavor.
  • Add a Fresh Garnish – For a burst of color and brightness, sprinkle chopped fresh herbs like parsley or thyme over the dish just before serving. This will enhance the overall flavor and add a touch of freshness to balance the richness of the bacon.

Nutrition

Serving: 0.5cup | Calories: 162kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 319mg | Potassium: 487mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 864IU | Vitamin C: 96mg | Calcium: 49mg | Iron: 2mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Cucumber Tomato Onion Salad

Published on: July 29, 2024 Updated on: January 11, 2020 by Katie Leave a Comment

Glass bowl filled with Cucumber tomato onion salad .

This delicious Cucumber Tomato Onion Salad comes together in minutes and marinates in a homemade balsamic vinaigrette dressing. This is the perfect fresh side dish to serve alongside just about any protein or to eat by itself.

Plate filled with sliced chicken, veggie salad on a blue and white checkered napkin with a bowl of veggie salad in the background.

I love the combination of tomato, cucumbers, and onions. When I have an abundance of cucumbers and tomatoes or simply craving a crunchy and refreshing salad I will make a big batch of my Tomato Cucumber Onion Salad tossed with a homemade balsamic dressing. This vibrant and refreshing salad not only boasts a delightful mix of colors and textures but also offers a plethora of health benefits.

Whether you’re seeking a quick side dish for your next meal or aiming to incorporate more fresh vegetables into your diet, this simple yet flavorful salad is the perfect choice. With its impressive nutritional profile, ease of preparation, and versatility in pairing with various dishes, the Cucumber Tomato Onion Salad is a must-have recipe for every cook. I mostly find myself making this simple salad during the summer months when I just want something cold. I like to pair this salad with my grilled lemon chicken, air fryer pork tenderloin, or my grilled chicken strips. If you love all the vegetables, I hope you’ll give this recipe a try.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why this Recipe Works

Health Benefits – Tomato Cucumber Onion Salad is packed with vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants. Tomatoes are rich in vitamins C and K, potassium, and lycopene, which is known for its cancer-fighting properties. Cucumbers provide hydration and are a good source of vitamin K, while onions offer vitamins B and C and have anti-inflammatory properties. This salad is a low-calorie option that can support overall health and well-being.

Versatility and Pairing – Tomato Cucumber Onion Salad is highly versatile and can be paired with a wide variety of dishes. It complements grilled meats, seafood, and even vegetarian mains. It can also be customized to suit different taste preferences by adding ingredients like feta cheese, olives, herbs, or avocados. Its refreshing taste and texture make it a great side dish for barbecues, picnics, or everyday meals.

Simplicity and Quick Preparation – This salad is incredibly easy to make and requires minimal ingredients and preparation time. With just tomatoes, cucumbers, onions, a bit of seasoning, and perhaps a drizzle of olive oil and vinegar, you can have a fresh and flavorful dish ready in minutes. It’s perfect for those who need a quick meal solution without compromising on taste or nutritional value.

Ingredients

Ingredients on marble countertop: cucumber, tomatoes, red onion, salt, pepper, Italian seasoning, garlic, and balsamic vinegar.
  • Tomatoes – I like to use firmer plum tomatoes that I’ll chop into bite-size pieces.
  • Cucumbers – One cucumber is all you need to make this delicious salad. I like to peel them but you can keep the peels on to save time if you wish.
  • Onion – I prefer to use a red onion as they are sweeter and not as pungent.
  • Oil – A high quality olive oil is what you’ll need for the base of the dressing.
  • Vinegar – Just like oil you want to find the highest quality of balsamic vinegar.
  • Spices – I use a blend of salt, pepper, and Italian seasoning to add into the dressing.
  • Garlic – One fresh clove of garlic put through a press works perfect for this recipe.

Directions

Glass bowl with dressing and a whisk on a cutting board.

First, to make the dressing you will need a small bowl. Add all the ingredients for the dressing, whisk until incorporated, and place to the side.

Glass bowl with cucumbers, tomatoes, onions, and a bowl of brown dressing in the background.

Next, cut the tomatoes into 1-inch chunks, peel the cucumber and cut into 1-inch chunks. Next, thinly slice the red onion. Place all the vegetables in a large bowl.

Glass bowl with chopped tomatoes, onions, and cucumbers with dressing.

Pour the dressing on top, mix well, and chill for 15-30 minutes.

FAQs

Plate with veggie salad and grilled chicken.
How can I keep the salad from getting too watery?

To prevent the salad from becoming too watery, you can deseed the tomatoes and cucumbers before chopping them. Additionally, lightly salting the cucumbers and letting them sit for a few minutes before draining can help reduce excess moisture.

Can I make the salad in advance?

Yes, you can prepare the ingredients ahead of time, but it’s best to combine them and add the dressing just before serving to maintain freshness and texture. If you need to store the salad, keep it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to one day.

What variations can I try with this salad?

There are many variations you can experiment with. Add ingredients like feta cheese, olives, avocados, bell peppers, or even chickpeas for extra flavor and texture. You can also try different dressings, such as a balsamic vinaigrette or a yogurt-based dressing.

Is this salad suitable for special diets?

Tomato Cucumber Onion Salad is naturally gluten-free, dairy-free, and vegan, making it suitable for a wide range of dietary preferences and restrictions. It’s also low in calories and can fit well into most healthy eating plans.

Recipe Tips & Tricks

Glass bowl with cucumbers, tomatoes, onions mixed together with fresh produce next to it.

Here are a few of my favorite tips and tricks whenever I make Tomato Cucumber Onion Salad.

  • Uniform Slicing – Slice the vegetables uniformly for a consistent texture and presentation. Use a mandolin slicer for even slices if you have one.
  • Add Optional Ingredients – For added texture and flavor, consider adding crumbled feta cheese, sliced olives, or diced bell peppers.
  • Let it Marinate – Let the salad sit for about 15-20 minutes after dressing to allow the flavors to meld together.
  • Balsamic Dressing – Don’t have time? No worries, use store bought balsamic dressing.
  • Serve Chilled – This salad is best served chilled. Refrigerate it for a short time before serving, but not too long, as the tomatoes can become mealy.

Salad Side Dishes

  • Glass bowl filled with Cucumber tomato onion salad .
    Cucumber Tomato Onion Salad
  • Glass bowl filled with tortellini salad resting on a white cloth with blue stripes.
    Pesto Tortellini Salad
  • Glass bowl filled with cucumbers, tomatoes, olives, onions, and feta with cucumbers and tomatoes on the left corner.
    Greek Cucumber Salad
  • Two white bowls filled with salad and forks and veggies next to it.
    House Salad

If you make this Cucumber Tomato Salad recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

Glass bowl filled with Cucumber tomato onion salad .

Cucumber Tomato Onion Salad

This delicious Cucumber Tomato Onion Salad comes together in minutes and marinates in a homemade balsamic vinaigrette dressing. This is the perfect fresh side dish to serve alongside just about any protein or to eat by itself.
5 from 1 vote
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Salad
Cuisine: American
Diet: Gluten Free, Low Lactose
Prep Time: 5 minutes minutes
Refrigerating Time: 30 minutes minutes
Total Time: 35 minutes minutes
Servings: 4
Calories: 125kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • 1 Cutting Board
  • 1 Knife
  • 1 Peeler
  • 1 Whisk
  • 1 Large Bowl
  • 1 Small Bowl

Ingredients

Ingredients for the Dressing: 

  • 3 tablespoons Extra-virgin olive oil
  • 3 tablespoons Balsamic vinegar
  • 1 clove Garlic pressed
  • ¼ teaspoon Salt
  • ⅛ teaspoon Black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon Italian seasoning

Ingredients for the Salad:

  • 3 Plum Tomatoes chopped
  • 1 Cucumber peeled and chopped
  • ¼ red onion thinly sliced

Instructions

  • In a bowl add all the ingredients for the dressing, mix well, and place to the side.
  • Next, cut the tomatoes into 1-inch chunks, peel the cucumber and cut into 1-inch chunks. Next, thinly slice the red onion. Place all the vegetables in a large bowl. Pour the dressing on top, mix well, and chill for 15-30 minutes.

Notes

  • Uniform Slicing – Slice the vegetables uniformly for a consistent texture and presentation. Use a mandolin slicer for even slices if you have one.
  • Add Optional Ingredients – For added texture and flavor, consider adding crumbled feta cheese, sliced olives, or diced bell peppers.
  • Let it Marinate – Let the salad sit for about 15-20 minutes after dressing to allow the flavors to meld together.
  • Serve Chilled – This salad is best served chilled. Refrigerate it for a short time before serving, but not too long, as the tomatoes can become mealy.
  • Balsamic Dressing – Don’t have time? No worries, use store bought balsamic dressing.

Nutrition

Calories: 125kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 153mg | Potassium: 243mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 446IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 26mg | Iron: 1mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Air Fryer Corn on the Cob

Published on: June 10, 2024 Updated on: June 10, 2024 by Katie Leave a Comment

Black Air Fryer basket with 6 corn on the cobs inside the basket.

My Air Fryer Corn on the Cob recipe is made in under 20 minutes and takes just 2 ingredients. If you are looking for an easy seasonal side dish give this cooking method a try.

Corn on the cob is a classic side dish that graces many dinner tables during summer barbecues and family gatherings. But what if I told you there’s a way to take this beloved dish to the next level? Enter the air fryer – a kitchen gadget that has been revolutionizing the way we cook. Don’t get me wrong, I love to cook my corn on the cob in the slow cooker when I’m entertaining or even make my Instant Pot corn on the cob during a busy weeknight. If I’m cooking on the grill I’ll grill corn on the cob to make my bacon ranch corn on the cob. But If I’m craving a little bit of crispiness and not grilling I will pull out the air fryer and make my air fried version.

I know what you are thinking, no way can you air fry corn on the cob, but you can. It comes out perfect every time too! If you are new to air frying or simply want to switch things up I hope you read further and learn how to make the most perfect corn in under 20 minutes.

Table of contents

  • Why You Should Make This Recipe
  • Ingredients
  • Directions
  • FAQS
  • How to Pick Corn on the Cob
  • Tips and Tricks
  • Corn Recipes

Why You Should Make This Recipe

Perfectly Cooked Corn: The air fryer ensures that your corn on the cob is cooked to perfection every time. It achieves a wonderful balance of tender kernels with a slightly crispy exterior that’s hard to replicate with other cooking methods.

Effortless Preparation: Say goodbye to boiling large pots of water or dealing with messy grill setups. The air fryer simplifies the cooking process. It’s a breeze to prep and cook corn on the cob with minimal fuss.

Versatile Flavors: The air fryer allows you to experiment with a variety of seasonings and coatings for your corn. Whether you prefer classic butter and salt, a smoky barbecue rub, or a zesty garlic and herb blend, you can easily customize the flavors to suit your taste.

Ingredients

  • Corn on the Cob – Fresh ears of corn on the cob that have been shucked and hairs removed.
  • Butter – I like to use salted butter so that I don’t have to salt the corn; however, unsalted butter works. If you are vegan and/or have a dairy allergy you can also use a plant based butter.
  • Seasonings – I like to stick with the classic of just salt, but there are many options out there. Try a sprinkle of paprika, garlic powder, or even fresh parsley.

Directions

First, preheat the air fryer to 400°F (200°C). This ensures that your corn on the cob cooks evenly and develops that irresistible crispiness.

Remove the husks and silk from the corn. If desired, brush each ear with melted butter or olive oil and season with salt, pepper, and your preferred seasonings.

Place the prepared corn in the air fryer basket, making sure they’re not overcrowded. You may need to cook them in batches. Cook for 12-15 minutes, turning the corn halfway through the cooking time. The exact time may vary depending on the size of your corn and your air fryer model.

6 cooked corn on the cobs in a black air fryer basket with slices of butter on the side

Once the corn is golden brown and tender, remove it from the air fryer and top with a pat of butter. Serve immediately and enjoy.

FAQS

Can I cook frozen corn on the cob in the air fryer?

Yes, you can! Simply adjust the cooking time to about 20-25 minutes, turning the corn halfway through.

What other seasonings can I try on my air fryer corn?

Get creative! Try cajun seasoning, parmesan cheese, or even a drizzle of honey and lime for a unique twist.

Can I wrap the corn in foil when air frying?

While you can wrap the corn in foil, it won’t achieve the same crispy texture. It’s best to cook them directly in the air fryer basket.

How to Pick Corn on the Cob

When picking corn on the cob, you want to select the freshest and most flavorful ears. Here are some bullet points to help you choose the best corn:

  • Look for Plump Kernels: Examine the cob for plump, evenly spaced kernels. They should be full from the top to the bottom of the ear.
  • Avoid Gaps or Missing Kernels: Corn with gaps or missing kernels may be less mature and could lack sweetness.
  • Check the Husk: The husk should be bright green and slightly damp to the touch. Dry or brown husks may indicate older or overripe corn.
  • Feel the Weight: Pick up the corn and feel its weight. It should feel heavy for its size, indicating that it’s well-filled with kernels.
  • Inspect the Silk: Look at the silk (the fine threads at the top of the ear). It should be light golden or pale yellow, not dark brown. Dark silk can be a sign of older corn.
  • Peek at the Tip: Gently pull back a small section of the husk at the top to check the kernels. They should be plump, milky, and tightly packed. If the kernels are small and underdeveloped, the corn may not be as sweet.
  • Consider the Season: Corn is typically at its peak during the late summer months. If you’re buying corn outside of this period, inquire about its freshness.
  • Smell It: While this isn’t foolproof, some people find that fresh corn has a slightly sweet, earthy aroma. Give it a sniff, but don’t rely solely on this method.
  • Avoid Insects: Check for any signs of insect damage, such as holes or brown spots. These can indicate pest infestations.
  • Select Uniform Ears: If you’re buying multiple ears, try to choose ones that are similar in size. This ensures even cooking when preparing them together.

By following these tips, you’ll be better equipped to pick the tastiest and freshest corn on the cob for your next meal.

Tips and Tricks

5 corn on the cobs on a long white dish with a pad of butter on top with slices of butter on the side

Here are a few of my favorite tips and tricks for making Air Fryer Corn on the Cob.

  • Use fresh corn for the best results.
  • If you prefer to avoid butter or oil, you can skip the brushing step, and the corn will still turn out delicious.
  • Experiment with different cooking times to achieve your preferred level of doneness.

Air fryer corn on the cob is a game-changer for your next meal. It’s easy, flavorful, and guaranteed to impress your family and friends. So, fire up your air fryer, grab some fresh corn, and enjoy this delightful twist on a classic side dish. Your taste buds will thank you!

Corn Recipes

  • White square bowl filled with corn, cheese, and herbs.
    Mexican Street Corn Salad
  • Black Bean Corn Tomato Salad
  • Stovetop Creamed Corn
    Stovetop Creamed Corn
  • Fresh Corn Saute with Green Onions and Red Peppers
    Fresh Corn Saute with Green Onions and Red Peppers

If you make this recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

Black Air Fryer basket with 6 corn on the cobs inside the basket.

Air Fryer Corn on the Cob

My Air Fryer Corn on the Cob recipe is made in under 20 minutes and takes just 2 ingredients. If you are looking for an easy seasonal side dish give this cooking method a try.
No ratings yet
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: American
Diet: Gluten Free
Prep Time: 5 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 15 minutes minutes
Total Time: 20 minutes minutes
Servings: 6
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • Air Fryer
  • Tongs

Ingredients

  • 6 ears Fresh corn on the cob
  • 2 tablespoons Olive Oil optional
  • Salt and Pepper to taste
  • 4 teaspoons Butter

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer to 400°F (200°C). This ensures that your corn on the cob cooks evenly and develops that irresistible crispiness.
  • Remove the husks and silk from the corn. If desired, brush each ear with melted butter or olive oil and season with salt, pepper, and your preferred seasonings.
  • Place the prepared corn in the air fryer basket, making sure they’re not overcrowded. You may need to cook them in batches. Cook for 12-15 minutes, turning the corn halfway through the cooking time. The exact time may vary depending on the size of your corn and your air fryer model.
  • Once the corn is golden brown and tender, remove it from the air fryer and top with a pat of butter. Serve immediately and enjoy.

Notes

  • Fresh Corn – Use fresh corn for the best results.
  • No Oil – If you prefer to avoid butter or oil, you can skip the brushing step, and the corn will still turn out delicious.
  • Cooking Times – Experiment with different cooking times to achieve your preferred level of doneness. Remember, all Air Fryers are not made the same.
  • Seasonings – Garnish with seasonings like powder ranch dressing, paprika, season salt, garlic salt, Parmesan cheese, or even  fresh herbs.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Banana Bread Muffins with Almond Flour

Published on: May 13, 2024 Updated on: May 13, 2024 by Katie Leave a Comment

muffins on a marble countertop sitting on top of their wrappers.

Banana bread muffins with almond flour are a great gluten free muffin alternative. They are flavorful, moist, and take only 35 minutes to make from start to finish. These muffins are also a great way to use up the few over-ripe bananas that are laying around.

Multiple muffins out of their wrappers on a marble countertop.

My banana bread muffins with almond flour is a fusion of wholesome ingredients and indulgent flavors that promises to elevate your baking experience. Whether you’re a seasoned baker looking for a gluten-free twist or a novice eager to impress with a healthier treat, these banana bread muffins offer a perfect balance of simplicity and sophistication. I love to serve these to my family for a quick breakfast on the go or an after school snack. I know they are packed full of flavor and are on the healthier side which makes me feel good about serving them up!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why this Recipe Works

Nutrient-Rich Alternative: Almond flour introduces a dose of healthy fats, protein, and fiber into your muffins, making them a nutritious snack or breakfast option.

Gluten-Free Delight: Say goodbye to gluten worries without sacrificing flavor or texture. These muffins cater to gluten-sensitive individuals, ensuring everyone can indulge in their irresistible taste.

Versatility and Customization: Experiment with add-ins like chocolate chips, nuts, or dried fruits to personalize your muffins. The recipe allows for creativity, making each batch a delightful surprise.

Ingredients

Ingredients on counter: brown sugar, baking powder, salt, baking soda, cinnamon, almond flour, eggs, ripe bananas, coconut oil, and vanilla extract.
  • Almond Flour – I like to use a 1:1 ratio almond flour so I don’t have to figure out specific measurements. Make sure you read your almond flour packaging before making this recipe.
  • Baking powder and baking soda – This helps rise and level out the muffins.
  • Ground cinnamon – This spice will give a nice warmth to your muffins.
  • Bananas – I like to use 3 spotted and/or browned bananas for optimal flavor. Make sure you mash it before you add it to the batter.
  • Salt – You will need salt to cut the flour/baking soda and powder taste. A little goes a long way to help balance flavors.
  • Light brown sugar – I like to use brown sugar because it gives you a deeper flavor.
  • Coconut oil – You will need to melt the coconut oil in order to mix it into the batter.
  • Eggs – 2 eggs are needed in order to help bind the flour and other ingredients together.
  • Vanilla extract – The vanilla will help give additional flavors to the muffins.

How to Make Banana Chocolate Chip Muffins

Hand pouring almond flour into a yellow KitchenAid stand mixer.

Preheat your oven to 350°F (175°C) and line a muffin tin with paper liners or grease it lightly.

In a stand mixer, mash the ripe bananas until smooth. Add brown sugar, eggs, melted coconut oil, and vanilla extract, and mix until thoroughly combined.

Then add to the stand mixer the almond flour, baking powder, baking soda, salt, and cinnamon until well combined.

Yellow stand mixer with flat paddle and dough in bowl.

This is what the batter should look like. Be careful not to overmix. *If desired, fold in your choice of add-ins such as chopped nuts, chocolate chips, or dried fruits.

Divide the batter evenly among the prepared muffin cups, filling each about ¾ full and smooth out the muffins so they round nicely.

12 count muffin tray filled with batter inside a blue oven.

Bake in the preheated oven for 20-25 minutes, or until the tops are golden brown and a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean.

Allow the muffins to cool in the tin for 5 minutes, then transfer them to a wire rack to cool completely.

FAQs

Can I use frozen bananas for this recipe?

Yes, frozen bananas work well. I always freeze my brown bananas so I can make muffins whenever my heart desires. Thaw and mash them before incorporating into the batter.

Can I substitute almond flour with other flours?

While almond flour contributes to the unique texture and flavor of these muffins, you can experiment with other gluten-free flours like coconut flour or oat flour. However, the results may vary, so adjustments might be needed.

Is almond meal the same as almond flour?

Almond meal and almond flour are both derived from ground almonds, but they differ in texture and sometimes in how the almonds are processed. Almond flour is typically finer and made from blanched almonds, while almond meal is coarser and often includes almond skins.

Can I make these muffins vegan?

Absolutely! Substitute eggs with flax or chia eggs, and use dairy-free alternatives like almond milk or coconut oil. Adjustments might be required for consistency, so feel free to experiment until you find the perfect vegan adaptation.

How do I store leftover muffins?

Store them in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 2 days or in the refrigerator for a longer shelf life.

Can I add nuts or other mix-ins to the batter?

Certainly! Chopped nuts such as walnuts or pecans work best. You can also add shredded coconut, or dried fruits like cranberries, blueberries, or raisins also make excellent additions for added texture and flavor.

Can I make these muffins ahead of time and freeze them?

Yes, these muffins freeze well. Allow them to cool completely before storing in a freezer-friendly container for up to 2-3 months.

Recipe Tips and Tricks

Muffin sitting on a green wrapper with more muffins in the background.

Here are a few of my favorite tips and tricks when making these healthy banana chocolate chip muffins.

  • Perfectly Ripe Bananas: Use overripe bananas for maximum sweetness and flavor. The riper, the better!
  • Gentle Mixing: Avoid over mixing the batter to prevent dense muffins. Mix until just combined to maintain a light and fluffy texture.
  • Chocolate Chip Distribution: If you decided to use chocolate chips (which I highly suggest, toss chocolate chips in a bit of flour before folding them into the batter to prevent sinking during baking, ensuring even distribution.
  • Muffin Liners: Use quality liners or grease the muffin tin well to prevent sticking and make for easy removal.
  • Temperature Check: Invest in an oven thermometer to ensure accurate baking temperatures, as ovens can vary, and precise heat is crucial for the perfect muffin texture.

If you make this banana bread muffin recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

muffins on a marble countertop sitting on top of their wrappers.

Banana Bread Muffins with Almond Flour

Banana bread muffins with almond flour are a great gluten free muffin alternative. They are flavorful, moist, and take only 35 minutes to make from start to finish. These muffins are also a great way to use up the few over-ripe bananas that are laying around.
5 from 1 vote
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Dessert, Snack
Cuisine: American
Diet: Gluten Free
Prep Time: 10 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 25 minutes minutes
Total Time: 35 minutes minutes
Servings: 12
Calories: 208kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • Measuring Spoons
  • Measuring Cups
  • Silicone Spatula
  • KitchenAid Stand Mixer
  • Muffin Tin
  • Muffin Liners

Ingredients

  • 2 cups Almond Flour
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • 3 ripe bananas mashed
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • ⅓ cup light brown sugar
  • ¼ cup melted coconut oil
  • 2 large eggs
  • 2 teaspoons pure vanilla extract

Instructions

  • Preheat your oven to 350°F (175°C) and line a muffin tin with paper liners or grease it lightly.
  • In a stand mixer, mash the ripe bananas until smooth. Add the brown sugar, eggs, melted coconut oil, and vanilla extract, and mix until thoroughly combined.
  • Then add the almond flour, baking powder, baking soda, salt, and cinnamon and mix until just combined.
  • Divide the batter evenly among the prepared muffin cups, filling each about ¾ full.
  • Bake in the preheated oven for 20-25 minutes, or until the tops are golden brown and a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean.
  • Allow the muffins to cool in the tin for 5 minutes, then transfer them to a wire rack to cool completely.

Notes

  • Mix-ins – If desired, fold in your choice of add-ins such as chopped nuts, chocolate chips, or dried fruits right before you are about to fully mix in all the ingredients in step 3.
  • Over Ripe Bananas: Use overripe bananas for maximum sweetness and flavor. The riper, the better!
  • Temperature Check: Invest in an oven thermometer to ensure accurate baking temperatures, as ovens can vary, and precise heat is crucial for the perfect muffin texture.
  • Muffin Liners: Use quality liners or grease the muffin tin well to prevent sticking and make for easy removal.
  • Gentle Mixing: Avoid overmixing the batter to prevent dense muffins. Mix until just combined to maintain a light and fluffy texture.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 208kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 28mg | Sodium: 211mg | Potassium: 178mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 57IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 63mg | Iron: 2mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Cheesy Scalloped Potatoes

Published on: March 6, 2024 Updated on: March 6, 2024 by Katie Leave a Comment

White plate filled with sliced ham and scalloped potatoes.

Indulge in the creamy goodness of Cheesy Scalloped Potatoes, a delectable side dish that’s quick to whip up (in about an hours time) made with fresh ingredients, perfect for elevating any meal.

Cheesy Scalloped Potatoes with sliced ham on a white dish sitting on top of a plaid blue and white kitchen towel.

There’s something magical about the creamy goodness and rich flavors of Cheesy Scalloped Potatoes. I grew up in a house that did not eat any form of cheesy potatoes. I was not introduced to au gratin or scalloped potatoes until I was an adult and cooking on my own. I started with the box variety (which I will admit I still love to this day) and then worked my way up to making homemade scalloped potatoes. When I have the time, I’ll make the scalloped potatoes from scratch. When I’m in a pinch I’ll make the boxed version.

This classic side dish, a staple at family gatherings and holiday feasts, never fails to steal the spotlight on any table. Imagine thinly sliced potatoes nestled between layers of velvety cheese sauce, baked to golden perfection. It’s a dish that marries simplicity and indulgence, making it a favorite for both seasoned home cooks and kitchen novices alike.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why this Recipe Works

Quick and Easy: With simple steps and readily available ingredients, you can have these Cheesy Scalloped Potatoes ready to serve in under an hour, saving you time without compromising on flavor.

Versatile Side Dish: Whether accompanying a hearty roast, grilled chicken, or serving as a vegetarian main course, these potatoes add a touch of elegance and irresistible cheesiness to any meal.

Crowd-Pleaser: My scalloped potatoes are loved by both adults and kids alike, and because of that this dish never fails to impress. Its creamy texture and cheesy goodness will have everyone reaching for seconds!

Ingredients

Ingredients for cheesy scalloped potatoes with milk, flour, cheddar cheese, heavy cream, garlic powder, salt, butter, potatoes, onion, black pepper, chives, and parsely.
  • Potatoes – I like to use russet potatoes. I always peel them as I don’t like how stringy they become when they are not peeled.
  • Butter – Butter is needed for the onions and also to make the roux for the cheese sauce.
  • Seasonings – I like to use a mix of garlic powder, salt, dried chives, parsley, and black pepper.
  • Flour – A little flour is needed to make the roux for the cheese sauce.
  • Heavy Cream – I like to use more heavy cream than traditional milk to give the potatoes an extra level of creaminess.
  • Milk – A little milk will help thin out the heavy cream and cheese sauce.
  • Cheese – I like to use a sharp white cheddar; however, any form of cheddar cheese will work. Remember, if you use sharp cheddar the potatoes will have a little bite to them.

Directions

Onions being sautéed in a saucepan on top of the stove top.

First, Melt 2 tablespoons of butter in a skillet and add the diced onions. Begin cooking on low heat for 15 minutes with a lid on the skillet. Make sure to stir every few minutes. Onions should be translucent and start to become caramelized with a light brown color.

Ingredients for onions with flour being added to the saucepan on top of the stove top.
Onion being cooked in the saucepan on the stovetop with a green spatula.

While the onions caramelize you need to preheat the oven to 400 degree Fahrenheit.

In the same skillet, melt the additional butter over medium heat. Then sprinkle on the flour and mix until a thick paste forms, stirring for about 1 minute. Then reduce the heat to low.

Cream sauce getting mixed with a green spatula in a saucepan on the stovetop.
Heavy cream being added to the cream sauce in the saucepan on top of the stove top with a green spatula.

Sprinkle the dried chives, parsley, garlic, salt, and pepper into the flour roux. Then begin to whisk in the milk. Make sure to whisk the milk slowly into the roux until it’s combined. Once all the milk is whisked in add in the heavy cream. Whisk until smooth and then remove off the heat.

Green cutting board with white shredded cheddar cheese.
Shredded cheese with cream sauce in a saucepan on the stove top being mixed with a green spatula.

Shred the white cheddar cheese using a cheese grater. Mix in 8 ounces of the cheese into the cream sauce and set to the side.

Marble countertop with a white casserole dish filled with slice potatoes with potato slicer sitting on the counter.

Peel the russet Idaho potatoes, and slice into ⅛ inch pieces.

Marble countertop with a white casserole dish filled with sliced potatoes getting filled with cream sauce with green spatula.

Spray a large 9 x 13 baking dish with non-stick cooking spray. Pour a little bit of the sauce on the bottom of the baking dish. Then, layer half the potatoes in baking dish, pour half the sauce over the potatoes.

Marble countertop with a white casserole dish filled with sliced potatoes.
Marble countertop with a white casserole dish filled with a cream sauce and shredded cheese.

Then repeat this step with the remaining potatoes and remainder of the cheese sauce. Make sure to smooth all the sauce over the top of the potatoes so they are completely covered. Top with the remaining 4 ounces of shredded cheese.

Cover the baking dish with aluminum foil and bake for 45 minutes. During the last 5 minutes of baking remove the foil so the cheese can get golden in color.

White rectangular casserole dish with a cheesy casserole baked in it sitting on a blue and white checkered cloth and marble countertop.

Carefully remove from the oven, let rest for 10 minutes and serve.

FAQs

Side view of Cheesy Scalloped Potatoes with sliced ham on a white dish sitting on top of a plaid blue and white kitchen towel.
Can I make Scalloped Potatoes ahead of time?

Yes, you can prepare the potato casserole dish ahead of time, because potatoes turn brown you will need to cook the potatoes first, let them cool and then place in the refrigerate. Once your ready to cook you’ll reheat it in the oven before serving for a stress-free meal prep option.

What type of potatoes should I use?

Russet or Yukon Gold potatoes work best for this recipe due to their creamy texture when cooked.

Can I use different types of cheese?

Yes, you can experiment with your favorite cheeses like a mix of cheddar, gruyere, provolone, and even a touch of mozzarella to customize the flavor profile according to your preference.

How can I make this dish healthier?

You can opt for low-fat cheese and substitute part of the heavy cream with chicken or vegetable broth for a lighter version. Just know if you remove the heavy cream and substitute for broth the potatoes will not be as creamy.

Can I freeze leftovers?

While it’s best enjoyed fresh, you can freeze leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 months. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight before reheating.

Recipe Tips and Tricks

Spoonful of Cheesy Scalloped Potatoes from the white casserole dish.
  • Thin Slices – If you don’t have a mandolin, pull out your knife skills! As long as your knife is sharp you should be able to make precise, even cuts.
  • Even Cuts – Even cuts are the key to the potatoes cooking evenly and all being done at the same exact time.
  • Layering Technique – To ensure even distribution of cheese sauce, layer the potatoes and cheese mixture alternately. This guarantees that every slice is infused with the cheesy sauce.
  • Fresh Herbs – Elevate the flavor profile by adding fresh herbs like thyme or rosemary to the cheese sauce. The aromatic infusion complements the potatoes beautifully.
  • Cheese – Incorporate a sharp cheese in your blend to add a flavorful kick. Sharp cheddar or Gruyère works wonders, providing a depth of taste that elevates the entire dish.
  • Rest and Set – Allow the dish to rest for a few minutes after baking. This not only helps the flavors meld but also makes it easier to achieve picture-perfect slices when serving.

What to serve with Scalloped Potatoes

If you are wondering what to serve with scalloped potatoes I’m here to help solve your problem. Scalloped potatoes go with almost everything (minus pasta) from grilled chicken to a pork tenderloin. Here are a few of my favorite dishes that compliment the potatoes well.

  • oval baking dish with a whole chicken and vegetables.
    Dutch Oven Whole Chicken
  • Wood cutting board with slices of ham.
    Slow Cooker Ham (with apple sauce)
  • Round beef on a wooden cutting board with slices off of it.
    Beef Bottom Round Roast
  • White plate with four chicken strips
    Chicken Tenders in Oven

If you make this cheesy scalloped potatoes recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

White plate filled with sliced ham and scalloped potatoes.

Cheesy Scalloped Potatoes

Indulge in the creamy goodness of Cheesy Scalloped Potatoes, a delectable side dish that's quick to whip up (in about an hours time) made with fresh ingredients, perfect for elevating any meal.
5 from 1 vote
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: American
Diet: Low Salt
Prep Time: 20 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 45 minutes minutes
Resting Time: 10 minutes minutes
Total Time: 1 hour hour 15 minutes minutes
Servings: 8
Calories: 495kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • Measuring Spoons
  • Measuring Cups
  • Skillet
  • Silicone Spoon
  • Hand-Held Mandolin Slicer
  • 9 x 13 Baking Dish
  • Oven
  • Stove Top

Ingredients

  • 6 Yukon Russet Potatoes
  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter divided
  • 1 onion diced
  • 2 tablespoons all purpose flour
  • 1 teaspoon dried chives
  • 1 teaspoon dried parsley
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • 2 cups 2% milk
  • 1 cup Heavy Cream
  • 12 ounces white cheddar cheese shredded and divided

Instructions

  • Melt 2 tablespoons of butter in a skillet and add the diced onions. Begin cooking on low heat for 15 minutes with a lid on the skillet. Make sure to stir every few minutes. Onions should be translucent and start to become caramelized with a light brown color.
  • Preheat the oven to 400 degree Fahrenheit.
  • In the same skillet, melt the additional butter over medium heat. Then sprinkle on the flour and mix until a thick paste forms, stirring for about 1 minute. Then reduce the heat to low.
  • Sprinkle the dried chives, parsley, garlic, salt, and pepper into the flour roux. Then begin to whisk in the milk. Make sure to whisk the milk slowly into the roux until it's combined. Once all the milk is whisked in add in the heavy cream. Whisk until smooth and then remove off the heat.
  • Shred the white cheddar cheese using a cheese grater. Mix in 8 ounces of the cheese into the cream sauce and set to the side.
  • Peel the russet Idaho potatoes, and slice into ⅛ inch pieces.
  • Spray a large 9 x 13 baking dish with non-stick cooking spray. Pour a little bit of the sauce on the bottom of the baking dish. Then, layer half the potatoes in baking dish, pour half the sauce over the potatoes. Then repeat this step with the remaining potatoes and remainder of the cheese sauce. Make sure to smooth all the sauce over the top of the potatoes so they are completely covered. Top with the remaining 4 ounces of shredded cheese.
  • Cover the baking dish with aluminum foil and bake for 45 minutes. During the last 5 minutes of baking remove the foil so the cheese can get golden in color. Carefully remove from the oven, let rest for 10 minutes and serve.

Notes

  • Thin Slices – If you don’t have a mandolin, pull out your knife skills! As long as your knife is sharp you should be able to make precise, even cuts.
  • Even Cuts – Even cuts are the key to the potatoes cooking evenly and all being done at the same exact time.
  • Layering Technique – To ensure even distribution of cheese sauce, layer the potatoes and cheese mixture alternately. This guarantees that every slice is infused with the cheesy sauce.
  • Fresh Herbs – Elevate the flavor profile by adding fresh herbs like thyme or rosemary to the cheese sauce. The aromatic infusion complements the potatoes beautifully.
  • Cheese – Incorporate a sharp cheese in your blend to add a flavorful kick. Sharp cheddar or Gruyère works wonders, providing a depth of taste that elevates the entire dish.
  • Rest and Set – Allow the dish to rest for a few minutes after baking. This not only helps the flavors meld but also makes it easier to achieve picture-perfect slices when serving.

Nutrition

Serving: 0.5c | Calories: 495kcal | Carbohydrates: 37g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 19g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 96mg | Sodium: 469mg | Potassium: 854mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 1522IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 423mg | Iron: 2mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Chocolate Cake with Cream Cheese Frosting

Published on: February 21, 2024 Updated on: January 17, 2022 by Katie 3 Comments

A slice of chocolate cake on a white plate with a two layer cake in the background.

My Chocolate Cake with Cream Cheese Frosting recipe will take your gathering to the next level. Made in 45 minutes, celebrate birthdays, holidays, and special occasions with a soft and spongy cake, rich in chocolate flavor, and topped with luscious cream cheese frosting. 

Slice of Chocolate Cake with Cream Cheese Frosting with entire cake on a marble countertop.

Indulge your senses with the heavenly delight of homemade chocolate cake topped with rich and creamy, cream cheese frosting. This delectable dessert promises to captivate both the hearts and palates of all who taste it. Rich, moist layers of chocolate cake, infused with deep cocoa flavors, harmonize perfectly with the tangy sweetness of the velvety cream cheese frosting, creating a symphony of taste and texture that is simply irresistible.

I’ve been making this cake for years and it’s always a family favorite. The cream cheese frosting balances out the spongy chocolate cake, and even my non-chocolate loving husband loves this cake. This dessert recipe will leave you wanting it for every occasion. Whether you’re celebrating a special occasion or simply craving a decadent treat, this chocolate cake with cream cheese frosting recipe is sure to be a showstopper at any gathering.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Reasons to Make this Recipe

  1. Made With Indulgent Flavor – Chocolate cake is rich and deep in flavor. The combination of cocoa powder with butter, sugar, and milk craft a taste that’s comforting and satisfying.
  2. Perfect for Celebration – Chocolate cake is a classic dessert for all celebrations. Whether it’s for a birthday, holiday, wedding, or even for yourself, it will be enjoyed by all guests. 
  3. Sharing Joy – Bringing a delicious dessert to share with loved ones bring joy. The act of sharing homemade treats can strengthen bonds and create lasting memories.

Ingredients

Chocolate cake with cream cheese frosting ingredients: buttermilk, vanilla extract, oil, water, baking soda, salt, cocoa powder, eggs, flour, granulated sugar, confectioners' sugar, cream cheese, and butter.

For the Cake: 

  • Butter – Unsalted butter is best for this recipe at room temperature.
  • Water – Hot water is used in this recipe as it helps to dissolve the cocoa powder and ‘bloom’ the cocoa to bring out flavor.
  • Oil – Canola oil was used for this recipe.
  • Sugar – The amount of sugar needed for this cake might seem excessive; however, trust me that it’s the correct amount of white granulated sugar. 
  • Cocoa Powder – I used unsweetened cocoa powder for this recipe! 
  • All-Purpose Flour – You will want a good quality all-purpose flour that has been sifted and/or whisked before measuring.
  • Eggs – Eggs at room temperature work best any time you plan to bake.
  • Buttermilk – You will want to use buttermilk for this recipe since it acts as a tenderizer which makes baked goods moist. 
  • Salt – A tiny bit of salt will help balance out the flour and sugar. 
  • Vanilla Extract – This is what gives you the rich taste of the cake. Don’t skimp! 
  • Baking Soda – This is what you need for the cake to rise. Fresh baking soda works best (nothing older than 6 months from opening).

Cake Frosting:

  • Cream Cheese – Offering a tangy twist, it’ll pair well with the chocolate cake!
  • Butter – Unsalted butter is best for this recipe at room temperature.
  • Vanilla Extract – This is what gives you the rich taste of the cake. Don’t skimp! 
  • Confectioners’ Sugar – You’ll want to sift this to remove any lumps that will be formed in the frosting.

How to Make Chocolate Cake

Preheat the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit and then spray three 9-inch round cake pans with non-stick cooking spray and set to the side.

Chocolate cake oil and butter inside a pot with stove top on.

In a saucepan over medium heat, combine the butter, water and canola oil; heat until the butter is melted.

Chocolate cake powder ingredients inside KitchenAid mixing bowl.

In a large KitchenAid stand mixer fitted with a paddle attachment, combine the sugar, cocoa powder, and flour; whisk to blend.

Ingredients being mixed inside a yellow KitchenAid.

Pour the melted butter mixture into the dry ingredients. Mix on low until smooth.

Chocolate cake ingredients being mixed with eggs being added.

Mix in the eggs one at a time, then pour in the buttermilk while the mixer is set to low speed. Add the baking soda, salt and vanilla extract to the batter and mix for 30 seconds or until incorporated.

Chocolate cake batter in four cake pans.

Divide the batter evenly between the prepared pans. Bake for 35-40 minutes or until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.

Cooked chocolate cake with one outside the cake pan and the other inside the cake pan on top of a cooling rack.

Let cool in the pans for 15 minutes. Run a knife around the edge of each cake layer and invert onto a wire cooling rack. Allow the cake layers to cool completely for at least 2 hours before frosting.

How to Make Cream Cheese Frosting

Cream cheese frosting being mixed inside mixer.

Using a KitchenAid Stand Mixer fitted with a paddle attachment, combine the cream cheese and butter in the bowl of an electric mixer. Beat on medium-high speed until well combined and smooth, about 2-3 minutes. Mix in the vanilla extract.

Cream cheese frosting ingredients inside KitchenAid mixer.

Gradually beat in the confectioners’ sugar on low speed until incorporated. Increase the speed and beat until smooth.

Chocolate cake being frosted with cream cheese frosting.

Once the cake has cooled completely, use an offset spatula to frost the cake.

FAQs

Chocolate cake covered with cream cheese frosting on marble counter top.
How many people can I feed with this Chocolate Cake? 

This chocolate cake recipe can feed up to 6-8 people depending on the size slices you cut.

How long is the cake good for?

The cake will be good for up to 5 days in the refrigerator in a sealed container. 

How do I ensure the chocolate cake Is cooked right?

Achieving the perfect spongy texture is easy! To ensure it’s cooked to perfection, follow the recommended baking time while keeping an eye on it towards the end. A toothpick inserted into the center should come out clean with just a few crumbs. Cooking times may vary depending on the size pan that you use. You may need to cook the cake longer if the toothpick when inserted into the cake comes out with batter still on it. This could happen if you have a thicker cake pan. 

Should I store the cream cheese frosting until it is ready for use?

The frosting can be made ahead of time and should be stored in the refrigerator for up to 1 day before using. You will need to remove the frosting from the refrigerator at least an hour before you’re ready to spread on the cake. The frosting will harden in the refrigerator making it challenging to spread onto the cake. 

Tips and Tricks

Slice of chocolate cake with cream cheese frosting on a white plate with blue table runner.

Here are a few of my favorite recipe tips and tricks when making a chocolate cake with cream cheese frosting.

  • Butter – 1 Cup of butter equals 2 sticks.
  • Cocoa Powder – Sift the cocoa powder before mixing to reduce lumps and to create a smoother texture.
  • Cooling – Make sure the cake is completely cooled before frosting. Always place the cooked cake on a wire rack to cool.
  • Frosting – I used an offset spatula to help spread the frosting onto the cake. You can also put the frosting into a piping bag and pipe a design onto the cake.
  • Buttermilk – If you don’t have buttermilk, you can make your own by using 1 cup of milk and 1 tablespoon of lemon juice or vinegar. Let it sit for 5 minutes until it begins to curdle. You will never know it’s not the real deal. 
  • Cake Pans – If you don’t have four 9-inch round cake pans you can also use two 10-inch round cake pans.
  • Layering of Cakes – You can make 2 9-inch round two-layered cakes OR one four layer cake. Totally up to you.

If you make this chocolate cake with cream cheese frosting recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

A slice of chocolate cake on a white plate with a two layer cake in the background.

Chocolate Cake with Cream Cheese Frosting

My Chocolate Cake with Cream Cheese Frosting recipe will take your gathering to the next level. Made in 45 minutes, celebrate birthdays, holidays, and special occasions with a soft and spongy cake, rich in chocolate flavor, and topped with luscious cream cheese frosting. 
No ratings yet
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Diet: Low Salt
Prep Time: 30 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 40 minutes minutes
Cooling Time: 2 hours hours
Total Time: 3 hours hours 10 minutes minutes
Servings: 8
Calories: 1366kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • KitchenAid Stand Mixer
  • Measuring Spoons
  • Measuring Cups
  • Silicone Spatula
  • Stovetop
  • Pot
  • Oven
  • Cake Pans
  • Offset Spatula

Ingredients

For the Cake

  • 1 cup unsalted butter
  • 2 cups water
  • 1 cup canola oil
  • 4 cups sugar
  • 1 cup unsweetened cocoa powder
  • 4 cups all-purpose flour
  • 4 large eggs
  • 1 cup buttermilk
  • 1 tablespoon baking soda
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract

For the Cream Cheese Frosting

  • 8 ounces cream cheese
  • 5 tablespoons unsalted butter at room temperature
  • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
  • 1 cup confectioners’ sugar sifted

Instructions

For the Chocolate Cake

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Spray four 9-inch round cake pans with non-stick cooking spray and set to the side.
  • In a saucepan over medium heat, combine the butter, water and canola oil; heat until the butter is melted.
  • In a large KitchenAid stand mixer fitted with a paddle attachment, combine the sugar, cocoa powder, and flour; whisk to blend. Pour the melted butter mixture into the dry ingredients. Mix on low until smooth.
  • Mix in the eggs one at a time, then pour in the buttermilk while the mixer is set to low speed. Add the baking soda, salt and vanilla extract to the batter and mix for 30 seconds or until incorporated.
  • Divide the batter evenly between the prepared pans. Bake for 35-40 minutes or until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.
  • Let cool in the pans for 15 minutes. Run a knife around the edge of each cake layer and invert onto a wire cooling rack. Allow the cake layers to cool completely for at least 2 hours before frosting.

For the Cream Cheese Frosting

  • Using a KitchenAid Stand Mixer fitted with a paddle attachment, combine the cream cheese and butter in the bowl of an electric mixer. Beat on medium-high speed until well combined and smooth, about 2-3 minutes. Mix in the vanilla extract.
  • Gradually beat in the confectioners’ sugar on low speed until incorporated. Increase the speed and beat until smooth. Frost, using an offset spatula once cake has cooled completely. 

Notes

  • Cake Pans – If you don’t have three 9-inch round cake pans you can also use two 10-inch round cake pans.
  • Layering of Cakes – You can make 2 9-inch round two-layered cakes OR one four layer cake. Totally up to you.
  • Butter – 1 Cup of butter equals 2 sticks.
  • Cocoa Powder – Sift the cocoa powder before mixing to reduce lumps and to create a smoother texture.
  • Cooling – Make sure the cake is completely cooled before frosting. Always place the cooked cake on a wire rack to cool.
  • Frosting – I used an offset spatula to help spread the frosting onto the cake. You can also put the frosting into a piping bag and pipe a design onto the cake.
  • Buttermilk – If you don’t have buttermilk, you can make your own by using 1 cup of milk and 1 tablespoon of lemon juice or vinegar. Let it sit for 5 minutes until it begins to curdle. You will never know it’s not the real deal. 
  •  

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 1366kcal | Carbohydrates: 172g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 73g | Saturated Fat: 29g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 10g | Monounsaturated Fat: 30g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 194mg | Sodium: 720mg | Potassium: 354mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 118g | Vitamin A: 1477IU | Calcium: 110mg | Iron: 5mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Crock Pot Beef Stew

Published on: January 16, 2024 Updated on: January 16, 2024 by Katie Leave a Comment

Two green bowls filled with beef stew with a white and blue checkered cloth underneath the bowls.

Indulge in the ultimate comfort with my Crock Pot beef stew, where tender chunks of beef melt in a rich, savory broth chocked full of vegetables, promising a hearty and delicious meal that practically cooks itself!

Close up photo of the slow cooked beef stew served in two mini green pots.

If you crave hearty comfort food like my family and I do my crock pot beef stew recipe has been a go to when I have busy days and want a comforting dinner at night. This recipe has become a regular in my recipe repertoire for well over a decade now. I love arriving home after a busy day running errands to the tantalizing aroma of beef stew. With every tender morsel of beef and every infusion of savory broth and veggies, this recipe captures not just the essence of a classic beef stew but also the heartwarming memories and traditions that have simmered alongside it throughout the years. This is a basic beginner recipe that anyone can make. Join me on this flavorful expedition as we delve into the time-honored magic of crafting beef stew in the trusty crock pot.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why this Recipe Works

Effortless Perfection: Enjoy a hassle-free cooking experience as the Crock Pot effortlessly transforms simple ingredients into a flavorful masterpiece, allowing you to savor the taste without the constant supervision.

Melt-in-Your-Mouth Goodness: Revel in the succulence of slow-cooked beef, as the long, gentle simmering process tenderizes the meat, enhancing its natural flavors and creating a fork-tender texture that’s truly irresistible.

Versatile Simplicity: Whether you’re a busy professional or a home chef, this recipe adapts to your schedule, accommodating overnight cooking or a set-it-and-forget-it approach during the day, making it perfect for any occasion.

Ingredients

All the ingredients for the Slow Cooker Beef Stew spread across a white marble counter.
  • Beef – 2 pounds of stewed beef that is already cut into chunks or cubes is exactly what you will want for this recipe.
  • Vegetables – For this beef stew recipe I use a mix of potatoes, onions, celery, carrots, garlic, and green peas.
  • Spices – A blend of paprika, salt, pepper, dried parsley, and dried thyme are mixed into the stew.
  • Broth – I like to use a few cups of beef broth. If you don’t have it on hand you can use water and beef bullion cubes.
  • Oil – You will want a little neutral oil to sear the beef.
  • Tomato Paste – A little tomato paste whisked into the broth will give the rich tomato base.

Directions

Beef stew being seasoned in a mixing bowl.

Heat a frying pan on medium heat. Add the oil. Then in a separate bowl, season the beef with the paprika, salt, and pepper. Place the beef in the frying pan and brown on all sides (about 5 minutes) until a nice golden crust is obtained).

Slow Cooker beef ingredients resting in the instant pot.

While the beef is cooking, wash and cut potatoes, celery, onion, and garlic. Place in the crock pot, along with the baby carrots.

Place the semi-cooked beef in the slow cooker and sprinkle the thyme and parsley on top.

Mix the beef broth with the tomato paste and worchestire sauce. Pour on top of the beef and vegetables. Mix well.

Cover and cook on low for 8 hours or high for 4-5 hours.

Slow cooker beef stew ingredients being added into the Instant Pot

In a bowl mix together the cornstarch and a ½ cup of the broth from the stew. Mix until smooth. Then begin to stir into the hot stew. Mix in the thawed green peas, and cook on high for 30 minutes.

Angled view of the beef stew cooking in the slow cooker.

Stir the stew again just before dividing evenly among bowls and enjoy.

FAQs

Close up of beef stew served in a mini green pot.
Can I use frozen beef for the stew?

It’s recommended to thaw the beef beforehand for even cooking, ensuring that the meat reaches a safe internal temperature in the slow cooker.

How long should I cook the beef stew?

Cook on low for 7-8 hours or on high for 3-4 hours, allowing the flavors to meld and the meat to become tender. Adjust cooking time based on your slow cooker’s settings and your desired level of doneness.

Can I prepare the ingredients the night before and refrigerate them until cooking?

Yes, simplify your morning routine by chopping vegetables and prepping meat the night before. Store the ingredients separately in the refrigerator, then combine them in the slow cooker when ready to start cooking for a time-saving solution. Make sure to wait to cut your potatoes though, until the morning you are ready to cook. If not they will start to brown.

Can I freeze the leftover beef stew?

Absolutely! Allow the stew to cool completely before transferring it to airtight containers or freezer bags. Freeze for up to 3 months, and when reheating, ensure it reaches a safe internal temperature.

How should I store the cooked beef stew in the refrigerator?

Once cooled, store the stew in airtight containers in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. Reheat on the stove-top or in the microwave, adding a splash of broth if needed to maintain moisture.

Tips & Tricks

Spoonful of the simmering beef stew in the instant pot.

Here are a few of my favorite tips and tricks when making Crockpot beef stew.

  • Carrots – I like to use baby carrots since their is no peeling and chopping involved. However, I do like the flavor of whole carrots better. You can use either for this recipe.
  • Pre-Cooking Beef – I like to precook and sear the beef prior to placing in the slow cooker. It does take a few more minutes in the preparation step; however, it will yield amazing flavors as the end result. If you don’t have the time–don’t stress. You can skip this step.
  • Vegetables – If you want to add more vegetables to your stew you can always add in chunks of mushroom, zucchini, corn, or even green beans to the stew.
  • Broth – Use a good-quality beef broth or stock to enhance the overall taste of the stew. Add additional nutritional value by using a bone broth instead.
  • For a thicker stew – Mix an additional tablespoon of cornstarch with some broth from the crock pot and add it back in during the last hour of cooking.

Sides for Beef Stew

Close up of slow cooker beef stew in the instant pot.

Pair this slow cooker beef stew with cornbread muffins or fluffy mashed potatoes to soak up the savory broth and elevate your dining experience. Here are a few more of my favorite side dish recipes to serve with stew.

  • Square photo of 2 bowls of greek salad with a red and white striped napkin.
    Panera Greek Salad
  • White plate with lettuce and Mango Shrimp Salad on top.
    Mango Shrimp Salad
  • Glass bowl with black beans, mango and green onion with cilantro.
    Black Bean Mango Salad
  • Creamy Cucumber Salad

If you make this gluten free beef stew recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

Two green bowls filled with beef stew with a white and blue checkered cloth underneath the bowls.

Crock Pot Beef Stew

Indulge in the ultimate comfort with my Crock Pot beef stew, where tender chunks of beef melt in a rich, savory broth chocked full of vegetables, promising a hearty and delicious meal that practically cooks itself!
5 from 1 vote
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Main Course, Slow Cooker
Cuisine: American
Diet: Gluten Free
Prep Time: 15 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 8 hours hours 30 minutes minutes
Total Time: 8 hours hours 45 minutes minutes
Servings: 8
Calories: 274kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • 1 Stove Top
  • 1 Frying Pan
  • Measuring Cups
  • Measuring Spoons
  • 1 Whisk
  • 1 Slow Cooker

Ingredients

  • 1 teaspoon Grapeseed Oil
  • 2 pounds Stewed beef chunks
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon Black Pepper
  • 2 cups baby carrots
  • 1 onion quartered
  • 3 Celery Stalks cut into 1-inch pieces
  • 5 Garlic Cloves minced
  • 24 ounces Baby White Potatoes quartered
  • 1 teaspoon Dried Thyme
  • 1 teaspoon Parsley Flakes
  • 2 cups Beef broth
  • 2 tablespoons Tomato Paste
  • 1 tablespoon Worchestire sauce
  • 2 tablespoons Cornstarch
  • ½ cup Frozen Peas thawed

Instructions

  • Heat a frying pan on medium heat. Add the oil. Then in a separate bowl, season the beef with the paprika, salt, and pepper. Place the beef in the frying pan and brown on all sides (about 5 minutes) until a nice golden crust is obtained).
  • While the beef is cooking, wash and cut potatoes, celery, onion, and garlic. Place in the crock pot, along with the baby carrots.
  • Place the semi-cooked beef in the crock pot and sprinkle the thyme and parsley on top.
  • Mix the beef broth with the tomato paste and Worchestire sauce. Pour on top of the beef and vegetables. Mix well.
  • Cover and cook on low for 8 hours or high for 4-5 hours.
  • In a bowl mix together the cornstarch and a ½ cup of the broth from the stew. Mix until smooth. Then begin to stir into the hot stew. Mix in the thawed green peas, and cook on high for 30 minutes.
  • Stir the stew again just before dividing evenly among bowls and enjoy.

Notes

  • Carrots – I like to use baby carrots since their is no peeling and chopping involved. However, I do like the flavor of whole carrots better. You can use either for this recipe.
  • Pre-Cooking Beef – I like to precook and sear the beef prior to placing in the slow cooker. It does take a few more minutes in the preparation step; however, it will yield amazing flavors as the end result. If you don’t have the time–don’t stress. You can skip this step.
  • Vegetables – If you want to add more vegetables to your stew you can always add in chunks of mushroom, zucchini, corn, or even green beans to the stew.

Nutrition

Serving: 1c | Calories: 274kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 29g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 70mg | Sodium: 524mg | Potassium: 972mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 4682IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 4mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Brioche French Toast Casserole

Published on: December 3, 2023 Updated on: December 3, 2023 by Katie 9 Comments

White plate with two pieces of baked french toast with berries.

Indulge in the luxurious fusion of buttery brioche, velvety custard, and a warm cinnamon and vanilla embrace with my Brioche French Toast Casserole recipe. A make-ahead twist on a classic breakfast favorite that transforms any occasion into a celebration.

Two stacked white plates with two slices of french toast bake and berries.

Brioche French Toast Casserole is a sumptuous and indulgent dish that elevates the classic French toast to a whole new level, making it an ideal centerpiece for special holiday breakfasts or leisurely brunch gatherings. The rich and buttery brioche bread, soaked in a custard made from eggs, milk, and cream, creates a decadent harmony of flavors and textures. This delightful casserole is similar to my french toast muffins but offers a convenient twist to traditional French toast, allowing for easy preparation ahead of time, making it perfect for festive occasions when you want to spend more time with loved ones and less time in the kitchen.

My family loves the smell of cinnamon and vanilla wafting through the air as it bakes adds a touch of warmth to holiday mornings, making this dish not just a breakfast but a cherished tradition, creating lasting memories around the table. This is my go-to Christmas morning breakfast and my kids cannot get enough of it. Whether adorned with a dusting of powdered sugar, drizzled with maple syrup, or topped with vibrant fresh berries or maybe all of the above. My Brioche French Toast Casserole recipe is certain to become a cherished favorite, and perhaps be made into a new family tradition.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why this Recipe Works

White baking dish filled with baked french toast with a black spatula holding a slice over the baking dish.

Elevated Flavor and Texture – The use of brioche bread imparts a rich, buttery flavor and a soft, delicate texture, taking traditional French toast to a new level of indulgence.

Effortless Entertaining – Perfect for special occasions, this casserole allows you to prepare a delicious breakfast the night before, giving you more time to enjoy the festivities with family and friends.

Versatile Customization – Brioche French Toast Casserole is highly customizable. Whether you prefer a classic approach or want to experiment with different flavors and toppings, this recipe allows you to tailor it to your taste, making it a versatile and beloved dish for any occasion.

Ingredients

Ingredients on counter: brioche, eggs, cinnamon, nutmeg, heavy cream, milk, brown sugar, vanilla extract, and salt.
  • Bread – I like to use a loaf of brioche bread for this recipe. The butteriness of the bread make this stand out!
  • Eggs – You will need a half dozen eggs to create a thick custard base for this baked french toast.
  • Dairy – I use a mix of 2% milk and heavy cream.
  • Sugar – I like to use light brown sugar that is blended in the custard before mixing in with the bread.
  • Spices – A combination of cinnamon and nutmeg is what brings the french toast flavors together.
  • Vanilla – I love to use a tablespoon of vanilla extract in a French toast casserole. It adds a rich and aromatic depth of flavor, elevating the dish to a delightful and indulgent breakfast experience.

How to Make French Toast Casserole

Cubes of brioche bread cut with slices of brioche and a serrated knife in the background.

First, preheat your oven to 350°F (175°C).

Cut the brioche bread into cubes. You can use a day-old brioche for better absorption of the egg mixture.

Silver bowl filled with milk, eggs, brown sugar, cinnamon, and vanilla extract.
White bowl filled with cinnamon custard mixture with bread next to it.

In a large mixing bowl, whisk together the eggs, milk, heavy cream, brown sugar, vanilla extract, ground cinnamon, nutmeg, and salt. Mix together ensuring that the sugar is well dissolved.

White baking dish filled with custard and chopped up bread.

Grease a baking dish and place the brioche cubes in it. Pour the egg mixture over the brioche, making sure all the pieces are well-coated. Allow it to sit for about 15-20 minutes, giving the bread a chance to absorb the liquid.

Bake the casserole, uncovered, in the preheated oven for 45-55 minutes or until the top is golden brown and the center is set.

White baking dish with baked french toast with powder sugar on top.

Once done, remove the casserole from the oven and let it cool for a few minutes. Dust the top with powder sugar, then slice it into squares, and serve warm with maple syrup.

FAQs

Double stacked white plate filled with slices of baked french toast with berries and two forks next to the plate.
Can I use a different type of bread?

While brioche adds a rich and buttery flavor, you can experiment with other bread types like challah or French bread. Ensure it’s slightly stale for better absorption.

Can I make it ahead of time?

Yes, you can assemble the casserole the night before and refrigerate it. Allow it to come to room temperature before baking for even cooking.

What toppings work well with this casserole?

Maple syrup is a classic choice, but you can also add a dollop of whipped cream, a sprinkle of powdered sugar, or fresh berries for added freshness.

Can I freeze leftovers?

While it’s best enjoyed fresh, you can freeze leftovers in an airtight container. Reheat individual portions in the oven for a few minutes for a quick and delicious breakfast.

How can I make french toast casserole more indulgent?

Consider adding chocolate chips, chopped nuts, or a drizzle of caramel sauce to make the casserole even more decadent. Or you can create a streusel topping by combining flour, brown sugar, and cinnamon mixed with cold pieces of butter to create a decadent topping. Add the topping before you bake.

Tips and Tricks

White plate filled with two slices of baked french toast with berries on a blue and white checkered napkin with orange juice next to it.

Here are a few of my favorite tips and tricks whenever I make french toast casserole with brioche.

  • Use Day-Old Brioche: Opt for day-old brioche for better absorption of the egg mixture. The slightly stale bread helps prevent the casserole from becoming too mushy.
  • Allow for Soaking Time: Let the brioche cubes soak in the egg mixture for at least 15-20 minutes before baking. This ensures that the bread absorbs the custard, resulting in a moist and flavorful casserole.
  • Customize the Flavor: Experiment with flavors by adding a dash of nutmeg, orange zest, or a sprinkle of your favorite spices to the egg mixture. This allows you to tailor the casserole to your taste preferences.
  • Prevent Over-Browning: I have never had this issue with my stove. But every stove is different. If you often experience your food browning too quickly I will advise you to cover the casserole with foil for the first half of the baking time to prevent excessive browning. Remove the foil during the last 15-20 minutes of baking to achieve a golden brown top.
  • Serve Fresh and Warm: Brioche French Toast Casserole is best enjoyed fresh out of the oven.
  • Overnight: If preparing ahead, you can assemble the casserole the night before and refrigerate it. Bring it to room temperature before baking for optimal results.

Sides for French Toast

Not sure what sides go with french toast? Here are a few of my favorite recommendations that pair perfectly.

  • Brown skillet with scrambled eggs topped with chives and silicone spatula.
    How to Make Scrambled Eggs
  • Square photo of a paper towel lined plate with crispy bacon
    Air Fryer Bacon
  • Instant Pot Egg Bites
  • Top view of a red bowl filled with diced crispy breakfast potatoes.
    Fried Breakfast Potatoes

If you make this french toast casserole with brioche recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

White plate with two pieces of baked french toast with berries.

Brioche French Toast Casserole

Indulge in the luxurious fusion of buttery brioche, velvety custard, and a warm cinnamon and vanilla embrace with my Brioche French Toast Casserole recipe. A make-ahead twist on a classic breakfast favorite that transforms any occasion into a celebration.
5 from 2 votes
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Breakfast
Cuisine: American
Diet: Low Salt
Prep Time: 15 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 45 minutes minutes
Soaking Time: 15 minutes minutes
Total Time: 1 hour hour 15 minutes minutes
Servings: 12
Calories: 313kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • Measuring Cups
  • Measuring Spoons
  • Mixing Bowl
  • Silicone Spatula
  • 9 x 13 Baking Dish
  • Oven

Ingredients

  • Cooking Spray
  • 16 ounces Brioche Loaf cut into cubes
  • 6 Eggs
  • 1 cup 2% Milk
  • 1 cup Heavy Cream
  • ½ cup Brown Sugar
  • 1 tablespoon Cinnamon
  • ⅕ teaspoon Nutmeg
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • 1 tablespoon Vanilla Extract
  • 1 tablespoon Powder Sugar for serving

Instructions

  • Preheat your oven to 350°F (175°C).
  • Cut the brioche bread into cubes. You can use a day-old brioche for better absorption of the egg mixture.
  • In a large mixing bowl, whisk together the eggs, milk, heavy cream, brown sugar, vanilla extract, ground cinnamon, nutmeg, and salt. Ensure that the sugar is well dissolved.
  • Grease a baking dish and place the brioche cubes in it. Pour the egg mixture over the brioche, making sure all the pieces are well-coated. Allow it to sit for about 15-20 minutes, giving the bread a chance to absorb the liquid.
  • Bake the casserole, uncovered, in the preheated oven for 45-55 minutes or until the top is golden brown and the center is set.
  • Once done, remove the casserole from the oven and let it cool for a few minutes. Dust the top with powder sugar, then slice it into squares, and serve warm with maple syrup.

Notes

  • Make Ahead – You can prepare this recipe the night before. Let the casserole sit out for a half hour prior to baking the next morning.
  • How to tell if it’s done – You can insert a knife in the center, and if it comes out clean, it’s done.
  • Old Bread – Opt for day-old or a few days old brioche for better absorption of the egg mixture. The slightly stale bread helps prevent the casserole from becoming too mushy.

Nutrition

Serving: 0.5c | Calories: 313kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 170mg | Sodium: 270mg | Potassium: 94mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 756IU | Vitamin C: 0.2mg | Calcium: 85mg | Iron: 1mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Brine for Turkey Breast

Published on: November 21, 2023 Updated on: November 21, 2023 by Katie Leave a Comment

Brown pot on a marble countertop with a raw turkey breast and spices inside it.

Discover the secret to succulent and flavorful turkey with this easy-to-follow brine for turkey breast recipe, elevating your holiday feast to new heights.

Brown pot with a turkey peppercorns, and fresh thyme in water on a marble countertop.

As the holiday season approaches, the quest for the perfect turkey recipe intensifies. One often overlooked yet transformative technique is brining. If you’ve never brined your turkey breast before, you’re in for a treat. Brining not only enhances the natural flavors of the meat but also ensures a moist and tender result.

Years ago, I shared both my buttermilk turkey brine recipe and my smoked turkey brine recipe. Both of these brine recipes I’ve shared contain buttermilk. I was dairy free during my daughters first year of life which prompted me to work on a dairy free turkey brine recipe. This brine for turkey breast has just a few ingredients and is easy to put together even for the most beginner of cooks!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why this Recipe Works

Enhanced Flavor Profile: The combination of kosher salt, black peppercorns, fresh thyme, and garlic in this brine infuses your turkey breast with a symphony of savory and aromatic notes.

Moisture Retention: Brining is a foolproof way to keep your turkey breast juicy and succulent, preventing the common pitfall of dry and overcooked meat. If you are new to cooking a turkey you definitely want to take the extra step and brine your turkey!

Stress-Free Preparation: With straightforward instructions and minimal ingredients, this recipe offers a hassle-free approach to elevating your holiday turkey without the need for complex cooking techniques.

Ingredients

Ingredients on marble counter; turkey breast, water, garlic, salt, peppercorns, and thyme.
  • Kosher salt: Known for its larger, flakier crystals, kosher salt adheres well to the meat surface, aiding in the brining process.
  • Black peppercorns: These little flavor powerhouses not only add a spicy kick but also contribute antioxidants, making your turkey both tasty and healthful.
  • Fresh thyme: Packed with aromatic oils, fresh thyme imparts a delightful fragrance to the brine and ultimately to your turkey. It’s mild in flavor and not overwhelming which is why I like to use it in my brines.
  • Garlic: Apart from its robust flavor, garlic contains allicin, a compound known for its potential health benefits.
  • Water: Ample water ensures that the brine fully envelops the turkey, ensuring an even infusion of flavors. It’s important that the turkey is fully covered.
  • Turkey Breast: I typically brine a turkey breast anywhere from 5 to 9 pounds. Just make sure that you have a container or brining bag that can hold the turkey breast.

How to Brine a Turkey Breast

Brown pot on a marble countertop filled with salt, garlic cloves, pepercorn, and thyme with water on the side.

In a brining bag or a 10-quart stockpot (like the one pictured above), combine kosher salt, black peppercorns, fresh thyme, and garlic.

Brown pot on a marble countertop with a hand holding a wood spoon stirring liquid with fresh thyme and garlic cloves.

Pour in 1.5 gallons of water and mix until the salt is dissolved.

Brown pot on a marble countertop with a raw turkey, black peppercorns, and thyme in the pot with a glass measuring cup pouring in water.

Carefully place the thawed turkey breast in the mixture, adding more water if needed for complete coverage.

Seal the bag or cover the stockpot, refrigerating for 12-18 hours.

When ready to cook, rinse the turkey under cold water and pat dry with a paper towel.

FAQs

Can I brine a frozen turkey breast?

It’s essential to thaw the turkey before brining to ensure the brine fully penetrates the meat for optimal flavor.

Can I adjust the brining time?

While 12-18 hours is ideal, avoid exceeding 18 hours, as prolonged brining may result in overly salty meat.

Can I use table salt instead of kosher salt in the brine?

While you can substitute table salt, be cautious with the quantity, as table salt is more concentrated. Use about half the amount of kosher salt called for in the recipe.

Is it necessary to rinse the turkey after brining?

Yes, rinsing helps remove excess salt from the surface. However, ensure you pat the turkey completely dry before roasting to achieve that coveted crispy skin. Also note that you have a higher risk of spreading salmonella poisioning if you rinse the turkey. So make sure you clean your kitchen very well after you drain and rinse it.

Can I reuse the brine for multiple turkeys?

It’s not recommended to reuse the brine as it may contain harmful bacteria from the raw turkey. For the best results, prepare a fresh batch for each turkey you brine.

Do I need to use a brine bag?

If you don’t have a large enough pot you can use a brining bag. This makes cleanup a breeze and typically fits larger turkeys.

Can I use this turkey brine for a full size traditional turkey?

Yes, you can use this turkey breast brine recipe for a traditional turkey. The only thing that might change is the size of the turkey and you may need to double the seasoning and water amount.

Recipe Tips and Tricks

Brown pot on a marble countertop filled with liquid, fresh thyme, black peppercorns, and raw turkey breast.

Here are a few of my favorite tips and tricks I use when making a brine for turkey breast.

  • Submerged – Ensure the turkey is fully submerged in the brine to guarantee an even flavor distribution.
  • Citrus – Experiment with adding citrus slices or fresh herbs to the brine for personalized flavor profiles.
  • Brining Bag – Use a brining bag for easy storage and cleanup, or repurpose an extra large, sealable plastic bag.
  • Cold – Monitor the brine temperature: Keep the brine cold (below 40°F/4°C) during the entire process to prevent bacterial growth.

What to Serve with Turkey Breast

Wondering what to serve with the turkey breast? Here are a few of my favorite and most popular side dishes on Katie’s Cucina.

  • Air fryer butternut squash in a dish on a blue and white striped cloth.
    Air Fryer Butternut Squash
  • Oval red baking dish filled with corn casserole.
    Jiffy Corn Casserole
  • White platter with cooked acorn squash.
    Air Fryer Acorn Squash
  • Top view of baking dish filled with golden brown cheesy sliced potatoes.
    Gratin Dauphinois

Turkey Breast Recipes

Looking for ways to cook the brined turkey breast? Here are a few of my favorite recipes.

  • Top view of sliced turkey breast on a white platter.
    Smoked Turkey Breast
  • Grey roasting rack with a turkey breast on top.
    Oven Roasted Turkey Breast
  • Cooked seasoned turkey breast in a black air fryer basket.
    Air Fryer Turkey Breast
  • Turkey breast cutlets with a cream sauce in a pan.
    Turkey Breast Cutlets

With this foolproof turkey breast brine recipe, you’re well on your way to creating a memorable holiday centerpiece that will have your guests coming back for seconds.

If you make this turkey breast brine recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

Brown pot on a marble countertop with a raw turkey breast and spices inside it.

Brine for Turkey Breast

Discover the secret to succulent and flavorful turkey with this easy-to-follow brine for turkey breast recipe, elevating your holiday feast to new heights.
5 from 1 vote
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Sauce
Cuisine: American
Diet: Gluten Free, Low Lactose
Prep Time: 5 minutes minutes
Resting Time: 12 hours hours
Total Time: 12 hours hours 5 minutes minutes
Servings: 8
Calories: 312kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • 1 Stock Pot
  • 1 Silicone Spatula
  • Measuring Cups

Ingredients

  • ½ cup kosher salt
  • ¼ cup black peppercorns
  • 1 bunch fresh thyme
  • 12 cloves garlic
  • 2 gallons water
  • 5-8 pound turkey breast

Instructions

  • Using a brining bag or a 10 quart stockpot add the kosher salt, black peppercorns, fresh thyme, and garlic cloves. Pour in the water (I typically start with a gallon and a half). Using a wooden spoon, mix well until the salt is dissolved.
  • Carefully place the thawed turkey breast inside the stockpot. Add additional water if needed to ensure the entire bird is covered in brine. Seal bag or place lid on stockpot and set in the refrigerator for at least 12 hours (overnight) and no more then 18 hours.
  • Before your ready to cook the turkey. Rinse the turkey with cold water and pat dry with a paper towel.

Notes

  • Dried Spices – If you don’t happen to have fresh thyme on hand you can use 1 tablespoon of dried thyme leaves. I also like to add 2 tablespoons of dried chives and 2 tablespoons of dehydrated garlic if I don’t have the fresh on hand.
  • Recipe Testing – This recipe has been tested on 5-8 pound turkey breast. More liquid may be needed if you have a larger turkey breast.

Nutrition

Calories: 312kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 62g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.04g | Cholesterol: 153mg | Sodium: 7707mg | Potassium: 807mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 121IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 115mg | Iron: 2mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Air Fryer Butternut Squash

Published on: November 17, 2023 Updated on: November 17, 2023 by Katie Leave a Comment

Air fryer butternut squash in a dish on a blue and white striped cloth.

Discover the ultimate way to elevate your side dish game with Air Fryer Butternut Squash. Crispy, caramelized, and packed with flavor, this easy recipe is a game-changer for your dinner table!

Air fryer butternut squash in a dish on a blue and white striped cloth.

When it comes to versatile and delicious side dishes, butternut squash shines bright in the culinary world, but somehow doesn’t always make it to the dinner table at home. Its naturally sweet, nutty flavor, and creamy texture make it a favorite addition to countless dishes. When it’s in season you’ll find it making a frequent appearance on my dinner table. If you’re looking to take your butternut squash to the next level, it’s time to introduce your trusty air fryer into the equation. Just like my air fryer acorn squash this recipe is made in minutes.

Air Fryer Butternut Squash is a game-changer, providing the perfect combination of crispiness and caramelization, all without the excess oil. I’m here to walk you through every step as well as answer some frequently asked questions, and share valuable tips and tricks to make your airfried butternut squash a smashing success.

Why this Recipe Works

Crispy Perfection: Air fryers are well-known for their magical ability to turn ingredients crispy without the need for excessive oil. Butternut squash, when cooked in the air fryer, becomes irresistibly crispy on the outside while remaining tender and flavorful inside. It’s the ideal way to achieve that satisfying crunch that’s usually associated with deep frying.

Time and Energy Efficient: Traditional oven-roasting can take a significant amount of time and energy, especially when you’re in a hurry. With an air fryer, you can have your butternut squash ready in a fraction of the time. Preheating is quicker, and the cooking process itself is much faster, making it a fantastic option for busy weeknight dinners.

Versatile Seasoning Options: Air Fryer Butternut Squash is like a blank canvas for flavor. You can season it with various herbs and spices to suit your preferences. Whether you opt for classic salt and pepper, or decide to get creative with cinnamon, rosemary, or even a touch of chili powder, the air fryer helps these seasonings adhere perfectly to the squash, resulting in a burst of flavor in every bite.

Ingredients

Ingredients on a marble counter: black pepper, paprika, garlic powder, salt, oil, butternut squash.
  • Butternut Squash – 1 whole butternut squash peeled and cubed is all you need. Or you can save time at the grocery store and purchase it already peeled and cubed. I prefer this option to save time.
  • Oil – Because you are using the air fryer you want to usse a higher smoke point oil. That’s why I always recommend using grape seed oil.
  • Seasonings – I like to use a combination of salt, pepper, paprika, and garlic powder.

Directions

raw diced butternut squash and seasoning in a stainless steel bowl on a marble counter.
raw diced butternut squash and tongs in a stainless steel bowl on a marble counter.

Preheat the Air Fryer to 375 degrees Fahrenheit.

While air fryer preheats, placed the diced and peeled butternut squash in a bowl, drizzle grapeseed oil over the squash and sprinkle on the salt, garlic powder, paprika, and black pepper. Mix well until seasoning is on all the squash.

Raw butternut squash in an air fryer.

Pour the seasoned butternut squash in the air fryer basket. Air fry for 20-22 minutes until fork tender, mixing one to two times during the cooking process. Once done cooking serve immediately.

Recipe FAQs

What does butternut squash taste like?

Butternut squash has a sweet, nutty flavor with a mild, creamy texture, making it a versatile ingredient that can be used in both savory and sweet dishes.

Do I need to peel the butternut squash before air frying it?

Yes, it’s best to peel the butternut squash for this recipe. The skin can be tough and won’t become as crispy as the flesh. Peeling also allows the seasonings to penetrate the squash more effectively.

Can I air fry a whole butternut squash?

Air frying a whole butternut squash is not recommended. Whole butternut squash has a thick, hard skin, and the flesh inside needs to cook thoroughly. Air frying a whole butternut squash would likely result in uneven cooking and a potentially overcooked exterior with an undercooked interior.

What temperature and time should I use for air frying butternut squash?

Preheat your air fryer to 375°F (190°C) and air fry the butternut squash cubes for about 15-20 minutes, shaking the basket or tossing them halfway through to ensure even cooking. The exact time may vary depending on your air fryer’s model and the size of your squash pieces, so keep an eye on them.

Can I make this recipe in advance and reheat it?

Yes, you can make Air Fryer Butternut Squash in advance and reheat it. To maintain the crispiness, reheat it in the air fryer for a few minutes, or use an oven at 350°F (175°C) until it’s warm and crispy again.

Tips & Tricks

Plate with mashed potatoes, turkey cutlets, and butternut squash and air fryer butternut squash in a dish on a blue and white striped cloth and two forks.
  • Uniform Cubes: To ensure even cooking, cut your butternut squash into uniform cubes. This will help every piece cook at the same rate and achieve that perfect crispiness.
  • Don’t Overcrowd: Avoid overcrowding the air fryer basket. Cook your butternut squash in batches if necessary to allow proper air circulation and ensure the best results.
  • Seasonings – The sky is the limit when seasoning butternut squash. You can always add onion powder, smoked paprika, rosemary, sage, cayenne for a little heat or even sprinkle on a little brown sugar to really get the butternut squash to caramelize.
  • Oil Application: Lightly coat the butternut squash cubes with a small amount of oil before air frying. This helps with the crisping process and enhances the flavor.

Butternut Squash Recipes

  • Autumn Squash Soup
  • Harvest Quinoa Salad with Pumpkin Yogurt Dressing
    Harvest Quinoa Salad with Pumpkin Yogurt Dressing
  • Turkey Butternut Squash and Lentil Soup
    Turkey Butternut Squash and Lentil Soup
  • Sheet Pan Harvest Pork Chop Dinner
    Sheet Pan Harvest Pork Chop Dinner

Air Fryer Butternut Squash is the perfect side dish to elevate your meals. It’s quick, easy, and delivers a delightful combination of crispy exteriors and tender interiors, making it a true crowd-pleaser. With versatile seasoning options and the convenience of your air fryer, you can’t go wrong with this delectable dish. So, give it a try and watch your family and guests fall in love with butternut squash all over again!

If you make this air fryer butternut squash recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

Air fryer butternut squash in a dish on a blue and white striped cloth.

Air Fryer Butternut Squash

Discover the ultimate way to elevate your side dish game with Air Fryer Butternut Squash. Crispy, caramelized, and packed with flavor, this easy recipe is a game-changer for your dinner table!
No ratings yet
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: American
Diet: Gluten Free
Prep Time: 10 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 20 minutes minutes
Total Time: 30 minutes minutes
Servings: 4
Calories: 112kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • Measuring Spoons
  • Tongs
  • Air Fryer

Ingredients

  • 25 ounces Diced and Peeled Butternut Squash
  • 1 tablespoon Grapeseed Oil
  • 1 teaspoon Salt
  • ½ teaspoon Garlic
  • ¼ teaspoon Paprika
  • ¼ teaspoon Black Pepper

Instructions

  • Preheat the Air Fryer to 375 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • While air fryer preheats, placed the diced and peeled butternut squash in a bowl, drizzle grapeseed oil over the squash and sprinkle on the salt, garlic powder, paprika, and black pepper. Mix well until seasoning is on all the squash.
  • Pour the seasoned butternut squash in the air fryer basket. Air fry for 20-22 minutes until fork tender, mixing one to two times during the cooking process. Once done cooking serve immediately.

Notes

  • Uniform Cubes: To ensure even cooking, cut your butternut squash into uniform cubes. This will help every piece cook at the same rate and achieve that perfect crispiness.
  • Don’t Overcrowd: Avoid overcrowding the air fryer basket. Cook your butternut squash in batches if necessary to allow proper air circulation and ensure the best results.
  • Seasonings – The sky is the limit when seasoning butternut squash. You can always add onion powder, smoked paprika, rosemary, sage, cayenne for a little heat or even sprinkle on a little brown sugar to really get the butternut squash to caramelize.
  • Oil Application: Lightly coat the butternut squash cubes with a small amount of oil before air frying. This helps with the crisping process and enhances the flavor.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 112kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 0.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 589mg | Potassium: 630mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 18897IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 87mg | Iron: 1mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Gluten Free Green Bean Casserole

Published on: November 8, 2023 Updated on: November 6, 2023 by Katie 2 Comments

Close up of baking dish with green bean casserole on a blue and white striped cloth.

Are you ready to elevate your holiday table or weeknight dinner with a delectable dish that’s not only gluten-free but also incredibly quick to prepare? Look no further! Our Gluten-Free Green Bean Casserole is made with all fresh ingredients and doesn’t require an oven. In just under 30 minutes, you can whip up this mouthwatering masterpiece that’s sure to become a new family favorite.

Close up of baking dish with green bean casserole on a blue and white striped cloth.

Are you ready to elevate your holiday table or weeknight dinner with a delectable dish that’s not only gluten-free but also incredibly quick to prepare? Look no further! My Gluten-Free Green Bean Casserole is made with all fresh ingredients and doesn’t require an oven. In just under 30 minutes, you can whip up this mouthwatering masterpiece that’s sure to become a new family favorite.

I’ve been making this recipe for almost a decade now and you won’t believe how much of a culinary triumph this gluten free green bean casserole turned out to be! Even my husband, who was once a die-hard canned casserole enthusiast, couldn’t resist its charm. It’s safe to say, I’ve struck the perfect balance with this dish, and I’m already planning to serve both the traditional canned casserole and this delightful gluten-free version for my cousin. Honestly, there’s a good chance my husband and I will be savoring this homemade creation right alongside hers.

In my quest to make this dish gluten-free, I made a simple yet brilliant substitution – replacing those delectable but gluten-packed fried onions with crispy pan-fried shallots. Just a touch of butter and a sprinkle of shallots, crisped to perfection, provided the ideal gluten-free topping. To create the heart of the casserole, I combined freshly chopped white mushrooms with tender haricot verts, and they simmered together beautifully. Once the green beans were ready to shine, I stirred in a luscious mixture of heavy cream and cornstarch, resulting in a creamy and decadent homemade, from-scratch, gluten-free green bean casserole that’ll be the star of any holiday spread.

On a somewhat unrelated note, I’ve recently embarked on a mission to prepare all my meals from scratch, completely devoid of cans or boxed foods. This dish, while undeniably rich with the inclusion of heavy cream, aligns perfectly with my new culinary philosophy. It might sound a tad peculiar, but there’s a certain satisfaction in knowing that I’ve put my heart and soul into each ingredient. Even though I don’t typically share my weight-loss journey here (and it’s quite amusing to discuss weight loss alongside green bean casserole), I’ve maintained the same approach while intensifying my exercise regimen and keeping a watchful eye on portion sizes. It’s all about savoring these indulgent holiday meals in moderation and balancing them with physical activity.

Instead of surrendering to post-meal slumber, why not consider a family walk to digest those delectable dishes? Trust me, your waistline will likely thank you for this approach. So, this holiday season, savor the flavors guilt-free, and let’s embrace the joy of both food and fitness.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why this Recipe Works

Catering to Dietary Needs: The most compelling reason to whip up a gluten-free green bean casserole is to accommodate friends and family members with gluten sensitivities or allergies. By offering a delicious gluten-free option, you ensure everyone at your gathering can enjoy this classic dish without any dietary concerns.

Fresh, Quality Ingredients: Making your green bean casserole from scratch allows you to use fresh, wholesome ingredients. You’ll savor the vibrant flavors of fresh green beans, mushrooms, and shallots instead of relying on canned products, resulting in a more flavorful and nutritious dish.

Enhanced Taste and Control: When you prepare this casserole at home, you have full control over the seasonings, creaminess, and topping. You can tailor the recipe to your taste, creating a truly decadent, creamy, and satisfying dish that surpasses the canned versions in taste and texture.

Ingredients

Ingredients on marble counter: heavy cream, butter, mushrooms, shallots, cornstarch, salt, pepper, green beans.
  • Vegetables – You will need fresh green beans, fresh mushrooms, and shallots which will act as your crispy onion topping.
  • Seasonings – Salt and pepper is all you need.
  • Dairy – A mix of butter and heavy cream is needed to make this creamy casserole come to life.
  • Corn Starch – This is my secret weapon to thickening the casserole without the gluten.

How to Make Green Bean Casserole

Sliced shallots on a plastic cutting board and a knife.

First, thinly slice the shallots.

Two pads of butter melting in a skillet.

In a saute pan, add 2 tablespoons butter and heat on high. Then add in the shallots. Reduce to medium heat with lid on and cook for 10 minutes, mixing often so that the shallots don’t burn. Half way through cooking add the water and mix well.

Caramelized shallots in a skillet.

Cook until golden brown and mostly crispy. Remove the crispy shallots from the pan and set to the side.

Raw green beans, mushrooms, and seasoning in a skillet.

Place the remaining 2 tablespoons butter in the sauté pan, melt, and add the green beans and diced mushrooms in the pan with a half cup water. Season with salt and pepper. Cook on high for 8 minutes until tender and most of the liquid has evaporated.

While the green beans cook, in a measuring cup mix together the heavy cream and corn starch and set to the side.

Pan on the stove with green beans and heavy cream.

Pour the heavy cream/corn starch mixture into the pan. Turn the heat off and stir. Cover and let sit for 2 additional minutes.

Place the green bean casserole in a serving dish, and top with crispy shallots. Enjoy.

FAQs

Close up of green bean casserole.
Can I make this recipe without using the stove?

Yes, you can! If you prefer not to use the stove, consider blanching the green beans in the microwave. Place them in a microwave-safe dish with a little water, cover, and microwave for a few minutes until they are tender. Additionally, you can make the crispy shallot topping in the oven or air fryer, bypassing the stovetop entirely.

Can I substitute canned products in this recipe?

While this recipe is all about fresh ingredients, you can make some substitutions to save time. You can use canned gluten-free cream of mushroom soup and gluten-free crispy fried onions if you’re looking for convenience. However, using fresh ingredients will provide the best flavor.

How can I make this dish Vegan?

To create a vegan version of this green bean casserole, substitute the heavy cream with a non-dairy alternative like almond or coconut milk. Use a plant-based butter or oil for frying the shallots and choose a vegan cream of mushroom soup. Be sure to check that all ingredients are labeled as vegan and gluten-free.

Can I prepare this casserole in advance?

Yes, you can assemble the casserole ahead of time and refrigerate it without baking. Cover it tightly and store it for up to 24 hours. When you’re ready to serve, bake it in the preheated oven as directed in the recipe. This is a great time-saving tip for holiday preparations or dinner parties.

Can you freeze green bean casserole?

Yes, you can freeze green bean casserole. However, I would store the fried shallots in a separate container and not on top of the casserole as they will no longer be crunchy.

Recipe Tips and Tricks

Baking dish with green bean casserole on a blue and white striped cloth with two shallots in the background.

Here are a few of my favorite tips and tricks when making a green bean casserole gluten free.

  • Crispy Gluten Free Onions – For the crispiest shallot topping, make sure the shallots are thinly sliced. For an extra crispy crunch you can toss them evenly coating them with a gluten-free flour or cornstarch before frying.
  • Creamier – To make the casserole even creamier, you can use a combination of heavy cream and chicken or vegetable broth.
  • Overcook – Don’t overcook the green beans during blanching or steaming; they should still have a slight crunch as they will continue to cook in the casserole.
  • Seasonings – Season each layer of the casserole with a pinch of salt and pepper for well-balanced flavors.
  • Smokiness – If you want to add a smoky dimension, consider mixing in some cooked and crumbled gluten-free bacon or using a sprinkle of smoked paprika.

What to Serve with Green Bean Casserole

Plate with mashed potatoes, green bean casserole, and turkey breast cutlets with 2 forks, and green bean casserole in the background.

A classic pairing for green bean casserole is roasted turkey or chicken, but it also complements a variety of main dishes, such as ham, turkey cutlets (pictured above), or vegetarian options like stuffed acorn squash.

  • White bowl with fluffy mashed potatoes topped with butter and parsley.
    Instant Pot Garlic Mashed Potatoes
  • White bowl filled with cooked beets.
    Instant Pot Beets

If you make this gluten free green bean casserole recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

Close up of baking dish with green bean casserole on a blue and white striped cloth.

Gluten Free Green Bean Casserole

Are you ready to elevate your holiday table or weeknight dinner with a delectable dish that's not only gluten-free but also incredibly quick to prepare? Look no further! Our Gluten-Free Green Bean Casserole is made with all fresh ingredients and doesn't require an oven. In just under 30 minutes, you can whip up this mouthwatering masterpiece that's sure to become a new family favorite.
5 from 1 vote
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: American
Diet: Gluten Free
Prep Time: 10 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 20 minutes minutes
Total Time: 30 minutes minutes
Servings: 4
Calories: 369kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • Measuring Cups
  • Measuring Spoons
  • Knife
  • Cutting Board
  • Skillet
  • Silicone Spatula
  • Stove Top

Ingredients

  • 4 tablespoon unsalted butter divided
  • 4 shallots thinly sliced
  • ¼ cup water
  • 1 pound Green Beans trimmed
  • ½ cup white mushrooms diced
  • ½ cup water
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 cup heavy cream
  • 1 tablespoon corn starch

Instructions

  • In a saute pan, add 2 tablespoons butter and heat on high. Then add in the shallots. Reduce to medium heat with lid on and cook for 10 minutes, mixing often so that the shallots don’t burn. Half way through cooking add the water and mix well. Cook until golden brown and mostly crispy. Remove the crispy shallots from the pan and set to the side.
  • Place the remaining 2 tablespoons butter in the sauté pan, melt, and add the green beans and diced mushrooms in the pan with ½ cup water. Season with salt and pepper. Cook on high for 8 minutes until tender and most of the liquid has evaporated. 
  • While green beans cook, in a measuring cup (or bowl) mix together the heavy cream and corn starch.
  • Pour the heavy cream/corn starch mixture into the pan. Turn the heat off and stir. Cover and let sit for 2 additional minutes.
  • Place the green bean casserole in a serving dish, and top with crispy shallots. Enjoy.

Notes

  • Crispy Gluten Free Onions – For the crispiest shallot topping, make sure the shallots are thinly sliced. For an extra crispy crunch you can toss them evenly coating them with a gluten-free flour or cornstarch before frying.
  • Creamier – To make the casserole even creamier, you can use a combination of heavy cream and chicken or vegetable broth.
  • Overcook – Don’t overcook the green beans during blanching or steaming; they should still have a slight crunch as they will continue to cook in the casserole.
  • Seasonings – Season each layer of the casserole with a pinch of salt and pepper for well-balanced flavors.
  • Smokiness – If you want to add a smoky dimension, consider mixing in some cooked and crumbled gluten-free bacon or using a sprinkle of smoked paprika.

Nutrition

Serving: 0.5cup | Calories: 369kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 34g | Saturated Fat: 21g | Cholesterol: 112mg | Sodium: 328mg | Potassium: 406mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 2007IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 93mg | Iron: 2mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Cranberry Raspberry Sauce

Published on: November 7, 2023 Updated on: November 6, 2023 by Katie 2 Comments

A wooden spoon with cranberry raspberry sauce in a bowl on a blue and white stripped cloth with a jar of sauce and cranberries scattered in the background.

Get ready to elevate your Thanksgiving feast with a burst of sweet and tangy flavors! In this recipe blog post, we’re going to show you how to make the most irresistible homemade Cranberry Raspberry Sauce that will have your guests coming back for more.

A wooden spoon with cranberry raspberry sauce in a bowl on a blue and white stripped cloth with a jar of sauce and cranberries scattered in the background.

Thanksgiving is just around the corner, and while turkey may take center stage on your holiday table, the supporting cast can’t be ignored. One essential side dish that deserves the spotlight is the Cranberry Raspberry Sauce. This vibrant, homemade sauce combines the tartness of cranberries with the sweetness of raspberries to create a delightful accompaniment that will elevate your holiday feast.

I love switching it up and steering away from my traditional cranberry sauce recipe. Most years I alternate between this raspberry cranberry sauce and my mango cranberry sauce.

Whether you’re a seasoned home cook or a novice in the kitchen, this recipe is simple and foolproof, making it a must-have for your Thanksgiving spread. Pair it with my Air Fryer Turkey Breast or keep the meal small with my Turkey Cutlets recipe.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why this Recipe Works

Perfect Balance of Flavors – Homemade Cranberry Raspberry Sauce strikes a delightful balance between sweet and tart, thanks to the combination of cranberries and raspberries. It adds a burst of flavor to your savory dishes and is equally delicious on your leftover turkey sandwiches.

Versatile and Unique – Unlike store-bought sauces, making your own allows you to control the ingredients and customize the sauce to your taste. You can adjust the sweetness, add spices, or even introduce other berries for a unique twist. This versatility ensures that your sauce will perfectly complement your entire Thanksgiving menu.

A Dash of Vibrant Color – Thanksgiving is all about celebrating abundance and the beauty of fall. The deep red hue of this Cranberry Raspberry Sauce adds a vibrant touch to your dinner table, enhancing both the visual and culinary appeal of your holiday spread.

Ingredients

Ingredients on marble counter: raspberries, sugar, water, cranberries
  • Cranberries – One bag of fresh cranberries is all you need. You can use frozen if you can’t find fresh.
  • Raspberries – One small six ounce clam shell of the freshest raspberries.
  • Sugar – Because cranberries are so tart they need a lot of sugar to sweeten them up. I prefer to use white granulated sugar.
  • Water – No need to add any additional sugar– water is all you need for the liquid.

Directions

cranberries, raspberries, and sugar in a pot.

First, rinse and drain the fresh cranberries. Pick off any stems or any bad berries. Do the same thing for the raspberries.

Then place them in a large sauce pan. Pour in 1 cup of water and the granulated sugar.

cranberries and raspberries in a pot with a spatula.

Mix well and then cook on medium-high heat for 5 minutes until the cranberries come to a boil. Reduce the heat to medium-low and cook for an additional 15-20 minutes, stirring often until the berries are cooked down and the liquid has thickened.

Cranberry raspberry sauce mixed in a pot on the stove with a spatula.

Once the cranberries are done cooking. Remove from the heat, mix well and let sit un-covered for 30 minutes. The sauce will naturally thicken. Enjoy immediately or transfer to an airtight container and store in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

FAQs

Cranberry raspberry sauce in a bowl on a blue and white stripped cloth with cranberries scattered in the background.
Can I use frozen cranberries and raspberries instead of fresh?

Yes, frozen berries work just fine. Just be sure to adjust the cooking time accordingly.

How long can I store this sauce in the fridge?

This sauce can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 2 weeks.

Can I make this sauce in advance for Thanksgiving?

Absolutely! In fact, it’s a great make-ahead dish, as the flavors deepen with time.

Is it normal for a popping sound when cooking cranberries?

Yes, as the liquid starts to heat the cranberries will begin to make a “popping” noise. This is totally normal do not worry.

Recipe Tips and Tricks

Cranberry raspberry sauce in a bowl on a blue and white stripped cloth with a jar of sauce, wooden spoon, and cranberries scattered in the background.

Here are a few of my favorite tips and tricks when making raspberry cranberry sauce.

  • Spice it up – Experiment with additional spices like cloves, nutmeg, or a pinch of cardamom for a more complex flavor profile.
  • Sweetness – Adjust the sugar to suit your taste. If you prefer it less sweet, reduce the sugar slightly.
  • Year Round Condiment – This sauce is not just for Thanksgiving; it’s a fantastic condiment for roast chicken, pork, and even as a topping for desserts like cheesecake or ice cream.
  • Gifting – Make extra and gift it to your friends and family in decorative jars. Homemade cranberry raspberry sauce makes a thoughtful and delicious holiday gift.
  • Fresh Fruit – Think of other fresh fruit like mango, apples, pineapples, and even grapes to add to the cranberry sauce. Make sure you dice into bite size pieces if you decide to add fruit.
  • Raspberry Flavor – For a more intense raspberry flavor you can use a raspberry concentrate in place of water or remove the sugar and use a raspberry flavored simple syrup.

Cranberry Recipes

Still craving tart cranberries? Maybe trying to figure out a way to use up the extra bag you have? Try a few of my favorite cranberry recipes.

  • square photo of Cranberry Bread sliced on a cloth.
    Cranberry Bread
  • three glasses with cranberries, sugar, lime wedges.
    Cranberry Margarita
  • Cranberry Apple Yogurt Dutch Baby
    Cranberry Apple Yogurt Dutch Baby
  • Top view of four triangle slices of flatbread with cranberry sauce on the side.
    Turkey Cranberry Flatbread

Now that you’ve discovered the secrets to making this irresistible Cranberry Raspberry Sauce, get ready to impress your guests and make your Thanksgiving feast truly unforgettable. This homemade sauce is not only simple to prepare but also a flavorful and vibrant addition to your holiday table. Enjoy the joy of cooking and celebrating with your loved ones!

If you make this cranberry raspberry sauce recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

A wooden spoon with cranberry raspberry sauce in a bowl on a blue and white stripped cloth with a jar of sauce and cranberries scattered in the background.

Cranberry Raspberry Sauce

Get ready to elevate your Thanksgiving feast with a burst of sweet and tangy flavors! In this recipe blog post, we're going to show you how to make the most irresistible homemade Cranberry Raspberry Sauce that will have your guests coming back for more.
No ratings yet
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: American
Diet: Gluten Free, Low Lactose
Prep Time: 5 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 20 minutes minutes
Resting Time: 30 minutes minutes
Total Time: 55 minutes minutes
Servings: 10
Calories: 101kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • Measuring Cups
  • Sauce Pan
  • Stove Top
  • Wooden Spoon

Ingredients

  • 12 ounces bag fresh cranberries
  • 1 cup Water
  • 1 cup White Granulated Sugar
  • 6 ounces Fresh Raspberries

Instructions

  • Rinse and drain the fresh cranberries. Pick off any stems or any bad berries. Do the same thing for the raspberries.
  • Then place them in a large sauce pan. Pour in 1 cup of water and the granulated sugar.
  • Mix well and then cook on medium-high heat for 5 minutes until the cranberries come to a boil. Reduce the heat to medium-low and cook for an additional 15-20 minutes, stirring often until the berries are cooked down and the liquid has thickened.
  • Once the cranberries are done cooking. Remove from the heat, mix well and let sit un-covered for 30 minutes. The sauce will naturally thicken. Enjoy immediately or transfer to an airtight container and store in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

Notes

  • Popping Sound – As the liquid starts to heat the cranberries will begin to make a “popping” noise. This is totally normal!
  • Fresh Fruit – Think of other fresh fruit like mango, apples, pineapples, and even grapes to add to the cranberry sauce. Make sure you dice into bite size pieces if you decide to add fruit.
  • Raspberry Flavor – For a more intense raspberry flavor you can use a raspberry concentrate in place of water or remove the sugar and use a raspberry flavored simple syrup.

Nutrition

Serving: 0.25cup | Calories: 101kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.01g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.02g | Sodium: 2mg | Potassium: 53mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 26IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 0.2mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Turkey Breast Cutlets

Published on: November 6, 2023 Updated on: November 6, 2023 by Katie 10 Comments

Turkey breast cutlets with a cream sauce in a pan.

Looking for a hearty and satisfying dinner that gives you all the Thanksgiving feels, but in under a half hour? My Turkey Breast Cutlets with gravy recipe is here to delight your taste buds while keeping things simple and delicious.

Turkey breast cutlets with a cream sauce in a pan.

Turkey breast cutlets are a fantastic canvas for creating a delectable meal without the need for traditional breadcrumbs. If you’re in search of a dish that’s rich in flavor and pairs perfectly with a savory homemade gravy, look no further. I love making turkey cutlets when I’m craving turkey, and don’t want to cook a full turkey breast. This dish is also ideal if you are only making Thanksgiving for two or four and don’t want to cook a whole bird.

In this recipe, I’ll guide you on how to prepare juicy turkey breast cutlets seasoned to perfection and served with a luscious garlic thyme gravy that will make your taste buds dance.

Why You Should Make This

Savory Comfort: These turkey breast cutlets with garlic thyme gravy offer a comforting, homestyle flavor that will warm your heart and soul.

Simple and Wholesome: This recipe is straightforward, without the need for breadcrumbs, making it a great option for those seeking a cleaner, low-carb meal.

Customizable Elegance: With the rich flavors of garlic, thyme, and Dijon mustard, you can customize this dish to your taste, making it uniquely yours.

Ingredients

Ingredients on marble counter: onion powder, paprika, salt, pepper, thyme, dijon mustard, olive oil, garlic, heavy cream, corn starch, turkey cutlets.

Turkey – A pound of thinly sliced turkey cutlets is all you need.

Seasonings – I like to use a mix of salt, pepper, onion powder, and paprika for the turkey cutlets. You will also need dried thyme for the gravy.

Garlic – I like to use two cloves of garlic that I minced into tiny pieces as the start for the flavors for my gravy.

Cream – I like to use a half cup of heavy cream; however, if you don’t have heavy cream you can use half and half!

Dijon Mustard – A little brings a nice acidic flavor to the gravy and actually balances out the cream.

Broth – A cup of chicken broth is all you need for the gravy. However, if you have turkey stock that will work too.

Cornstarch – Cornstarch is the best way to thicken up gravy without the gluten!

Directions

raw turkey breast cutlets with seasoning.

First, season each turkey cutlet with salt, onion powder, paprika, and pepper.

Heat a large skillet over medium heat and add the grapeseed oil to cover most of the skillet.

Seasoned turkey breast cutlets cooking in a pan.

Carefully place the seasoned turkey cutlets in the hot oil. Cook for about 3 minutes on each side until the internal temperature reaches 160° Fahrenheit.

Remove the turkey cutlets from the skillet and set them aside on a plate, keeping them warm by tenting foil over the top.

Cream sauce with seasonings in a pot with a spatula.

Add the minced garlic to the skillet. Cook on medium-low heat for 1 minute until fragrant and softened.

While the garlic cooks mix together the cornstarch, heavy cream, Dijon mustard, and chicken broth, whisking constantly. Then begin stirring in the liquid mixture into the skillet until it because to thickens and reaches your desired consistency (about 1-2 minutes).

cooked turkey cutlets in a cream sauce on a pan.

Season the with the dried thyme leaves. Then begin adding in the cutlets with juice into the skillet. Cover with gravy and cook for 1-2 minutes or until the internal temperature reaches 165 degrees Fahrenheit.

Serve the turkey breast cutlets with a generous ladle of the savory gravy.

FAQs

Plate with mashed potatoes, green bean casserole, and turkey breast cutlets with 2 forks, and green bean casserole in the background.
Can I use turkey breast slices instead of cutlets?

Yes, you can use turkey breast slices, but be sure to cook them evenly as they may cook faster than cutlets.

Can I make the gravy ahead of time?

No, you can’t make the gravy ahead of time for this dish. This turkey dinner cooks so quickly there truly is no need to make the gravy ahead of time. Plus you need the pan drippings from the turkey to help season your gravy!

Can I use fresh thyme instead of dried thyme in the gravy?

Absolutely! You can use fresh thyme by doubling the quantity, as dried herbs are more concentrated in flavor.

How can I ensure the cutlets remain juicy?

To keep the cutlets juicy, be careful not to overcook them. Use a meat thermometer to ensure they reach an internal temperature of 165°F (74°C).

Tips and Tricks

Turkey breast cutlets with a cream sauce in a pan on a blue and white striped cloth.
  • Don’t Overcook – You don’t want to cook the turkey cutlets all the way through in the first steps. Since the cutlets will cook a little longer in the gravy you will want to just under cook it so they can finish cooking in the gravy.
  • Vegetables – Feel free to add sautéed mushrooms or caramelized onions to the gravy for extra flavor and texture.
  • Seasonings – Enhance the flavor by experimenting with your preferred seasonings and herbs, such as rosemary, sage, or even lemon zest.

Side Dishes for Turkey

Looking for side dishes to serve with your turkey? Here are a few of my favorites.

  • White baking dish filled with toasted marshmallow casserole on a white and blue striped cloth with a silver spoon next to it.
    Old Fashioned Sweet Potato Casserole
  • White plate filled with sliced ham and scalloped potatoes.
    Cheesy Scalloped Potatoes
  • Brown pot on a marble countertop with a raw turkey breast and spices inside it.
    Brine for Turkey Breast
  • Close up of baking dish with green bean casserole on a blue and white striped cloth.
    Gluten Free Green Bean Casserole
  • A wooden spoon with cranberry raspberry sauce in a bowl on a blue and white stripped cloth with a jar of sauce and cranberries scattered in the background.
    Cranberry Raspberry Sauce
  • Skillet Green Beans
  • four different leftover thanksgiving side dishes with recipe title text on image for Pinterest.
    40+ Thanksgiving Leftover Recipes
  • Glass bowl filled with wooden spoon with mango cranberry sauce on a marble countertop.
    Mango Cranberry Sauce

If you make this recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

Turkey breast cutlets with a cream sauce in a pan.

Turkey Breast Cutlets

Looking for a hearty and satisfying dinner that gives you all the Thanksgiving feels, but in under a half hour? My Turkey Breast Cutlets with gravy recipe is here to delight your taste buds while keeping things simple and delicious.
4.41 from 5 votes
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Dinner
Cuisine: American
Diet: Gluten Free
Prep Time: 5 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 15 minutes minutes
Total Time: 20 minutes minutes
Servings: 4
Calories: 282kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • Measuring Spoons
  • Measuring Cups
  • 1 Skillet
  • 1 Silicone Spatula
  • 1 Oven

Ingredients

For the Cutlets

  • 1 pound Turkey Cutlets
  • 1 teaspoon Salt
  • 1 teaspoon Black Pepper
  • 1 teaspoon Onion Powder
  • 1 Teaspoon Paprika
  • 1 tablespoon Grapeseed Oil

For the Gravy

  • 2 Garlic Cloves minced
  • 1 tablespoon Cornstarch
  • ½ cup Heavy Cream
  • 1 cup Chicken Broth
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon Mustard
  • 1 tablespoon Dried Thyme

Instructions

For the Cutlets

  • Season each turkey cutlet with salt, onion powder, paprika, and pepper.
  • Heat a large skillet over medium heat and add the grapeseed oil to cover most of the skillet.
  • Carefully place the seasoned turkey cutlets in the hot oil. Cook for about 3 minutes on each side until the internal temperature reaches 160° Fahrenheit.
  • Remove the turkey cutlets from the skillet and set them aside on a plate, keeping them warm by tenting foil over the top.

For the Gravy

  • Add the minced garlic to the skillet. Cook on medium-low heat for 1 minute until fragrant and softened.
  • While the garlic cooks mix together the cornstarch, heavy cream, Dijon mustard, and chicken broth, whisking constantly. Then begin stirring in the liquid mixture into the skillet until it because to thickens and reaches your desired consistency (about 1-2 minutes).
  • Season the with the dried thyme leaves. Then begin adding in the cutlets with juice into the skillet. Cover with gravy and cook for 1-2 minutes or until the internal temperature reaches 165 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Serve the turkey breast cutlets with a generous ladle of the savory gravy.

Notes

  • Don’t Overcook – You don’t want to cook the turkey cutlets all the way through in the first steps. Since the cutlets will cook a little longer in the gravy you will want to just under cook it so they can finish cooking in the gravy.
  • Vegetables – Feel free to add sautéed mushrooms or caramelized onions to the gravy for extra flavor and texture.
  • Seasonings – Enhance the flavor by experimenting with your preferred seasonings and herbs, such as rosemary, sage, or even lemon zest.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 282kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 31g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 104mg | Sodium: 702mg | Potassium: 122mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 727IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 52mg | Iron: 2mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Apple Cinnamon Muffins

Published on: October 30, 2023 Updated on: October 30, 2023 by Katie Leave a Comment

2 apple cinnamon muffins on a small white plates on a blue and white checkered cloth, and 5 muffins.

Embrace the flavors of fall with this easy-to-make homemade Apple Cinnamon Muffins with a crumb top. This recipe comes together in under an hour and is the perfect way to use up a few apples!

2 apple cinnamon muffins on a small white plates on a blue and white checkered cloth, and 5 muffins, 4 apples and slices of butter in the background.

I love Fall. It’s my second favorite season to summer–let’s face it, I love the beach, grilling out daily, and daily swims in our pool. However, I welcome the cooler for us Florida weather, and all the flavors that come with fall; pumpkin and most importantly apple!

Years ago, my son was obsessed with this book called “One Hungry Monsters“. The book ends with the little boy enjoying his apple muffin that the monsters never got. Every day/night my son would proclaim that he needed an apple muffin. If you have a little one–you have to get this book. It’s the cutest, works on food, numbers, and rhyming!

I’ve now been making these Apple Cinnamon Muffins for about 5 years now. Now, that my son is older and out of the toddler stage he actually helps me make the muffins. The muffins are on repeat during the fall season when I take a break making my blueberry muffins with crumb topping. The apple muffins are my absolute favorite muffins because of that crumb topping.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why this Recipe Works

Delicious Flavor: Apple and cinnamon create a harmonious blend of sweet and spicy flavors that make these muffins irresistible. The combination of soft, tender apple pieces and warm cinnamon is a crowd-pleaser that’s perfect for breakfast or as a snack.

Seasonal Sensation: Apples are often in season during the fall, making apple cinnamon muffins a great way to celebrate the flavors of autumn. Using fresh, crisp apples adds a burst of natural sweetness and a pleasant texture to your muffins. But don’t worry you can make these muffins year round, too!

Versatility: You can customize your apple cinnamon muffins by adding various mix-ins, such as nuts, raisins, or even a drizzle of caramel. This versatility allows you to experiment and create muffins that suit your taste preferences.

Ingredients

ingredients on marble counter: flour, sugar, brown sugar, sugar butter, apples, cinnamon, egg, baking soda, baking powder, salt, milk.
  • Butter – You will need butter for both the base of the muffin and the crumb topping. For the base you need the butter to be softened so you can cream it together with the sugars. For the crumb topping, you need the butter to be cold.
  • Sugar – You need a combination of both white granulated sugar and brown sugar for both the muffin batter and the streusel topping.
  • Flour – All purpose flour works best for this recipe. You will need it for both the batter and topping.
  • Leavening Agents– A combination of baking soda and baking powder help give the muffins a nice rise and stay nice and fluffy.
  • Milk – I use 2% milk for this recipe but have also tested with whole milk and also buttermilk richer muffin.
  • Cinnamon – Two tablespoons of cinnamon are divided and used for the batter and topping.

Directions

For the Muffins

Creamed butter and sugar and egg in a stainless steel mixer.

Preheat the oven to 375° Fahrenheit. Using a stand mixer, cream the butter, granulated sugar, and ¼ cup brown sugar. Mix on medium speed until fluffy. Add the egg and mix well, stopping once to scrape the sides and bottom of the bowl.

Apple cinnamon muffin dry ingredients in a stainless steel mixer with milk poured in.

Turn the mixer off, add the flour, baking powder, baking soda, salt, and cinnamon. Turn the mixer on low speed, and slowly begin to pour in the milk.

Apple cinnamon muffin mixed batter in a stainless steel bowl with a spatula.

Mix for 30 seconds. Then add the chopped apples. Set to the side once mixed.

For the Crumb Topping

Clear bowl with crumb topping ingredients on a marble counter.
Clear bowl with cinnamon crumb topping ingredients being mashed.

In a separate bowl combine the ½ cup brown sugar, ⅓ cup flour, salted butter, and tablespoon of cinnamon.

Clear bowl with cinnamon crumb topping and fork on a marble counter.

Using a fork, mix well until small pea-sized flakes are formed. This is how it should look.

silver cupcake tin with raw muffin batter and the cumb topping being poured.

Place cupcake liners in a muffin pan. Divide the batter evenly among the prepared muffin cups. Add a tablespoon of the crumb topping to each of the muffins.

Bake the muffins for 30 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted into the center of a muffin comes out clean.

Remove the muffins from the oven, cool them for 5 minutes in the pan, then turn them out onto a wire rack to finish cooling completely. Enjoy.

FAQs

closeup of apple cinnamon streusel muffin in red paper with muffins in muffin tin faded in background.
Can I use any type of apple for these muffins?

Yes, you can use a variety of apples, but it’s generally recommended to use apples with a firm texture, such as Granny Smith, Honeycrisp, or Gala. These apples hold their shape when baked and provide a pleasant contrast to the muffin’s texture.

Can I make these muffins gluten-free or dairy-free?

Yes, you can adapt the recipe to be gluten-free by using a gluten-free flour blend and dairy-free by using almond milk or coconut oil, for instance. Be sure to check the labels of your ingredients for allergen information.

What kitchen tools do you need to make muffins?

Here are a few kitchen tools that I find very helpful when making muffins.
KitchenAid Stand Mixer, Silicone Spatula, Muffin Tin, Cupcake Liners, Large Cookie Scoop, Pot Holders, and Wire Cooling Rack.

How should I store apple cinnamon muffins?

Store your muffins in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 2-3 days, or in the refrigerator for longer freshness. To extend their shelf life, you can also freeze them in an airtight bag or container for up to 2-3 months.

Recipe Tips and Tricks

Apple Cinnamon Streusel Muffins in tin muffin pan with one in focus and the rest blurred.

Here are a few of my favorite tips and tricks when making apple muffins.

  • Apples – You need 2 cups of diced chopped apples for this recipe. I use either 2 large apples or 4 small snacking apples for this recipe.
  • Milk – I use 2% for this recipe; however, I have tested whole milk and buttermilk and both work perfectly for this recipe.
  • Avoid Overmixing: When combining the wet and dry ingredients, be careful not to overmix the batter. Overmixing can lead to tough and dry muffins. Gently fold the ingredients together until just combined.
  • Use Muffin Liners– To prevent the muffins from sticking to the pan, use paper or silicone muffin liners, or grease the muffin tin generously.
  • Don’t Overbake – Be vigilant about baking time. Overbaking can dry out the muffins. Insert a toothpick into the center of a muffin; if it comes out with a few moist crumbs, they’re done.
  • Storing – Once cooled, they can be stored in an airtight container.
  • Freezing – If you have leftovers and want to freeze them store in airtight container or freezer Ziplock bag in the freezer.
  • Thawing Muffins – To thaw, take the muffins out the night before you want to enjoy them and place in the refrigerator. They will be thawed the next morning and you can heat the muffin in the microwave or oven for a few minutes  for an easy breakfast in the morning.

Recipes with Apples

If you are still craving apples, I have a few more ways you can use them up. Here are my favorite apple recipes.

  • Glass plate filled with an apple pie with powdered sugar.
    Apple Pie with Streusel Topping
  • Instant Pot Easy Homemade Applesauce
    Instant Pot Applesauce
  • Skillet Cinnamon Apples
    Cinnamon Apples
  • Two triangel turnovers on a white plate with a powder sugar sifter resting next to it.
    Puff Pastry Apple Turnovers

If you want to make homemade muffins this fall and looking for a delicious and easy-to-make recipe this recipe for Apple Cinnamon Streusel Muffins is the winner! Perfect for a quick breakfast on the go, to sip with a warm cup of coffee, pack in a school lunch, or even snack on.

If you make my apple cinnamon muffin recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

2 apple cinnamon muffins on a small white plates on a blue and white checkered cloth, and 5 muffins.

Apple Cinnamon Muffins

Embrace the flavors of fall with this easy-to-make homemade Apple Cinnamon Muffins with a crumb top. This recipe comes together in under an hour and is the perfect way to use up a few apples!
5 from 1 vote
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Snack
Cuisine: American
Diet: Low Salt
Prep Time: 15 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 30 minutes minutes
Resting Time: 10 minutes minutes
Total Time: 55 minutes minutes
Servings: 15
Calories: 311kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • Measuring Cups
  • Measuring Spoons
  • Mixing Bowls
  • Silicone Spatula
  • KitchenAid Stand Mixer
  • Muffin Tin
  • Muffin Liners
  • Cookie Scoop

Ingredients

For the Muffins:

  • 1 stick Unsalted Butter room temperature
  • ½ cup Granulated sugar
  • ¼ cup Brown sugar
  • 1 Egg
  • 1 cup Milk
  • 2 cups All Purpose Flour
  • 1 teaspoon Baking powder
  • 1 teaspoon Baking soda
  • ¼ teaspoon Salt
  • 1 tablespoon Ground cinnamon
  • 2 large apples peeled, cored, and chopped into bite-size pieces

For the Crumb Topping:

  • ½ cup brown sugar
  • ⅓ cup All-Purpose Flour
  • ¼ cup Unsalted Butter softened at room temperature
  • 1 tablespoon Cinnamon

Instructions

For the Muffins

  • Preheat the oven to 375° Fahrenheit.
  • Using a stand mixer, cream the butter, granulated sugar, and ¼ cup brown sugar. Mix on medium speed until fluffy.
  • Add the egg and mix well, stopping once to scrape the sides and bottom of the bowl. Turn the mixer off, add the flour, baking powder, baking soda, salt, and cinnamon. Turn the mixer on low speed, and slowly begin to pour in the milk.
  • Mix for 30 seconds. Then add the chopped apples. Set to the side once mixed.

For the Crumb Topping

  • In a separate bowl combine the ½ cup brown sugar, ⅓ cup flour, salted butter, and tablespoon of cinnamon. Using a fork, mix well until small pea-sized flakes are formed.
  • Place cupcake liners in a muffin pan. Divide the batter evenly among the prepared muffin cups. Add a tablespoon of the crumb topping to each of the muffins.
  • Bake the muffins for 30 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted into the center of a muffin comes out clean.
  • Remove the muffins from the oven, cool them for 5 minutes in the pan, then turn them out onto a wire rack to finish cooling completely. Enjoy.

Notes

  • Apples – You need 2 cups of diced chopped apples for this recipe. I use either 2 large apples or 4 small snacking apples for this recipe.
  • Milk – I use 2% for this recipe; however, I have tested whole milk and buttermilk and both work perfectly for this recipe.
  • Storing – Once cooled, they can be stored in an airtight container.
  • Freezing – If you have leftovers and want to freeze them store in airtight container or freezer Ziplock bag in the freezer.
  • Thawing Muffins – To thaw, take the muffins out the night before you want to enjoy them and place in the refrigerator. They will be thawed the next morning and you can heat the muffin in the microwave or oven for a few minutes  for an easy breakfast in the morning.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 311kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 46mg | Sodium: 297mg | Potassium: 118mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 26g | Vitamin A: 427IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 78mg | Iron: 1mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

What to Serve with Chicken Pot Pie – 27 Delicious Side Dishes

Published on: October 25, 2023 Updated on: October 25, 2023 by Katie Leave a Comment

Chicken pot pie, corn bread, green beans, and cucumber tomato salad images with text on image for Pinterest.

Ever wonder what to serve with chicken pot pie? Discover a variety of mouthwatering side dishes, essential tips, and answers to your most pressing questions for creating the ultimate chicken pot pie meal.

Chicken pot pie, corn bread, green beans, and cucumber tomato salad images with text on image for Pinterest.

When it comes to comfort food, few dishes can compete with the timeless classic, chicken pot pie. Its rich, creamy filling and flaky crust make it a beloved staple on dinner tables across the world. But what side dishes go with say an individual chicken pot pie to create a well-rounded, satisfying meal? I love putting together these round-up style post because I often have friends stumped and ask questions like what to serve with chicken pot pie? That’s why I’m here to help you explore a variety of side dishes, share some tips and tricks, and answer common questions about this beloved dish.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Side Dishes for Chicken Pot Pie

white plate with a slice of chicken pot pie on a blue and white stripped cloth, a spoon, a fork, and carrots in the background.

Here are just some of the sides I like to serve with a chicken pot pie. If you scroll down you can click on some of my favorite recipes that pair perfectly.

  1. Green Salad: A fresh, crisp green salad is an ideal accompaniment. The lightness of the salad provides a nice contrast to the richness of the pot pie. Choose a mix of greens, add some sliced cucumbers, cherry tomatoes, and a zesty vinaigrette dressing.
  2. Roasted Vegetables: Roasting vegetables like carrots, broccoli, or Brussels sprouts is a fantastic way to add color, nutrition, and a delightful roasted flavor to your meal. A drizzle of olive oil, some herbs, and a sprinkle of salt and pepper will elevate the veggies.
  3. Mashed Potatoes: This classic side dish pairs beautifully with chicken pot pie. Creamy mashed potatoes provide a hearty base that complements the pot pie’s creamy filling. Feel free to add some garlic or herbs for extra flavor.
  4. Corn on the Cob: A simple but satisfying choice, corn on the cob is a great addition to your meal. It’s easy to prepare, and the sweet, juicy kernels balance the savory nature of chicken pot pie.
  5. Cranberry Sauce: If you love a sweet-and-savory combination, consider serving cranberry sauce as a condiment. The tartness of cranberries complements the richness of the pot pie, creating a delightful contrast of flavors.
  6. Soup: A cup of soup, such as tomato, butternut squash, or potato leek, can be a comforting starter. It warms you up and prepares your taste buds for the main course.
  7. Biscuits or Dinner Rolls: Soft, fluffy biscuits or dinner rolls are a fantastic way to soak up every last bit of that delicious pot pie filling. They also add a delightful carb element to your meal.

Frequently Asked Questions

Baked pie with a slice removed and sitting on a white plate with a fork.

Here are some of the most commonly asked questions when making chicken pot pie, how to freeze, how to make pot pie healthier, and more!

Can I make chicken pot pie in advance?

Yes, you can prepare chicken pot pie in advance and refrigerate it. To serve, reheat it in the oven until it’s hot and bubbly.

Can I freeze chicken pot pie?

Absolutely! Chicken pot pie freezes well. Just be sure to wrap it tightly and label it with the date so you can enjoy it within a few months.

Can I use store-bought crust?

Yes, you can use pre-made pie crusts for convenience. However, homemade crusts provide a more personal touch and often better flavor.

How can I make my chicken pot pie healthier?

You can make chicken pot pie healthier by using less butter or cream, adding more vegetables, and opting for a whole wheat crust or a phyllo dough topping.

What can I do with leftovers?

Leftover chicken pot pie can be enjoyed the next day or repurposed into a pot pie casserole, turnovers, or even used as a filling for a sandwich.

Tips and Tricks for Making Chicken Pot Pie

Pie baked in a glass pie dish with white and blue striped cloth next to it and celery and carrots in the background.

Now that we’ve explored some great side dish options, let’s dive into some tips and tricks for serving chicken pot pie:

  • Don’t Overcrowd: When serving chicken pot pie, remember that it’s a substantial dish on its own. Avoid overloading your plate with too many side dishes, as it can be overwhelming.
  • Balance Flavors: Strive for a balance of flavors and textures. If your pot pie is rich and creamy, opt for lighter and crisper side dishes. If your pot pie is more on the plain side, consider sides with stronger flavors.
  • Timing is Key: Make sure your side dishes are ready and hot when you serve the pot pie. No one wants to eat lukewarm or cold sides with a piping hot pot pie.
  • Garnish: A sprinkle of fresh herbs or grated cheese on top of your pot pie adds visual appeal and an extra layer of flavor.
  • Individual Portions: For a more elegant presentation, consider making mini chicken pot pies or serving the dish in individual ramekins.

Sides for Chicken Pot Pie

Honey Cornbread Muffins

White plate with 5 muffins stacked and one corn muffin split with butter on top.
Delicious Honey Cornbread Muffins are moist, sweet and full of flavor. This cornbread muffin recipe is made from scratch in under a half hour!
Check out this recipe

Honey Butter Crescent Rolls

Square photo of an oval platter on a white countertop with baked croissants on top.
Make these Honey Butter Crescent Rolls the star of your next dinner. With just four simply ingredients and within 15 minutes time you will have an irresistible side that your friends and family will be going back for seconds and thirds!
Check out this recipe

Homemade Garlic Knots

Homemade Garlic Knots
Soft, fluffy, Homemade Garlic Knots are baked to a lovely golden brown, then brushed with seasoned garlic butter. These knots have oodles of flavor and a gorgeous, tender texture and perfect with a pot pie.
Check out this recipe

Garlic Cheese Bread

Two loaves of garlic cheese bread with one cut into 4 pieces resting on a wood cutting board.
Garlic cheese bread is a delicious and easy-to-make side dish that compliments any Italian dinner. This cheese bread is sure to satisfy your cravings and is made by using a loaf of freshly baked French bread from your local bakery, softened butter, my secret ingredient, herbs, and of course cheese.
Check out this recipe

Beer Bread

sliced Beer Bread resting on a plaid dish cloth.
Scared to bake with yeast? Make a loaf of this four ingredient beer bread recipe. Fresh thick homemade bread made in under an hours time with no resting time needed!
Check out this recipe

Buttermilk Biscuits

Buttermilk Biscuits
Melt-in-your mouth homemade buttermilk biscuits made in your kitchen in less than 30 minutes time! With just a few ingredients your next breakfast or brunch will be complete.
Check out this recipe

House Salad

Two white bowls filled with salad and forks and veggies next to it.
Explore the ultimate chopped romaine house salad recipe, featuring a harmonious blend of fresh vegetables, cheese, and croutons. Elevate your dining experience with this easy-to-make, nutrient-packed, and irresistibly delicious dish!
Check out this recipe

Roasted Acorn Squash & Pear Quinoa Salad

Roasted Acorn Squash & Pear Quinoa Salad
Spiced acorn squash, pears and quinoa cook simultaneously in the oven before being tossed with dried cranberries, pecans, goat cheese, and fresh arugula. This fall inspired salad will pair perfectly with a hearty pot pie.
Check out this recipe

Panera Greek Salad

Square photo of 2 bowls of greek salad with a red and white striped napkin.
Craving a Panera Greek Salad? Make it at home using romaine, cucumbers, tomatoes, olives, feta, red onion, and pepperocini's! This salad takes less then 10 minutes together and can feed 1-4 people.
Check out this recipe

Kale and Brussels Sprouts Salad with a Maple Dijon Vinaigrette

Kale and Brussels Sprouts Salad with a Maple Dijon Vinaigrette
This Kale and Brussels Sprouts Salad with a Maple Dijon Vinaigrette is the perfect salad for fall. It’s so fresh and flavorful and balances the heaviness of a pot pie.
Check out this recipe

Tomato and Onion Salad

Blue bowl filled with tomatoes, red onions, and herbs.
My Tomato and Onion Salad with Balsamic Vinegar comes together in minutes and is perfect as a make ahead summer side dish recipe. Full of fresh beef stake tomatoes, red onions, balsamic dressing and fresh herbs–it marinates for 4 hours for an ultra flavorful accompaniment to any barbecue dinner.
Check out this recipe

Chopped BLT Salad with Corn

Chopped BLT Salad with Corn
This Chopped BLT Salad with Corn will quickly become your go-to salad and pairs perfectly with a hearty chicken pot pie. Tossed in an herby basil vinaigrette, you’ll make this chopped salad all year long!
Check out this recipe

Beet Salad with Feta

White oval dish filled with beets, feta, spinach, and balsamic drizzle.
Beet Salad with Feta is a delicious easy salad that consists of spinach, cooked beets, creamy feta cheese, green onions with a drizzle of olive oil and balsamic reduction. This gluten free recipe comes together within 10 minutes and is perfect for entertaining a crowd.
Check out this recipe

Instant Pot Garlic Mashed Potatoes

White bowl with fluffy mashed potatoes topped with butter and parsley.
Make perfect creamy homemade mashed potatoes every single time with my easy-to-make recipe for Instant Pot Garlic Mashed Potatoes. This classic side dish is made within 30 minutes with fresh ingredients.
Check out this recipe

Air Fryer Green Beans

White bowl of green beans with garlic divided up close.
If you are looking for an easy side dish to make my Air Fryer Green Beans recipe is done in under 10 minutes and yields a flavorful side dish everyone is going to love.
Check out this recipe

Roasted Brussel Sprouts and Carrots

White bowl filled with roasted baby carrots and brussels sprouts.
Roasted Brussels sprouts and carrots are a delicious and easy side dish recipe that compliments just about any meal. Simply place the vegetables on a sheet pan, drizzle with olive oil, season with salt and pepper, and roast in the oven. In under an hours time you will have a delectable side dish that no one will be able to resist.
Check out this recipe

Instant Pot Garlic & Onion Green Beans

Instant Pot Garlic & Onion Green Beans
This recipe for Instant Pot Garlic & Onion Green Beans is an easy side dish perfect for any meal and made in under 10 minutes time!
Check out this recipe

Sauteed Zucchini and Tomatoes

Close up shot of sautéed zucchini and tomatoes resting in a pan.
Looking for an easy vegetarian side dish to serve along with dinner? My Sauteed Zucchini and Tomatoes recipe is done in 15 minutes and full of flavor.
Check out this recipe

Easy Roasted Broccoli

Easy Roasted Broccoli
Easy Roasted Broccoli is the perfect side dish; crispy on the outside + tender on the inside, say hello to your new favorite broccoli recipe! Broccoli always pairs well with pot pie and will add a dash of greens to your plate.
Check out this recipe

Instant Pot Carrots

Square photo of a white bowl filled with cooked baby carrots.
Instant Pot Carrots are perfectly cooked and done from start to finish in about 15 minutes. This is an easy side dish for dinner or cooking for a large group of people. It's versatile and can be customized to fit your needs.
Check out this recipe

Sauteed Green Beans & Leeks

Sauteed Green Beans & Leeks
Change up your side dish routine and make my easy and unique recipe for Sauteed Green Beans & Leeks.
Check out this recipe

Easy Oven Roasted Vegetables

Easy Oven Roasted Vegetables
Oven Roasted Vegetables are deliciously tender and roasted in a crave-worthy seasoning blend to add an extra serving a veggies to your plate. Get tips for perfect roast veggies side dish every time!
Check out this recipe

Instant Pot Asparagus

Cooked asparagus on a white platter topped with salt and pepper.
Instant Pot Asparagus is done from start to finish in 5 minutes making for an easy weeknight side dish.
Check out this recipe

Slow Cooker Honey Glazed Carrots

Need a healthy side dish to feed a crowd? Try this recipe for Slow Cooker Honey Glazed Carrots–they take less than 5 minutes to prepare and 3 hours of no fuss cooking!
Check out this recipe

Sautéed Spinach

Sautéed Spinach
This delicious sauteed spinach recipe is a quick and easy side dish and a great way to add extra green to your plate. The fresh greens are cooked in olive oil with garlic and lemon juice.
Check out this recipe

Skillet Green Beans

Skillet Green Beans are made in just 15 minutes and bursting with flavor with sauteed bell peppers and garlic. These green beans are like no other side dish you have ever had.
Check out this recipe

Instant Pot Corn on the Cob

four corn on the cobs in an Instant Pot.
Simplify cooking buttery corn on the cob and follow my easy recipe for Instant Pot Corn on the Cob. This easy summertime side dish is made in just 10 minutes and cooked to perfection EVERY time! 
Check out this recipe

What you serve with chicken pot pie can enhance the dining experience, making it even more satisfying. Whether you choose a fresh salad, roasted vegetables, or creamy mashed potatoes, there are numerous delicious options to complement this beloved comfort food. By following our tips and tricks and addressing common questions, you’ll be well-prepared to serve a memorable meal centered around the start dish, chicken pot pie.

Creamy Chicken Pot Pie

Published on: October 19, 2023 Updated on: September 18, 2025 by Katie 2 Comments

Pie with a slice taken out and a piece of savory pie resting on spinach on a white plate.

Whip up this creamy chicken pot pie in under an hour—made with fresh ingredients, wrapped in a golden, flaky crust, and guaranteed to be a family favorite.

Golden brown baked pie with a slice missing--slice on top of a bed of spinach on a white plate with vegetables next to the pie.

There’s something truly special about a chicken pot pie. Tender chicken, hearty vegetables, and a creamy sauce tucked inside a golden, flaky crust—comfort food at its finest. I didn’t grow up eating it, but my husband did, and he often reminisced about devouring frozen mini pies as a teen. When we moved in together, I started experimenting. At first, I used canned soups, but once I perfected my own homemade cream sauce, I never looked back.

Since then, I’ve created mini pot pies with puff pastry and even a one-pot chicken pot pie pasta. And while it may seem like a time-intensive dish, it doesn’t have to be. With store-bought pie crusts, fresh veggies, pre-cooked chicken (hello leftover roasted chicken or even a $6 Costco rotisserie chicken), and a few pantry staples, this creamy chicken pot pie comes together in under an hour—no canned soups required.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why this Recipe Works

Homemade Goodness – Frozen pot pies are fine in a pinch, but nothing compares to the flavor of homemade. You’ll taste the difference with every bite.

No Canned Soups – This creamy filling is made from scratch, so you get real, wholesome flavor—no shortcuts, no preservatives, and best of all you know what you are eating!

Quick and Easy – Thanks to store-bought pie crust, this recipe comes together fast. You can even whip it up on a busy evening when comfort food is calling.

Ingredients

  • Chicken – The beauty of this recipe is that you can use precooked chicken for the filling. It’s honestly, the only way I make chicken pot pie as it saves so much time. Whether you have leftover roasted chicken, or simply purchased a rotisserie from the grocery store. A few cups of precooked chicken is all you need.
  • Vegetables – I like to use a mix of carrots, celery, onion, green peas, and mushrooms in my chicken pot pie filling.
  • Seasonings – A mix of salt, pepper, and poultry seasoning flavors the homemade cream sauce balancing out this savory sauce. I also like to sprinkle kosher salt and cracked black pepper on top of the pie crust before baking. It elevates the pie crust.
  • Milk – You can use any type of milk for this recipe. I always have 2% on hand so that’s what I use. You can also use half and half or half heavy cream for a richer pot pie (just know the calories will change).
  • Broth – I like to use chicken broth to help cook the harder vegetables. This helps boil/steam them and makes them break down faster. No one wants a crunchy carrot in their pie.
  • Pie Crust – I always lean toward store bought pie crust. This saves so much time and energy and tastes just as good as the homemade variety. Make sure you bring the pie crust to room temperature prior to rolling out or else it will break and crumble as you roll it out.
  • Egg – To achieve the shiny crust you’ll want one egg, mixed well that you will brush on to the top of the pie crust prior to baking.

Step-By-Step Directions

Brown skillet filled with potatoes, carrots, peas, and mushrooms.

Start by making the filling. In a large skillet, melt the butter over medium-high heat. Add the carrots, celery, and onion, and sauté for 2–3 minutes until they begin to soften. Pour in the chicken broth, cover, and cook for 10 minutes, stirring occasionally.

Next, prepare the crust. Preheat your oven to 400°F so it’s ready to go once the filling is done.

Hand holding a fork and poking on pie dough on a glass pie plate.

While the vegetables cook, roll out one pie crust and place it in a pie plate. Crimp the edges, then use a fork to prick the bottom. Pre-bake for 15 minutes, just until the crust begins to set.

Once the veggies are partly cooked, stir in the diced mushrooms, peas, poultry seasoning, salt, and pepper. Let simmer for a few minutes to blend the flavors.

Brown skillet filled with diced chicken, carrots, peas, potatoes, and mushrooms.

While the vegetables cook, whisk the milk and cornstarch together in a small bowl until smooth. Pour the mixture into the skillet, stirring well to combine. Cook over medium heat for about 5 minutes, until the sauce thickens (don’t worry if it looks thin at first—it will thicken as it cooks). Stir in the cooked chicken, mix until evenly coated, then remove from heat and set aside.

Glass pie plate with chicken, carrots, and peas on top of pie crust.

Remove the crust from the oven and carefully spoon the chicken pot pie filling into the pre-baked shell.

Hand crimping pie crust around a glass pie plate resting on a brown baking sheet.

Roll out the second pie crust and place it over the filling. Carefully crimp the edges to seal—remember, the pie plate will be very hot, so take caution when handling.

Hand holding a pastry brush, brushing egg wash on a raw pie crust.
Raw pie dough over a pie plate with five long slits in the middle and salt and pepper on top.

Cut a few small slits in the top crust to allow steam to escape. Brush with a beaten egg, then sprinkle with salt and cracked black pepper.

chicken pot pie on a blue and white striped cloth with celery, carrots, plate, fork, and spoon in the background

Bake for 30 minutes, just until the crust is golden brown, since the filling is already cooked and warm. Carefully remove from the oven and let the pie rest for 10 minutes before slicing and serving.

Recipe FAQs

white plate with a slice of chicken pot pie on a blue and white stripped cloth, a spoon, a fork, and carrots in the background.
Can I use leftover roasted chicken in this recipe?

Absolutely! In fact, the key to making this recipe go faster is using pre-cooked chicken. So if you plan correctly you can use leftover roasted or rotisserie chicken which will cut about a half hour of your cooking time.

Can I use different vegetables?

Of course! Feel free to customize your pot pie with your favorite vegetables. Broccoli, mushrooms, and green beans are all great options.

Can I make this ahead of time?

Yes, you can assemble the pie, cover it, and refrigerate it for a few hours or even overnight. I advise you to take it out of the refrigerator a half hour before baking so you can cut the chill from the pie.

How can I make chicken pot pie healthier?

Yes! Use less butter or cream, swap in unsweetened almond or cashew milk, and load up on extra veggies like mushrooms. You can also try a whole wheat crust—or even skip the bottom crust and top with phyllo dough for a lighter twist.

Why do I need to pre-bake the bottom crust?

Pre-baking (or blind baking) keeps the bottom crust from getting soggy once the filling is added. It creates a sturdier base and ensures that your pie is cooked through.

My filling looks thin—did I do something wrong?

Not at all! The sauce thickens as it simmers and even more as the pie bakes and cools. Be patient, and you’ll get that creamy consistency.

Why do I need to let the pot pie rest before serving?

Resting gives the creamy filling time to set, so your slices hold together instead of spilling out.

Can I freeze chicken pot pie?

Yes, chicken pot pie freezes well. Just be sure to either store it in a freezer proof container or wrap it tightly and store in a Ziplock freezer bag. Make sure to label it with the recipe name and date so you can enjoy it within a few months.

Helpful Tips and Tricks

chicken pot pie with one slice cut out on a blue and white stripped cloth, a plate with a slice of chicken pot pie, a spoon, a fork, and carrots

Here are some of my most helpful tips and tricks when I make my chicken pot pie recipe.

  • Save Time – To save time, you can use frozen mixed vegetables, frozen peas and carrots mix, or any other type of frozen veggies.
  • Shiny Crust – For an extra glossy crust, you can brush the top with a beaten egg before baking. I always sprinkle salt and cracked black pepper on to the crust before I bake it.
  • Edges Browning – If the edges of the crust begin to brown too quickly, cover them with aluminum foil to prevent burning. This is actually something I suggest doing when you pre-bake the crust.
  • Rest – Let the pot pie rest for a few minutes after baking to allow the filling to set before slicing.
  • Garnish: A sprinkle of fresh herbs or grated cheese on top of your pot pie adds visual appeal and an extra layer of flavor.
  • Serve with Spinach – I always serve chicken pot pie over a bed of spinach. The spinach will wilt and adds an additional layer of flavor and veggies to the dinner.
  • Individual Portions: For a more elegant presentation, consider making mini chicken pot pies or serving the dish in individual ramekins.
  • Refrigerated Pie Crust – When you are ready to start making this recipe make sure to bring your pie crust out of the refrigerator and let sit at room temperature for at least 15 minutes. It will be much easier to handle.
  • Vegetables – Want to add more vegetables to your pot pie? Try adding 2-4 parsnips, 1-2 peeled and diced white potatoes, sweet potatoes, green beans, and/or corn kernels.
  • Crust – Instead of pie crust you can use raw biscuits on top or even puff pastry. If you use one of these options you’ll just omit the pre-baking of pie crust step as you won’t have pie crust on the bottom. Baking time might be a little less depending on what you decide to use.
  • Canned Soups – When I first started making this recipe I would use 1 can of cream of chicken and 1 can of cream of mushroom soups instead of making a homemade creamy sauce. If you want to use canned soups instead simply replace the canned soups during the step when you mix the milk and cornstarch together. Pour the soups into the cooked veggie mixture instead.

This Chicken Pot Pie recipe is a comforting, homemade classic that’s sure to become a staple in your kitchen. It’s easy to make, full of flavor, and perfect for sharing with loved ones. Enjoy!

If you make this chicken pot pie recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

Pie with a slice taken out and a piece of savory pie resting on spinach on a white plate.

Creamy Chicken Pot Pie

Whip up this creamy chicken pot pie in under an hour—made with fresh ingredients, wrapped in a golden, flaky crust, and guaranteed to be a family favorite.
4.50 from 2 votes
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: American
Diet: Low Salt
Prep Time: 15 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 45 minutes minutes
Resting Time: 10 minutes minutes
Total Time: 1 hour hour 10 minutes minutes
Servings: 6
Calories: 533kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • Measuring Cups
  • Measuring Spoons
  • Stove Top
  • Silicone Spatula
  • Knife
  • Cutting Board
  • Pie Plate
  • Oven

Ingredients

  • 2 Refrigerated Pie Crust room temperature
  • 3 tablespoons butter melted
  • 4 Carrots peeled and diced
  • 4 Celery Stalks diced
  • 1 Onion diced
  • 1 cup Chicken Broth
  • 1 cup Mushrooms diced
  • 1 cup Frozen Green Peas
  • 1 tablespoon Poultry seasoning dried thyme, and parsley
  • ½ teaspoon Salt
  • ¼ teaspoon Black pepper
  • 1½ cups Milk
  • 1 tablespoon Cornstarch
  • 3 cups Cooked Chicken shredded or chopped into bite size pieces
  • 1 Egg
  • Salt and cracked black pepper for topping on pie crust

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • In a large skillet melt the butter on medium-high heat. Add in the carrots, celery, and onion, stirring and cooking for 2-3 minutes. Then, mix well and add in the chicken broth. Cook on medium-high heat with lid on for 10 minutes, Stirring occasionally.
  • While the vegetables cook, roll out one of the pie crust. Place over the top of a pie plate and crimp edges. Poke the bottom of the pie crust with the tines of a fork. Pre-bake crust for 15 minutes until the crust starts to harden and set.
  • Once the veggies are semi-cooked add the diced mushrooms, green peas, 1 tablespoon poultry seasoning, ½ teaspoon salt and ¼ teaspoon black pepper. Mix well and let simmer for a few minutes.
  • While vegetables continue to cook, using a small bowl, combine the milk and cornstarch until well blended. Pour the mix into the pot and mix until well incorporated. Cook on medium heat for 5 minutes until the mixture thickens (the sauce will begin to thicken over time). Add the cooked diced/shredded chicken, mix well, and then remove from heat and set to the side.
  • Remove the semi-cooked pie crust from oven. Carefully, pour the chicken pot pie filling into the pre-baked crust.
  • Roll out the second pie crust. Place on top of the pot pie. Carefully crimp edges to secure pie crust (remember pie plate is very hot, so be very careful with this step). Cut a few slits in the top of the pie crust. Brush the top of the pie crust with a beaten egg and sprinkle salt and cracked black pepper on top.
  • Bake for 30 minutes until pie crust is golden brown. Carefully remove from the oven and let sit for 10 minutes. Slice and serve immediately.

Notes

  • Refrigerated Pie Crust – When you are ready to start making this recipe make sure to bring your pie crust out of the refrigerator and let sit at room temperature for at least 15 minutes. It will be much easier to handle.
  • Vegetables – Want to add more vegetables to your pot pie? Try adding 2-4 parsnips, 1-2 peeled and diced white potatoes, sweet potatoes, green beans, and/or corn kernels.
  • Crust – Instead of pie crust you can use raw biscuits on top or even puff pastry. If you use one of these options you’ll just omit the pre-baking of pie crust step as you won’t have pie crust on the bottom. Baking time might be a little less depending on what you decide to use.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 533kcal | Carbohydrates: 42g | Protein: 31g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 109mg | Sodium: 601mg | Potassium: 651mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 7338IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 136mg | Iron: 3mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Cabbage Roll Soup

Published on: October 17, 2023 Updated on: October 17, 2023 by Katie Leave a Comment

close up of bowl with stuffed cabbage soup and a spoon.

Cabbage Roll Soup tastes just like traditional stuffed cabbage but in the soup form. This hearty soup recipe is loaded with ground beef, onions, cabbage, tomatoes, and rice. A delicious alternative when you are craving comfort food, but don’t want to spend hours making cabbage rolls.

pot of stuffed cabbage soup with slices of bread in the background

We love stuffed cabbage in my home. So it was only natural that I transform it into a hearty bowl of soup. This cabbage roll soup takes all the flavors of traditional cabbage rolls and transforms them into a hearty, one-pot wonder that’s easy to make and even easier to enjoy. When I’m craving a golumpki (known in Polish as gołąbki) this soup totally fulfills it. Even if you are not familiar with stuffed cabbage, but you like ground beef, rice, cabbage, and tomatoes you’ll love this soup.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why this Recipe Works

Time-saving Twist: Experience the delightful flavors of cabbage rolls without the hassle of stuffing each individual leaf—this soup simplifies the process and saves time.

Versatility: This soup recipe is highly adaptable, allowing you to customize the ingredients to your taste, making it perfect for various dietary preferences and restrictions.

Cold-Weather Comfort: With its rich tomato base, tender cabbage, and a medley of spices, this soup is a satisfying and heartwarming meal for those chilly winter nights.

Ingredients

ingredients on the marble counter: beef broth, cabbage, tomato sauce, diced tomatoes, onion, ground beef, rice, pepper
  • Ground Beef – One pound of lean ground beef is all you need to create this hearty soup recipe.
  • Tomatoes – I used a can of diced tomatoes as well as tomato sauce to give that rich tomato base.
  • Cabbage – One head of cabbage cut into 1-inch chunks boil down perfectly. I love the balance it gives.
  • Rice – A half cup of rice will be more than enough for this pot of soup. This is one soup where I cook the rice in the broth.
  • Broth – Beef broth brings out the ground beef and also is the prefect base.
  • Onion – One onion diced, will caramelize and cook with the beef adding an additional layer of flavor.

Directions

Pot on the stove filled with ingredients for stuffed cabbage soup

In a large stock pot begin to cook the lean ground beef on medium heat. Breaking up the ground beef into bite-size pieces. After about 5 minutes of cooking while it’s halfway brown add in the diced onion. Continue to saute and break up the meat.

Drain any excess oil from the pot.

green pot on the stove filled with ingredients for stuffed cabbage soup

Add the chopped cabbage to the pot and mix it. Then add in the diced tomatoes, tomato sauce, Italian seasoning, salt, and pepper.

green pot on the stove filled with ingredients for stuffed cabbage soup and broth pouring in.

Pour the beef broth into the pot. Then mix well.

Pot on the stove filled with ingredients for stuffed cabbage soup and broth

Bring the soup to a boil then reduce the heat to a simmer for 20 minutes (stirring occasionally).

a pot full of cabbage soup on green fabric and a ladle with soup.

Once the cabbage is partially cooked add in the rice. Cook for an additional 15 minutes stirring often until rice is cooked. Divide soup evenly among bowls and enjoy.

FAQs

a pot full of cabbage soup on green fabric and a ladle and slices of bread and white bowls in the background.
Does cabbage freeze well in soup?

Yes, cabbage freezes fine in soup. You can freeze it up to 6 months in a freezer-safe container.

Does simmering soup longer make it taste better?

For the most part, yes. The longer you simmer soup the longer the flavors will blend together making for an even more flavorful soup.

Should you cook soup with lid on or off?

When you leave the lid off the liquid will evaporate quicker. If you simmer the soup with the lid on it will keep the broth from evaporating therefor leaving you with more broth.

Can I make this soup vegetarian or vegan?

Absolutely! You can use plant-based ground meat substitutes and vegetable broth to create a vegetarian or vegan version of this soup.

Can I use different types of cabbage?

Yes, you can experiment with green, red, or savoy cabbage for unique flavors and textures.

What does cabbage roll soup taste like?

Cabbage Roll Soup tastes like a comforting blend of savory ground meat, the natural sweetness of cabbage, and the aromatic medley of herbs and spices, all simmered in a rich, tomato-based broth that will transport your taste buds to a cozy, homemade meal.

Tips & Tricks

two white bowls with stuffed cabbage soup on green fabric with a pot of soup and slices of bread in the background.

Here are a few of my favorite tips and tricks when making my stuffed cabbage soup recipe.

  • Cabbage – If you can only find a large head of cabbage use only half. Make sure you cut the pieces into bite-size pieces.
  • Rice – If I have cooked rice on hand I will add it to the soup once the cabbage is cooked. This will reduce the cooking time by 15 minutes.
  • Broth – This soup is a thick and hearty soup. Therefor, the next day you will find it more stew like as the rice will absorb all the broth. You have two options. You can add an additional 32 ounce box of beef broth to the soup the next day as you reheat it OR you can simply leave the rice out and just add it to individual bowls. This will ensure that the rice does not absorb the broth.

What to serve with Stuffed Cabbage Soup

  • Two white bowls filled with salad and forks and veggies next to it.
    House Salad
  • Broccoli Crunch Salad
  • Two loaves of garlic cheese bread with one cut into 4 pieces resting on a wood cutting board.
    Garlic Cheese Bread

If you make this cabbage roll soup recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

close up of bowl with stuffed cabbage soup and a spoon.

Cabbage Roll Soup

Cabbage Roll Soup tastes just like traditional stuffed cabbage but in the soup form. This hearty soup recipe is loaded with ground beef, onions, cabbage, tomatoes, and rice. A delicious alternative when you are craving comfort food, but don't want to spend hours making cabbage rolls.
No ratings yet
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Soup
Cuisine: American, Polish
Diet: Gluten Free, Low Lactose
Prep Time: 10 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 35 minutes minutes
Total Time: 45 minutes minutes
Servings: 8
Calories: 216kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • 1 Large Stock Pot
  • 1 Wooden Spoon
  • 1 Cutting Board
  • 1 Knife
  • 1 Soup Ladle

Ingredients

  • 1.25 pounds Lean Ground Beef
  • 1 Onion diced
  • 1 Small Head of Cabbage chopped into bite-size pieces
  • 15 ounces Diced Canned Tomatoes
  • 15 ounces Tomato Sauce
  • 1 tablespoon Italian Seasoning
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher Salt
  • ¼ teaspoon Black Pepper
  • 64 ounces Beef broth
  • ½ cup White Rice

Instructions

  • In a large stock pot begin to cook the lean ground beef on medium heat. Breaking up the ground beef into bite-size pieces. After about 5 minutes of cooking while it's halfway brown add in the diced onion. Continue to saute and break up the meat.
    1.25 pounds Lean Ground Beef, 1 Onion
  • Drain any excess oil from the pot.
  • Add the chopped cabbage to the pot and mix it. Then add in the diced tomatoes, tomato sauce, Italian seasoning, salt, and pepper. Pour the beef broth into the pot. Then mix well.
    1 Small Head of Cabbage, 15 ounces Diced Canned Tomatoes, 15 ounces Tomato Sauce, 1 tablespoon Italian Seasoning, ½ teaspoon Kosher Salt, ¼ teaspoon Black Pepper, 64 ounces Beef broth
  • Bring the soup to a boil then reduce the heat to a simmer for 20 minutes (stirring occasionally).
  • Once the cabbage is partially cooked add in the rice. Cook for an additional 15 minutes stirring often until rice is cooked. Divide soup evenly among bowls and enjoy.
    ½ cup White Rice

Notes

  • Cabbage – If you can only find a large head of cabbage use only half. Make sure you cut the pieces into bite-size pieces.
  • Rice – If I have cooked rice on hand I will add it to the soup once the cabbage is cooked. This will reduce the cooking time by 15 minutes.

Nutrition

Serving: 8ounces | Calories: 216kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 21g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 44mg | Sodium: 1391mg | Potassium: 761mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 565IU | Vitamin C: 47mg | Calcium: 106mg | Iron: 4mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Chocolate Sugar Cookies

Published on: October 12, 2023 Updated on: October 12, 2023 by Katie 7 Comments

4 chocolate sugar cookies on a white plate with a pink striped white cloth in the background.

Chocolate Sugar Cookies rival the vanilla counter part. These cookies have a soft and chewy texture with a little crunch thanks to being rolled in granulated sugar. These cookies come together within 30 minutes and are perfect for any occasion whether a cookie swap or simply craving chocolate.

4 chocolate sugar cookies on a white plate with a pink striped white cloth in the background with a glass of milk and 3 baked cookies on a cookie sheet.

My chocolate sugar cookies recipe is one of my all-time favorites because it embodies the perfect balance between simplicity and deliciousness. When I’m in the mood for a sweet treat but don’t want to spend hours in the kitchen, this recipe always comes to the rescue! Chocolate sugar cookies are relatively simple to prepare, uses common pantry and refrigerated ingredients, and the dough can be quickly mixed and shaped into cookies.

They are rich in chocolate flavor but not too intense, perfect for chocolate lovers or anyone with a sweet tooth. These cookies are extremely versatile. They can be enjoyed plain, with a glass of milk, or used as a base for various toppings and mix-ins, such as nuts, chocolate chips, dried fruit or even rolled out and frosted with icing and sprinkles. The versatility makes them suitable for different tastes and occasions.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why this Recipe Works

Quick Baking – This recipe can be made on your own time! You can either bake it right after you make the dough, or refrigerate the dough for up to one day and bake it later. Just remember if you refrigerate the dough you should probably pre-scoop since the dough will harden thanks to the butter. 

Everyday Ingredients – This cookie recipe uses basic every-day pantry and refrigerator ingredients such as butter and eggs, flour, sugar, baking soda and baking powder, vanilla extract, and of course cocoa powder. 

Versatile – These chocolate cookies are versatile. They can be customized with various toppings and mix-ins, such as chopped almonds, pecans, or walnuts, mini chocolate chips, peanut butter chips, or even white chocolate chips, and dried fruit such as cranberries or blueberries. This cookie dough can be used for chocolate cut out cookies that can be frosted with icing and topped with sprinkles.

Ingredients

ingredients on marble counter; flour, brown sugar, sugar, vanilla extract, salt, baking soda, baking powder, eggs, two sticks of butter, an cocoa powder
  • Butter – I always only have salted butter on hand, but most people like to bake with unsalted butter. Either will work! Don’t forget to take out the butter ahead of time for it to get to room temperature.
  • Sugar – You will need both brown sugar and granulated sugar for this recipe. This combo is what gives the cookies its sweet tasting flavor both inside and out. The granulated sugar will give the outside of the cookie a nice little crunch. 
  • Eggs – I also like to take out my eggs when I take out my butter to get my refrigerated ingredients to room temperature. This helps when baking to ensure all ingredients are at the same temperature. 
  • Vanilla Extract – A high quality vanilla extract will bring your cookies to the next level. 
  • All-Purpose Flour – This is the base for my cookie dough batter and the only flour I ever use for this cookie recipe. I’m unsure how these cookies would bake if you substitute the flour for whole wheat, peanut flour, or even gluten free flour. If you try a different type of flour feel free to let me know how they turned out in the comments below. 
  • Cocoa Powder – A high quality cocoa powder for this recipe is key. This will give the chocolate flavor to the cookie.
  • Baking Soda & Baking Powder – These are leavening agents in cookies, helping them rise by releasing carbon dioxide gas when exposed to heat, resulting in a softer and more delicate texture.
  • Salt – The salt cuts the flour taste just enough, but doesn’t make it overly salty.

Directions

yellow mixer with creamed butter and sugar on a gray marble counter.

First preheat the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit. Using a KitchenAid stand mixer fitted with a paddle attachment, begin to cream the butter, brown sugar and a some of the granulated sugar together. Mix together on medium speed for 2 minutes until creamy.

Then add the eggs one at a time into the mixer while the mixer is on low speed. Pour in the vanilla extract. Mix again for 1 minute then stop and scrape down the sides of the bowl.

yellow mixer with chocolate sugar cookie dry ingredients on a gray marble counter.

Pour the all-purpose flour, cocoa powder, salt, baking soda, and baking powder into the bowl. Mix for one minute starting on low speed and gradually increasing to medium. Once it’s done set to the side.

Line baking sheets with parchment paper and set to the side.

scoop of cookie dough in scoop with mixing bowl with chocolate sugar cookie dough and white sugar in a clear bowl a gray marble counter.
mixing bowl with chocolate sugar cookie dough and a scoop and white sugar and one ball of cookie dough in a clear bowl on a gray marble counter.

Place the remaining granulated sugar into a bowl. Using a medium cookie scoop, scoop chocolate dough one-by-one and drop into the bowl with the sugar. Sprinkle sugar on top, roll the ball of dough around until it is covered in granulated sugar.

hand with chocolate sugar cookie dough ball rolled in sugar with a mixing bowl with scoop in background

It should look just like this.

11 raw cookie dough balls on a cookie baking sheet

Then place on an ungreased parchment lined baking sheet. Repeat until all the cookie dough is used.

close up of 6 baked chocolate sugar cookies on a cookie sheet.

Bake in the middle rack for 12 minutes until the cookies are just set. Remove from the oven and let rest on the baking sheet for 10-15 minutes until cooled and set then transfer to a wire rack.

FAQs

4 chocolate sugar cookies on a white plate with a pink striped white cloth in the background with a glass of milk and 10 baked cookies on a cookie sheet
How are chocolate sugar cookies different from regular sugar cookies?

Chocolate sugar cookies differ from regular sugar cookies primarily in flavor. While sugar cookies have a classic buttery and sweet taste, chocolate sugar cookies have a pronounced chocolate flavor due to the addition of cocoa powder or chocolate.

How long can I store chocolate sugar cookies, and what’s the best way to store them?

Chocolate sugar cookies can be stored in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 5 days.

Are there any variations of chocolate sugar cookies, like gluten-free or vegan options?

Yes, there are gluten-free and vegan variations of chocolate sugar cookies available. These recipes typically use alternative flours like almond flour or gluten-free baking mixes for gluten-free versions and substitutes like plant-based butter and egg replacers for vegan options. Just know that these methods have never been tested with this specific chocolate cookie recipe. Please test and bake at your own risk. 

Can you use this recipe to make chocolate cut out cookies?

Yes, but you will need to modify the recipe by removing an extra egg, baking soda, and baking powder. Then you will need to chill the dough, roll it out, and cut out using your favorite shaped cookie cutter.

Recipe Tips and Tricks

4 chocolate sugar cookies on a white plate with a pink striped white cloth in the background.

Here are a few of my tips and tricks when making these chocolate sugar cookies.

  • Spacing – Making sure to not overcrowd the baking sheet as the cookies will spread out.
  • Refrigeration of Dough – I tested this recipe by refrigerating the dough before baking and also the way it’s written–without refrigeration before baking. Neither way did the cookies come out a different way. Therefore, you can scoop and immediately bake or scoop, refrigerate, and wait to bake and you will still get the same delicious cookie.
  • Egg – For a less chewy cookie you can omit one egg. This is also good to know if you find that you only have 1 egg left to bake with.
  • Storage – Store the cookies in an airtight container or zip-lock bag. Store them with a slice of bread to help keep them soft for longer.

Simple Cookie Recipes

Looking for a few simple cookie recipes like my chocolate sugar cookies? Check out a few more of my favorite cookies to make.

  • 4 chocolate sugar cookies on a white plate with a pink striped white cloth in the background.
    Chocolate Sugar Cookies
  • White tray filled with 8 chocolate chip cookies with marshmallows.
    Chocolate Chip Marshmallow Cookies
  • Top view of chocolate cookies on aa wire rack.
    Chocolate Peanut Butter Chip Cookies
  • 2 chocolate chip cookies on two bright blue paper napkins on top of a striped white and blue dish cloth.
    Chocolate Chip Cookies

If you make this chocolate sugar cookies recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

4 chocolate sugar cookies on a white plate with a pink striped white cloth in the background.

Chocolate Sugar Cookies

Chocolate Sugar Cookies rival the vanilla counter part. These cookies have a soft and chewy texture with a little crunch thanks to being rolled in granulated sugar. These cookies come together within 30 minutes and are perfect for any occasion whether a cookie swap or simply craving chocolate.
No ratings yet
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Diet: Low Salt
Prep Time: 20 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 10 minutes minutes
Resting TIme: 15 minutes minutes
Total Time: 45 minutes minutes
Servings: 28
Calories: 158kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • KitchenAid Stand Mixer
  • Flat Paddle Attachment
  • Silicone Spatula
  • Measuring Spoons
  • Measuring Cups
  • Medium Cookie Scoop
  • Baking Sheets

Ingredients

  • 2 sticks Unsalted Butter softened
  • 1 cup Brown Sugar
  • 1 cup Granulated Sugar divided
  • 2 Eggs
  • 2 teaspoons Vanilla Extract
  • 2 cups All-Purpose Flour
  • ⅔ cup Dutch Process Cocoa Powder
  • ⅛ teaspoon Salt
  • 1 teaspoon Baking Soda
  • ½ teaspoon Baking Powder

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Using a KitchenAid stand mixer fitted with a paddle attachment begin to cream the butter, brown sugar and a ½ cup of the granulated sugar together. Mix together on medium speed for 2 minutes until creamy.
    2 sticks Unsalted Butter, 1 cup Brown Sugar, 1 cup Granulated Sugar
  • Then add the eggs one at a time while the mixer is on low speed. Pour in the vanilla extract. Mix again for 1 minute then stop and scrape down the sides of the bowl.
    2 Eggs, 2 teaspoons Vanilla Extract
  • Pour the all-purpose flour, cocoa powder, salt, baking soda, and baking powder into the bowl. Mix for one minute starting on low speed and gradually increasing to medium.
    2 cups All-Purpose Flour, ⅔ cup Dutch Process Cocoa Powder, ⅛ teaspoon Salt, 1 teaspoon Baking Soda, ½ teaspoon Baking Powder
  • Line baking sheets with parchment paper and set to the side.
  • Place the remaining ½ cup granulated sugar into a bowl. Using a medium cookie scoop, scoop chocolate dough one-by-one and drop into the bowl with the sugar. Sprinkle sugar on top, roll the ball of dough around until it is covered in granulated sugar then place on an un-greased parchment lined baking sheet. Repeat until all the cookie dough is used.
  • Bake in the middle rack for 12 minutes until the cookies are just set. Remove from the oven and let rest on the baking sheet for 10-15 minutes until cooled and set. Enjoy immediately or package in an air tight container for up to 5 days.

Notes

  • Spacing – Making sure to not over crowd the baking sheet as the cookies will spread out.
  • Refrigeration of Dough – I tested this recipe by refrigerating the dough before baking and also the way it’s written–without refrigeration before baking. Neither way did the cookies come out a different way. Therefore, you can scoop and immediately bake or scoop, refrigerate, and wait to bake and you will still get the same delicious cookie.
  • Egg – For a less chewy cookie you can omit one egg. This is also good to know if you find that you only have 1 egg left to bake with.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 158kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 29mg | Sodium: 65mg | Potassium: 58mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 219IU | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Banana Bread with Chocolate Chips

Published on: September 26, 2023 Updated on: July 5, 2020 by Katie Leave a Comment

Blue plate with slices of banana bread with chocolate chips with yellow bananas next to the plate.

Enter my kitchen, where ripe bananas and velvety chocolate chips unite to create Banana Bread with Chocolate Chips—a moist, flavorful loaf that marries the essence of bananas with the irresistible allure of chocolate, promising a delightful journey in every bite.

Blue plate filled with two slices of chocolate chip banana bread with yellow bananas next to the plate.

Banana bread with chocolate chips is a classic and beloved dessert that uses up those few bananas that are starting to brown. The rich, melt-in-your-mouth goodness of chocolate with the naturally sweet and moist essence of ripe bananas. This chocolate chip banana bread is requested monthly from my little ones. They enjoy this treat that can be perfect for breakfast, dessert, or as an anytime snack. The soft, tender crumb of the banana bread pairs harmoniously with the bursts of semi-sweet and mini chocolate chips, making every bite a delightful adventure in flavors and textures.

When I’m not making this basic version of chocolate chip banana bread I’m making my peanut butter banana bread or my double chocolate banana bread. Whether your in the mood for a classic of something a little extra–my banana bread recipes are tried and true and will never disappoint!

Why this Recipe Works

Irresistible Flavor: The combination of ripe bananas and chocolate chips creates a symphony of sweet, fruity, and chocolatey notes that dance on your taste buds, leaving you craving more.

Simple and Quick: This recipe is incredibly easy to follow, and it doesn’t require any fancy equipment or ingredients. With just a few steps, you can whip up a delicious loaf of banana bread with chocolate chips to enjoy with friends and family.

Versatility: Whether you’re hosting a brunch, need a comforting dessert, or want to surprise your loved ones with a homemade treat, this banana bread fits the bill. It’s a versatile recipe that suits various occasions.

Ingredients

Ingredients on counter; flour, brown sugar, butter, eggs, bananas, baking soda, salt, and chocolate chips.
  • Bananas – You will want at least 4 ripe bananas that you will mash
  • Sugar – You will need brown sugar for this recipe.
  • Butter – One stick of unsalted butter at room temperature works best for this recipe.
  • Egg– 1 egg preferably at room temperature.
  • Vanilla extract – This adds to the banana bread and makes the flavors come together.
  • All-purpose flour – I always use all-purpose flour for this recipe. I have not tried any other type of flour for this recipe, but I would imagine that half-wheat (half white flour /half whole wheat) could work but would yield a denser Banana bread. I also think with some tweaking you may be able to make this with gluten free flour. Once again, I have not tested this methods–just suggestions.
  • Baking soda – This helps the bread rise and cannot be skipped.
  • Salt – The butter balances the sweetness.
  • Chocolate chips – I use full size semi-sweet chocolate chips for this recipe. Dark chocolate or milk chocolate would work as well.

How to Make Banana Bread

First, preheat the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.

Bowl of mashed bananas with spotted bananas next to the bowl.

Mash the ripe bananas in a bowl using the tines of a fork.

butter and mashed bannanas mixed in a metal bowl fitted with a paddle attachment.

Using a stand mixer, fitted with a paddle attachment; cream together the brown sugar on medium-low speed for 30 seconds. Turn the mixer off, using a silicone spatula scrape down the sides of the bowl. Then, add in the mashed bananas, egg and vanilla extract. Mix again for 30 seconds.

Metal bowl filled with bananas, butter, flour, and flat paddle attachment.
Silver bowl filled batter and chocolate chips with a flat beater.

Then, add in the all-purpose flour, baking soda, and salt. Mix until combined 30 seconds to 1 minute. Then pour in the 1 cup of semi-sweet chocolate chips.

Metal pan filled with batter and chocolate chips.

Spray a loaf pan with cooking spray. Using the silicone spatula, spread the batter into the loaf pan. Sprinkle the ½ cup of chocolate chips on to the top of banana bread.

Bake for 1 hour and 15 minutes or until toothpick inserted in the middle comes clean.

Metal pan filled with baked banana bread with bananas around the pan.

Remove the banana bread from the oven. Let rest in pan for 30 minutes, then remove to a plate to continue cooling.

How to Make Banana Bread Muffins

You can transform this exact recipes into the muffin form! All you need to do is make the same batter, add cupcake liners to a muffin pan, scoop in the batter, sprinkle a few chocolate chips on top (as you would do for the actual loaf of banana bread) and bake at 350 degrees.

These muffins typically take about 18 to 25 minutes, depending on your oven’s temperature accuracy and the size of the muffins. To ensure they are done, you can perform a toothpick test. Insert a toothpick into the center of a muffin, and if it comes out clean or with a few moist crumbs (but not wet batter), your banana bread muffins are ready to be removed from the oven. Be sure to check them starting around the 18-minute mark and adjust the baking time accordingly.

FAQs

Three slices of banana bread with the loaf attached on a wood cutting board.
Can I use overripe bananas for this recipe?

Absolutely! Overripe bananas are ideal for this banana bread, as they are sweeter and provide a deeper banana flavor.

Can I substitute the chocolate chips with nuts?

Of course! If you prefer a nutty crunch, feel free to swap out the chocolate chips for chopped nuts like walnuts or pecans.

How should I store the banana bread?

To keep your banana bread fresh, wrap it tightly in plastic wrap or foil and store it at room temperature for up to 3 days. You can also freeze slices for longer storage.

Tips & Tricks

Blue plate with slices of banana bread with chocolate chips with yellow bananas and chocolate chips next to the plate.

If you want to make this chocolate chip banana bread here are a few of my favorite tips and tricks.

  • Banana Ripeness: The best bananas for this recipe are those with brown spots or even completely brown. They are sweeter and provide a stronger banana flavor.
  • Mixing Technique: When adding the dry ingredients, mix until just combined. Over-mixing can lead to a dense banana bread.
  • Chocolate Chips: You can use your favorite chocolate chips—whether dark, milk, or white—to customize the level of sweetness to your liking.
  • Cooling Time: Let the banana bread cool in the pan for 30 minutes before transferring it to a plate. This helps it set and prevents it from falling apart.
  • Customization: Feel free to add a dash of cinnamon or a sprinkle of sea salt on top for an extra layer of flavor.

Banana Recipes

Love banana’s? Try these other banana recipes:

  • Banana Blueberry Muffins
    Banana Blueberry Muffins
  • Two glasses filled with a pink smoothie with strawberries and paper straws in the glasses.
    Strawberry Banana Smoothie
  • Banana Raspberry Oatmeal Muffins
    Banana Raspberry Oatmeal Muffins
  • Three bright purple popsicles on white parchment paper with bananas and strawberries around it.
    Strawberry Beet and Banana Popsicles

If you make this chocolate chip banana bread recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

Blue plate with slices of banana bread with chocolate chips with yellow bananas next to the plate.

Banana Bread with Chocolate Chips

Enter my kitchen, where ripe bananas and velvety chocolate chips unite to create Banana Bread with Chocolate Chips—a moist, flavorful loaf that marries the essence of bananas with the irresistible allure of chocolate, promising a delightful journey in every bite.
No ratings yet
Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
Course: Bread
Cuisine: American
Diet: Low Salt
Prep Time: 15 minutes minutes
Cook Time: 1 hour hour 15 minutes minutes
Cooling Time: 30 minutes minutes
Total Time: 1 hour hour 30 minutes minutes
Servings: 8
Calories: 471kcal
Author: Katie

Equipment

  • KitchenAid Mixer
  • Measuring Cups
  • Measuring Spoons
  • 1 Silicone Spatula
  • 1 Loaf Pan

Ingredients

  • 4 ripe bananas mashed
  • ½ cup Unsalted butter softened
  • 1 cup packed light brown sugar
  • 2 large egg
  • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
  • 2 cups all-purpose flour
  • 1 teaspoons baking soda
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • 1-½ cups semi-sweet chocolate chips divided

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Mash the bananas in a bowl, and set to the side.
  • Using a stand mixer, fitted with a paddle attachment; cream together the brown sugar on medium-low speed for 30 seconds. Turn the mixer off, using a silicone spatula scrape down the sides of the bowl. Then, add in the mashed bananas, egg and vanilla extract. Mix again for 30 seconds.
  • Then, add in the all-purpose flour, baking soda, and salt. Mix until combined 30 seconds to 1 minute. Then pour in the 1 cup of semi-sweet chocolate chips.
  • Spray a loaf pan with cooking spray. Using the silicone spatula, spread the batter into the loaf pan. Sprinkle the ½ cup of chocolate chips on to the top of banana bread.
  • Bake for 1 hour and 15 minutes or until toothpick inserted in the middle comes clean.
  • Remove the banana bread from the oven. Let rest in pan for 30 minutes, then remove to a plate to continue cooling.

Notes

  • Banana Ripeness: The best bananas for this recipe are those with brown spots or even completely brown. They are sweeter and provide a stronger banana flavor.
  • Mixing Technique: When adding the dry ingredients, mix until just combined. Over-mixing can lead to a dense banana bread.
  • Chocolate Chips: You can use your favorite chocolate chips—whether dark, milk, or white—to customize the level of sweetness to your liking.
  • Cooling Time: Let the banana bread cool in the pan for 30 minutes before transferring it to a plate. This helps it set and prevents it from falling apart.
  • Customization: Feel free to add a dash of cinnamon or a sprinkle of sea salt on top for an extra layer of flavor.
  • Freezing: If you want to freeze this bread, I recommend freezing the entire loaf. It will last longer and not dry out like if you froze slices.
  •  
  •  
  •  
  •  

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 471kcal | Carbohydrates: 81g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 22mg | Sodium: 294mg | Potassium: 463mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 46g | Vitamin A: 84IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 43mg | Iron: 4mg
Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

Bruschetta Chicken Pasta

Published on: September 19, 2023 Updated on: September 19, 2023 by Katie 43 Comments

Skillet filled with pasta, tomatoes, basil, and sliced chicken on a blue and white checkered cloth.

Indulge in the flavors of Italy with my mouthwatering Bruschetta Chicken Pasta recipe! With juicy grilled chicken breast, a homemade tomato sauce with aromatic fresh basil, all mixed with freshly made pasta. This dish is a culinary journey you won’t want to miss.

I’ve been making this bruschetta chicken pasta for over a decade now. It first started thanks to my love for homemade bruschetta. This recipe came about because one day I had an abundance of leftover bruschetta, so I mixed it into pasta to use it up. I was in love instantly as was my husband. It also reminded me of TGI Friday’s bruschetta chicken pasta.

Once I realized this was a winning dish–I started entertaining with the bruschetta pasta. Family and friends all raved, and I knew this was a winning recipe. Whether you are looking for a delicious weeknight dinner or to entertain a crowd this flavorful Italian pasta dish will be your new go-to!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why this Recipe Works

  • A Taste of Italy at Home: If you’re longing for a taste of Italy but can’t make the trip, this recipe is your passport to Italian cuisine. The combination of fresh ingredients and bold flavors will transport your taste buds straight to the streets of Rome.
  • Quick and Easy: Don’t be fooled by the gourmet appeal of this dish; it’s surprisingly easy to make. With a few simple steps, you can have a restaurant-quality meal on your table in under 30 minutes, making it perfect for busy weeknights.
  • Customizable and Versatile: Bruschetta Chicken Pasta is highly customizable. You can adjust the ingredients to suit your taste preferences. Whether you prefer gluten-free pasta, want to add extra vegetables, or prefer a spicier kick, this recipe can easily be adapted to your liking.

Ingredients

  • Chicken – I like to use boneless skinless chicken breast for this recipe.
  • Seasoning – This base flavor of this recipe comes from McCormick Grill Mates® Roasted Garlic & Herb Seasoning. Without this seasoning the flavors will just not be there. So do yourself a favor, go find it in the spice aisle at your local grocery store.
  • Oil – The olive oil is needed to lightly coat the chicken and also the base for the sauce.
  • Butter – A few pat of butter make the sauce a little creamy.
  • Tomatoes – I love to use plum tomatoes for this recipe. They seem to hold their texture and shape.
  • Garlic – A few cloves bring out all the Italian flavors.
  • Lemon – A splash of acidity brings
  • Basil – Fresh basil, sliced very thin is mixed in at the end to bring out the flavors.
  • Pasta – I prefer to use homemade pasta for this recipe. However, any pasta works. If you can’t make it homemade you can always buy the refrigerated pasta. It tastes just as good.

How to Grill Chicken Breast

Pre-heat grill to medium-high heat. Clean grill well then reduce grill to medium heat.

While the grill is pre-heating, in a zip top bag add chicken breast, Roasted Garlic & Herb Seasoning, and olive oil. Seal bag and mix well until the chicken has been coated with the seasoning.

Two chicken breast on a black grill.

Place on the grill and cook for 12 minutes (turning once in between). Using a thermometer, make sure the internal temperature reads 165 degrees Fahrenheit. Remove chicken from the grill, let it rest for a few minutes, then slice chicken at a diagonal.

    Bruschetta Pasta

    Brown pot filled with diced tomatoes, seasoning, and butter/oil on a black stove top.

    In a large skillet add olive oil, butter, and garlic to the skillet. Head on medium-high heat for 1 minute. Then add the diced plum tomatoes. Reduce heat to medium and sauté for 5 minutes.

    Brown pot with tomatoes, oil, butter, and grated lemon on a stove top.

    Add the lemon zest, lemon juice, roasted garlic & herb seasoning and cook for 2 additional minutes.

    Black stove top with a brown pot with pasta, tomatoes, fresh basil, and tongs.

    Toss cooked pasta into the sauce and cook for one additional minute. Before plating, add fresh basil leaves. Mix well, and then divide the pasta amongst four plates. Add half a chicken breast on top of each plate of pasta and enjoy!

    FAQs

    Blue plate filled with pasta and chicken with a skillet filled with the same in the upper left corner.
    Can I use boneless, skinless chicken thighs instead of chicken breasts?

    Yes, chicken thighs are a great alternative to chicken breasts. They’re juicier and have a slightly richer flavor. Just be sure to adjust the cooking time as thighs may take a little longer to cook through.

    Can I make this dish vegetarian or vegan?

    Yes, you can. For a vegetarian version, omit the chicken and use vegetable broth instead of chicken broth. To make it vegan, skip the cheese or use a dairy-free alternative.

    What type of pasta should I use?

    For this bruschetta pasta I prefer to use spaghetti. However, you can use your favorite type of pasta for this recipe. Penne, linguini, or even whole wheat pasta all work well. Choose the pasta shape that you love the most.

    Recipe Tips and Tricks

    Blue square plate filled with pasta and sliced chicken with two forks next to it.

    Here are a few of my favorite tips and tricks when I make bruschetta chicken pasta.

    • Season the Chicken 0 Season your chicken breasts generously with the McCormick Grill Mates® Roasted Garlic & Herb Seasoning before cooking. If you can let it marinate for a few hours prior, that’s even better. This seasoning blend makes the dish complete.
    • Use Fresh Ingredients: Fresh, ripe tomatoes, basil, lemon, and olive oil will make a noticeable difference in the taste of your bruschetta topping.
    • Don’t Overcook the Tomatoes: When making the bruschetta topping, be careful not to overcook the tomatoes. You want them to soften slightly and release their juices but still maintain some texture.
    • Garnish Right Before Serving: Add the fresh basil and grated Parmesan cheese just before serving to keep the flavors and textures vibrant.
    • Experiment with Herbs: Feel free to experiment with different herbs in the bruschetta mixture. Basil is a classic choice, but oregano, parsley, or even a hint of thyme can provide a unique twist.
    • Gluten Free: Make this gluten free by swapping in gluten-free pasta if needed.

    With these tips and reasons in mind, you’re ready to embark on a culinary adventure with our Bruschetta Chicken Pasta recipe. Whether you’re an Italian cuisine enthusiast or simply looking for a delicious and quick meal, this dish will undoubtedly become a family favorite. Buon appetito!

    Easy Pasta Recipes

    Looking for more delicious pasta recipes? Check out a few more of my favorite pasta recipes.

    • Skillet filled with pasta, tomatoes, basil, and sliced chicken on a blue and white checkered cloth.
      Bruschetta Chicken Pasta
    • Up Close photo of the Spinach Stuffed Shells laying in a white baking dish.
      Stuffed Shells with Spinach
    • Black saute pan with lasagana cooked inside resting on a striped cloth.
      Lasagna Skillet
    • White bowl filled with pasta, shrimp, and scallops with a green pot in the background.
      Shrimp with Vodka Sauce

    If you make this bruschetta chicken pasta recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

    Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

    Skillet filled with pasta, tomatoes, basil, and sliced chicken on a blue and white checkered cloth.

    Bruschetta Chicken Pasta

    Indulge in the flavors of Italy with my mouthwatering Bruschetta Chicken Pasta recipe! With juicy grilled chicken breast, a homemade tomato sauce with aromatic fresh basil, all mixed with freshly made pasta. This dish is a culinary journey you won't want to miss.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
    Course: Main Course
    Cuisine: Italian
    Diet: Low Fat
    Prep Time: 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time: 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time: 30 minutes minutes
    Servings: 4
    Calories: 2014kcal
    Author: Katie

    Equipment

    • 1 Grill
    • Measuring Cups
    • Measuring Spoons
    • Cutting Board
    • Serrated Knife
    • 12-inch Skillet
    • Sauce Pot
    • Stove Top

    Ingredients

    For The Chicken

    • 2 Chicken Breast
    • 2 tablespoons McCormick Grill Mates® Roasted Garlic & Herb Seasoning
    • 1 tablespoon Olive Oil

    For The Pasta

    • 3 tablespoons Olive Oil
    • 2 tablespoons Unsalted Butter
    • 2 cloves Garlic minced
    • 2 cups Diced Plum Tomatoes 4 tomatoes
    • 1 tablespoon Lemon Zest
    • Half Lemon juiced
    • 1 tablespoon McCormick Grill Mates® Roasted Garlic & Herb Seasoning
    • 4 cups Homemade Spaghetti
    • 15 Basil Leaves Chiffonade

    Instructions

    For the Chicken:

    • Pre-heat grill to medium-high heat. Clean grill well then reduce grill to medium heat.
    • While the grill is pre-heating, in a zip top bag add chicken breast, Roasted Garlic & Herb Seasoning, and olive oil. Seal bag and mix well until the chicken has been coated with the seasoning.
    • Place on the grill and cook for 12 minutes (turning once in between). Using a thermometer, make sure the internal temperature reads 165 degrees Fahrenheit. Remove chicken from the grill, let it rest for a few minutes, then slice chicken at a diagonal.

    For the Pasta:

    • In a large skillet add olive oil, butter, and garlic to the skillet. Head on medium-high heat for 1 minute. Then add the diced plum tomatoes. Reduce heat to medium and sauté for 5 minutes. Add the lemon zest, lemon juice, roasted garlic & herb seasoning and cook for 2 additional minutes.
    • Toss cooked pasta into the sauce and cook for one additional minute. Before plating, add fresh basil leaves. Mix well, and then divide the pasta amongst four plates. Add half a chicken breast on top of each plate of pasta and enjoy!

    Notes

    1. Season the Chicken 0 Season your chicken breasts generously with the McCormick Grill Mates® Roasted Garlic & Herb Seasoning before cooking. If you can let it marinate for a few hours prior, that’s even better. This seasoning blend makes the dish complete.
    2. Use Fresh Ingredients: Fresh, ripe tomatoes, basil, lemon, and olive oil will make a noticeable difference in the taste of your bruschetta topping.
    3. Don’t Overcook the Tomatoes: When making the bruschetta topping, be careful not to overcook the tomatoes. You want them to soften slightly and release their juices but still maintain some texture.
    4. Garnish Right Before Serving: Add the fresh basil and grated Parmesan cheese just before serving to keep the flavors and textures vibrant.
    5. Experiment with Herbs: Feel free to experiment with different herbs in the bruschetta mixture. Basil is a classic choice, but oregano, parsley, or even a hint of thyme can provide a unique twist.
    6. Gluten Free: Make this gluten free by swapping in gluten-free pasta if needed.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1g | Calories: 2014kcal | Carbohydrates: 347g | Protein: 84g | Fat: 30g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Cholesterol: 87mg | Sodium: 164mg | Potassium: 1653mg | Fiber: 20g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 735IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 289mg | Iron: 11mg
    Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

    Strawberry Mojito Recipe

    Published on: September 13, 2023 Updated on: September 13, 2023 by Katie 4 Comments

    Whether you’re seeking a vibrant summer refreshment or a comforting drink to warm up your winter nights, my Strawberry Mojito recipe has you covered with their delightful taste and versatility. Give them a try — you won’t be disappointed!

    Two glasses with strawberry drink with mint and fresh strawberries for garnish.

    No matter the season, a delightful cocktail can always brighten your day. While we often associate refreshing drinks with summer, there’s one concoction that can be enjoyed year-round: the Strawberry Mojito.

    This twist on the classic Mojito promises a flavorful journey through sweet, tangy, and minty notes, making it an ideal choice whether you’re basking in the warmth of a sunny afternoon or cozying up indoors with friends. In this blog post, we’ll guide you through the art of crafting the perfect Strawberry Mojito, providing answers to common questions and insider tips to elevate your mixology skills, no matter the time of year.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why this Recipe Works

    1. Irresistible Flavor: Strawberry Mojitos offer a tantalizing combination of sweet, tangy, and minty flavors. The natural sweetness of ripe strawberries pairs perfectly with the zesty kick of lime juice and the refreshing mint leaves. The result is a harmonious blend that’s as delicious as it is refreshing, making it a delightful treat for your taste buds.
    2. Versatile All-Year-Round: Unlike some cocktails that are reserved for specific seasons, Strawberry Mojitos are versatile and can be enjoyed year-round. Whether it’s a hot summer day, a cozy winter evening by the fireplace, or any time in between, these mojitos provide a burst of fruity freshness that’s perfect for any occasion.
    3. Customizable and Adaptable: Strawberry Mojitos are highly customizable to suit your preferences. You can adjust the level of sweetness, tartness, and even the alcohol content to make them just right for you. Plus, you can easily make non-alcoholic versions for guests who prefer a booze-free option, making it a crowd-pleaser at gatherings and parties.

    Strawberry Mojito Ingredients

    Ingredients on marble countertop: bacardi limon, club soda, strawberry simple syrup, strawberries, and mint.
    • Rum – Pick the highest quality rum and one that you like to drink. I prefer Bacardi, but the options are limitless.
    • Club Soda – This will be a base to give the mojito a little bubbly.
    • SImple Syrup – I like to use my homemade strawberry simple syrup. You can also use mint simple syrup or even traditional simple syrup.
    • Mint – Fresh mint is key to this recipe. You cannot make the recipe without it. We always make mojitos when we have an abundance of mint in our garden. It’s the best way to use it up.
    • Strawberries – Fresh strawberries are ideal for this recipe; however, you can use frozen if in a pinch and not in season.

    How to Make a Strawberry Mojito

    Metal shaker with mint and strawberries.

    Place mint leaves and diced strawberries in bottom of cocktail shaker.

    Silver shaker with crushed strawberries and an orange muddler

    Muddle until most of the strawberries are smashed.

    Metal shaker with female hand pouring strawberry simple syrup.

    Pour in the strawberry simple syrup into the glass, citrus rum, and a few ice cubes to chill the drink, then top with club soda.

    Two glasses and a mason jar - top view filled with mint and strawberries.

    Garnish with a sprig of mint and a fresh strawberry. Repeat and make as many more as your heart desires!

    FAQs

    Two glasses filled with a pink drink and mint and strawberry as garnish with a mason jar filled with a pink liquid.

    Here are a few of the most frequently asked questions when making a strawberry mojito!

    What’s in a Strawberry Mojito?

    A classic Strawberry Mojito comprises fresh strawberries, mint leaves, lime juice, simple syrup (or sugar), white rum, and soda water. It’s a refreshing blend of fruity, citrusy, and herbal notes that make it irresistible.

    Can I make a non-alcoholic version?

    Absolutely! To make a non-alcoholic Strawberry Mojito (sometimes called a Virgin Strawberry Mojito), simply skip the rum and add a bit more soda water. You’ll still get all the wonderful flavors without the alcohol kick.

    Can I use frozen strawberries?

    While fresh strawberries are preferred for their vibrant flavor, you can use frozen strawberries if fresh ones are unavailable. Just make sure to thaw them slightly before muddling to release their juices.

    Is it necessary to use a muddler?

    A muddler is highly recommended to gently crush the strawberries and mint leaves, releasing their essential oils and flavors. If you don’t have a muddler, the back of a spoon can work in a pinch.

    What type of rum is best for Strawberry Mojitos?

    Light or white rum is the go-to choice for Strawberry Mojitos. Its clean, neutral flavor allows the fruit and mint to shine. Brands like Bacardi and Havana Club work beautifully.

    Tips and Tricks

    2 glasses filled with mint and strawberry with garnish.

    Here are a few of my favorite tips and tricks when making a strawberry mojito.

    • Freshness is Key – Always use fresh strawberries and mint leaves for the best flavor. Bruised or wilted herbs won’t give you the aromatic punch you desire.
    • Adjust the Sweetness – Tailor the sweetness to your taste. If you prefer a sweeter cocktail, add a touch more simple syrup. For a tangier twist, increase the lime juice.
    • Crush Gently – When muddling the strawberries and mint, be gentle. Over-muddling can release bitter compounds from the mint leaves.
    • The Ice Matters – Use crushed ice for a quicker chill and more surface area for flavor infusion. It also makes your drink look stunning.
    • Garnish with Flair – A sprig of fresh mint and a strawberry slice make for a visually appealing garnish. Serve your Strawberry Mojito in a tall glass with a colorful straw for that extra “wow” factor.

    Mint Recipes

    Looking for more recipes with mint in it? Check out a few more ways to use up the abundance of fresh mint you may have.

    • Strawberry Mint Sparkling Soda
      Strawberry Mint Sparkling Soda
    • Blue bowl filled with scoops of Peach Mint Sorbet with fresh peaches and a pint of sorbet.
      Peach Mint Sorbet
    • Top view of a glass jar filled with mint sprigs with clear liquid.
      Mint Simple Syrup

    If you make this strawberry mojito recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

    Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

    Strawberry Mojito Recipe

    Whether you're seeking a vibrant summer refreshment or a comforting drink to warm up your winter nights, my Strawberry Mojito recipe has you covered with their delightful taste and versatility. Give them a try — you won't be disappointed!
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
    Course: Drinks
    Cuisine: American
    Diet: Gluten Free, Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time: 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time: 5 minutes minutes
    Servings: 1
    Calories: 295kcal
    Author: Katie

    Equipment

    • 1 Cocktail Shaker
    • 1 Cocktail Muddler
    • 1 Cocktail Glass

    Ingredients

    • 6 mint leaves plus more for garnish
    • 2-3 strawberries diced + 1 additional strawberry for garnish
    • 2 ounces Strawberry Simple Syrup
    • 2 ounces Citrus Rum
    • 4 ounces Club Soda

    Instructions

    • Place mint leaves and diced strawberries in bottom of cocktail shaker. Muddle until most of the strawberries are smashed.
    • Pour in the strawberry simple syrup into the glass, citrus rum, and a few ice cubes to chill the drink, then top with club soda.
    • Garnish with a sprig of mint and a fresh strawberry. Enjoy.

    Notes

    • Freshness is Key – Always use fresh strawberries and mint leaves for the best flavor. Bruised or wilted herbs won’t give you the aromatic punch you desire.
    • Adjust the Sweetness – Tailor the sweetness to your taste. If you prefer a sweeter cocktail, add a touch more simple syrup. For a tangier twist, increase the lime juice.
    • Crush Gently – When muddling the strawberries and mint, be gentle. Over-muddling can release bitter compounds from the mint leaves.
    • The Ice Matters – Use crushed ice for a quicker chill and more surface area for flavor infusion. It also makes your drink look stunning.
    • Garnish with Flair – A sprig of fresh mint and a strawberry slice make for a visually appealing garnish. Serve your Strawberry Mojito in a tall glass with a colorful straw for that extra “wow” factor.
    *Nutritional calculations are estimated and may vary depending on serving size and ingredients.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 8ounces | Calories: 295kcal | Carbohydrates: 44g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 59mg | Potassium: 72mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 43g | Vitamin A: 255IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 15mg | Iron: 2mg
    Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!

    Strawberry Simple Syrup

    Published on: August 30, 2023 Updated on: February 4, 2020 by Katie 8 Comments

    Glass mason jar sitting on a white cloth filled with pink liquid and strawberries next to it.

    Elevate your beverage game with my strawberry simple syrup recipe. Bursting with the natural sweetness of ripe strawberries, this versatile syrup adds a delightful twist to drinks and desserts. Discover how a cup of sugar, water, and fresh strawberries can transform into a vibrant syrup that’s easy to make and even easier to enjoy.

    Glass mason jar filled with pink liquid with a basket of strawberries in the background.

    If you’re seeking to infuse a burst of strawberry goodness into your favorite beverages and treats, look no further than this 3 ingredient strawberry simple syrup recipe. I’ve been making his recipe for almost a decade now and has stood the test of time. With just a cup of white granulated sugar, a cup of water, and a cup of sliced strawberries, you can create a syrup that’s both versatile and indulgent. Whether you’re looking to enhance iced tea or upgrade your cocktail game and make strawberry mojitos or strawberry margaritas— this strawberry simple syrup is a must-have in your culinary arsenal.

    Why this Recipe Works

    1. Flavorful Transformation: By simmering fresh strawberries with sugar and water, you unlock a concentrated essence of strawberries that’s perfect for adding depth and character to a wide range of beverages and dishes.
    2. Creative Culinary Play: This strawberry simple syrup isn’t limited to beverages alone. Use it to mix into salad dressings or marinades for a hint of sweetness.
    3. Effortless Elegance: With just three basic ingredients and minimal cooking time, you’ll have a stunning homemade syrup that elevates your culinary creations, impresses guests, and adds a touch of gourmet flair to your everyday routine.

    Ingredients

    Ingredients on gray and white marble counter: Strawberries, water, and white sugar.
    • Strawberries – One cup of diced strawberries is all you need.
    • Water – Water is key in helping to make the simple syrup.
    • Sugar – White granulated sugar produces the perfect simple syrup and will help extract the flavor out of the strawberries.

    Directions

    Chopped strawberries in a pot with water, and sugar on a stovetop.

    In a medium pot, combine sugar, water, and strawberries and bring to a boil. Once the mixture reaches a boil, lower the flame to medium-low.

    Brown pot with pink bubbling water on a black stove top.

    Stir occasionally and let cook for 10 minutes until sugar has dissolved and strawberries are no longer firm.

    B lack pot pouring liquid and strawberries over a strainer on a glass mason jar.

    Let the strawberry simple syrup cool to room temperature. Strain the cooked strawberries in a strainer, and strain the juice into a mason jar. Refrigerate and use up to one week.

    FAQS

    Glass mason jar with pink liquid and fresh strawberries surround the jar.
    How long does the strawberry simple syrup last?

    When stored in a sealed container like a mason jar in the refrigerator, the syrup can maintain its quality for up to one week.

    Can I use frozen strawberries for this recipe?

    While fresh strawberries are recommended for optimal flavor, you can also use frozen strawberries if fresh ones aren’t available. Since you won’t be eating the strawberries the texture won’t matter.

    How can I customize the syrup’s sweetness level?

    The recipe provides a balanced level of sweetness, but you can adjust it by adding more or less sugar according to your taste preferences.

    Tips & Tricks

    Glass mason jar filled with pink liquid resting on a white and blue striped cloth with fresh berries next to it.

    Here are a few of my favorite tips and tricks when making strawberry simple syrup.

    • Serving Size: Calories were calculated based on 1 tablespoon serving. Nutritional calculations are estimated and may vary depending on serving size and ingredients.
    • Strawberry Selection: Choose ripe, fragrant strawberries for the best flavor. Overripe strawberries might result in an overly sweet syrup.
    • Mashing Technique: Gently mash the strawberries while they cook to help release their juices and flavor. Avoid over-mashing to prevent a cloudy syrup.
    • Storage Hack: To extend the syrup’s shelf life, consider freezing it in ice cube trays. This allows you to conveniently portion out smaller amounts for future use.
    • Creative Combos: Experiment with adding herbs like basil or mint during the simmering process to create unique flavor profiles.
    • Cooked Strawberries: You can save the cooked strawberries to add into drinks or freeze to use as ice cubes when you make a drink.
    • Robust Flavor: I did do some experimenting and if you want a more robust strawberry flavor, puree the simple syrup once its cooled in a blender or food processor. If you don’t like the seeds just run the simple syrup through a strainer to remove all the seeds.

    Strawberry Recipes

    • Two glasses filled with a pink smoothie with strawberries and paper straws in the glasses.
      Strawberry Banana Smoothie
    • Strawberries and cream in serving dish and bowl on top of white and pink kitchen towel
      Strawberries and Cream
    • Strawberry Balsamic Dressing photo
      Strawberry Feta Spinach Salad
    • 5 triangle turnovers dusted with powdered sugar on brown paper.
      Strawberry Turnovers

    If you make this strawberry simple syrup recipe, I would be honored and love for you to take the time to leave a ⭐ star rating and comment! I spend hours developing and testing these recipes, and always love to hear feedback and user experience!

    Don’t forget to FOLLOW ME on Facebook, Pinterest, and Instagram, and subscribe to my email list!

    Glass mason jar sitting on a white cloth filled with pink liquid and strawberries next to it.

    Strawberry Simple Syrup

    Elevate your beverage game with my strawberry simple syrup recipe. Bursting with the natural sweetness of ripe strawberries, this versatile syrup adds a delightful twist to drinks and desserts.
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Pin Save Saved! Rate
    Course: Sauce
    Cuisine: American
    Diet: Gluten Free, Vegan, Vegetarian
    Prep Time: 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time: 10 minutes minutes
    Cooling Time: 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time: 45 minutes minutes
    Servings: 32
    Calories: 26kcal
    Author: Katie

    Equipment

    • Measuring Cup
    • 1 Cutting Board
    • 1 Knife
    • 1 Pot
    • 1 Whisk
    • 1 Stovetop

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup White Granulated Sugar
    • 1 cup Water
    • 1 cup Strawberries Sliced

    Instructions

    • In a medium pot, combine sugar, water, and strawberries and bring to a boil. Once the mixture reaches a boil, lower the flame to medium-low. Stir occasionally and let cook for 10 minutes until sugar has dissolved and strawberries are no longer firm.
    • Let the strawberry simple syrup cool to room temperature. Strain the cooked strawberries in a strainer, and strain the juice into a mason jar. Refrigerate and use up to one week.

    Notes

    • Serving Size: Calories were calculated based on 1 tablespoon serving. Nutritional calculations are estimated and may vary depending on serving size and ingredients.
    • Strawberry Selection: Choose ripe, fragrant strawberries for the best flavor. Overripe strawberries might result in an overly sweet syrup.
    • Mashing Technique: Gently mash the strawberries while they cook to help release their juices and flavor. Avoid over-mashing to prevent a cloudy syrup.
    • Storage Hack: To extend the syrup’s shelf life, consider freezing it in ice cube trays. This allows you to conveniently portion out smaller amounts for future use.
    • Creative Combos: Experiment with adding herbs like basil or mint during the simmering process to create unique flavor profiles.
    • Cooked Strawberries: You can save the cooked strawberries to add into drinks or freeze to use as ice cubes when you make a drink.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1tablespoon | Calories: 26kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 0.03g | Fat: 0.03g | Saturated Fat: 0.001g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.002g | Sodium: 0.5mg | Potassium: 7mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 1IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 1mg | Iron: 0.02mg
    Tried this Recipe? Tag me Today!Mention @KatieJasiewicz or tag #katiescucina!
    Next Page »

    I'm Katie Jasiewicz: home cook, food blogger, and recipe developer. A busy mom of two children who loves to feed her family delicious meals that don’t take hours to cook! My mission is to create easy-to-make modern comfort food for the busy family. (more)

    Featured On

    brand logos in collaage; food network, MSN, kitchenaid, country living, world market, etc

    Most Popular Recipes

    • Glass baking dish filled with peach cobbler resting on a striped dish cloth.
      Old Fashioned Peach Cobbler
    • Broccoli Cheese Casserole spooned out of white baking dish
      Broccoli Casserole with Ritz Crackers
    • Female hand holding a tortilla chip over a bowl of queso dip.
      Velveeta Cheese Dip
    • Glass plate filled with an apple pie with powdered sugar.
      Apple Pie with Streusel Topping
    • White oval dish filled with creamed spinach on a blue and white striped towel.
      Steakhouse Creamed Spinach
    • Dried spaghetti on a countertop.
      KitchenAid Pasta Recipe

    Grilling Recipes

    • White plate with dots with 2 grilled chicken strips, rice, and green beans on a blue and white checkered cloth.
      Grilled Chicken Strips
    • Thinly slices of steak on a white plate with steak juice on plate.
      Grilled Flank Steak
    • Sliced pork with green beans, and mashed sweet potato on a white and blue checkered cloth.
      Grilled Pork Tenderloin
    • White platter sitting on top of a white and blue stripped cloth with turkey sliced on top of spinach.
      Grilled Turkey Tenderloin

    Footer

    logos of places Katie's Cucina has been featured on; food network, KitchenAid, Stonyfield, Country LIving, Women's Health, etc.

    COPYRIGHT © KATIE'S CUCINA 2009-2025
    AS AN AMAZON ASSOCIATE I EARN FROM QUALIFYING PURCHASES.
    PRIVACY POLICY · ACCESSIBILITY STATEMENT · DESIGN BY GRACE + VINE STUDIOS

    Rate This Recipe

    Your vote:




    A rating is required
    A name is required
    An email is required